Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutB12-0042 Concert hall_Lionshead corrections required Technical Specifications For East Lionshead Circle Bus Stop & Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Improvement Project Permit Documents TOWN OF VAIL DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS/TRANSPORTATION 1309 Elkhorn Drive Vail, Colorado 81657 March 8, 2012 TABLE OF CONTENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02050 Removals 02200 Earthwork 02221 Excavating, Backfilling, and Compacting 02232 Aggregate Base Course 02233 Watering 02260 Fine Grading 02400 Water Control 02513 Asphalt Pavement 02515 Concrete Paving 02521 Concrete Unit Pavers 02621 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 02622 Plastic Pipe 02815 Irrigation System DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 03201 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 042000 Unit Masonry 044200 Exterior Stone Cladding DIVISION 05 – METALS 055000 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 061000 Rough Carpentry 062000 Finish Carpentry DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071113 Bituminous Dampproofing 072500 Weather Barriers 074623 Wood Siding 076100 Sheet Metal Roofing 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076500 Flexible Flashing 079005 Joint Sealers DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 099000 Painting and Coating 099300 Staining and Transparent Finishing 099600 High-Performance Coatings DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING/MECHANICAL – BEAUDIN GANZE 15010 Plumbing General Provisions 15050 Plumbing Basic Materials and Methods 15100 Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks 15113 Hydronic Piping 15113 Metal Ducts 15123 Facility, Natural Gas Piping 15316 Radiant Heating Hydronic Piping 15413 Facility Storm Drainage Piping 15423 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 15700 Plumbing Insulation 15900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL – BEAUDIN GANZE 16010 Electrical General Provisions 16100 Basic Materials and Methods 16400 Service and Distribution 16521 Exterior Lighting DIVISION 32 – LANDSCAPING 32-0190 Tree Protection and Retention 32-1316 Integrally Colored Architectural Cast-in-Place Concr ete 32-1414 Paver Edge 32-3200 Site Stone 32 9000 Landscape General Conditions 32-9100 Planting Preparation 32-9113 Topsoil 32-9200 Sod Turf 32-9413 Landscape Edging February 15, 2012 East Lionshead Circle Bus Stop & Concert Hall Plaza Professional Seals Page 00001 - 1 SECTION 00001 PROFESSIONAL SEALS PAGE I/we hereby certify that these Contract Documents ha ve been prepared by me/us or under my/our direct supervision in accordance with the rules and regulations governing the Architects/Engineers practicing in the State of Color ado. Landscape Architect Mary Hart Design PO Box 8258 Breckenridge, CO 80424 Civil Engineering Alpine Engineering, Inc. PO Box 97 Edwards, CO 81632 Architect 42|40 Architecture Inc. 3507 Ringsby Court, Suite 117 Denver, Co 80216 Mechanical / Electrical / Plumbing Engineer Beaudin Ganze Consulting Engineers, Inc. P.O. Box 9650 Avon, CO 81620 Structural Engineer Engineering Designworks, Inc. 1169 Hilltop Parkway, Suite 206A Steamboat Springs, CO 80487 END OF SECTION Fe bru a r y 1 5 ,20 1 2 Eas t L i o n shead C ir c le Bu s S top &C once rt H a ll Pl aza SECTION 00001 PROFESSIONAL SEALS PAGE I/we h ereby certify t h a t th ese Co ntr act D oc um e nt s h ave b ee n p r ep a r ed b y m e/u s o r und er m y /o u r d i r ec t s up e r v i sio n in accordance wit h the ru l es and reg u lations governing the Arch i tectslEngi n eers practicing in t h e Sta t e of C o l o r a d o.Landscape Architect Mary Hart D esign PO Box 8258 Breckenridge ,CO 80424 Civil Eng in eering Alpine Engineering,Inc .PO Box 97 Edward s,CO 81632 Architect 42140 Architecture Inc.3507 R ings b y Co u rt ,S u ite 117 Den v er ,Co 80216 Mec h anical/E l ectrical/Plu m b i n g Engineer Beaudin Ganze Cons ult ing Engineers,Inc .P .O .B ox 9650 Avon ,CO 81620 --Structural Engineer Engineering Designworks ,Inc .1169 Hilltop Parkway ,S ui te 206A Steamboat Springs ,CO 80487 EN D OF S E C T IO N Professio n a l S ea l s P age 00 00 1 -1 February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Removals 02050 - 1 SECTION 02050 REMOVALS PART 1: GENERAL 1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The General Contract Conditions , Drawings and other Division-1 Specification sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.1 DESCRIPTION: The work of this section consists of demolition and removal of existing bus shelter, asphalt pavement, concrete slabs and curbs, stone and co ncrete unit pavers, site boulders, site utilities, concrete, steps and handrails, walls and stone masonry, lighting and furnishings, trees and other plant material, signs, abandoned utilities and miscellaneous si te furnishings. The work also includes filling and grading, and disposal of unsalvageable materials. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls – Se ction 01500 B. Tree Protection and Retention - Section 32-0190 C. Earthwork - Section 02200 D. Watering - Section 02233 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Comply with safety requirements for demolition, ANSI A10.6-83. Erect suitable barriers around open excavations. Blasting will not be permitted without prior approval of Owner’s Representative. No burning will be permitted. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Any and all materials removed, unless designated to be salvaged or reused, shall become the property of the Contractor. B. Materials to be reused shall be protected from defaci ng or damage, and shall be reused in conformance with the applicable specification sections and in the configuration show on the construction plans. C. Materials to be salvaged shall be protected from defa cing and damage, and shall be stockpiled in a location designated by the Owner’s Representative. D. Keep dust to a minimum at removal areas. Use sprinkle rs or water trucks as necessary. E. Ensure safety of persons in demolition area. Provi de temporary barricades as required per Section 01500. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIALS: Satisfactory soil material for b ackfilling hole and pits created by removals shall be in conformance with the provisions of Section 02200. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Removals 02050 - 2 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION: A. Protect structures, pavement, utilities, and vegetati on to remain. B. Set up all barriers, including those for tree protect ion, per Sections 02125 and 01500. 3.2 REMOVALS: A. The contractor shall removal all items and materi als as designated on the construction plans, or otherwise directed by the Owner’s Representative, with out disturbing existing adjacent improvements. Where adjacent improvements are damaged by the Contractor’s operations they shall be repaired and/or replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative and at the Contractor’s expense. B. Where concrete, pavers, asphalt walks, or roadways a re to be removed, sawcutting or other approved methods shall be performed at the location of th e extent of demolition. Sawcutting shall be to the full thickness of the material and sha ll be straight and true. C. Underground utilities shall be removed or abandoned as i ndicated on the construction plans. Underground utilities not specified to be removed or abandon ed in the construction plans shall be abandoned unless their location conflicts with the propo sed improvements. Contractor shall be responsible for notifying Owner’s representative of lo cation of utility abandonments prior to backfill of trench and all underground abandonments shall b e clearly delineated on the project record drawings. Contractor shall fill and/or plug aban donments as indicated on the construction plans. D. Underground utility materials shall be removed to the nearest joint beyond the limits of removal. Contractor shall coordinate all isolation, disconnect ion and shut-off of utility systems with Owner’s Representative a minimum of seven days prior to affecting service of any utility. Excavation, backfill and compaction associated with undergr ound demolition and relocation shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Sect ion 02200. E. All light standards and fixtures, signage, utility valve manhole covers shall be salvaged, removed, and stockpiled in a location designated by the Own er’s Representative. Foundations and associated items for these items shall be removed and disposed of at the Contractor’s expense. Contractor shall reinstall these items as n oted in the drawings or as directed by the Owner’s Representative. F. Miscellaneous street items including view corridor ide ntification points, control points, benchmarks, monuments, shall be salvaged, removed, and re set as required by Owner’s Representative. Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of these points and any surveying required to reestablish prior to final acceptanc e. G. In areas where existing snowmelt and/or concrete uni t paver system are specified to remain, the Contractor shall coordinate all removals with Owner’s Representative to ensure appropriate connections and transitions of pavement material. Con tractor shall be responsible for replacement of all paving materials designated to remain damaged by construction operations. In addition, Contractor shall be responsible for reinstal ling existing snowmelt systems including all damages to system caused by construction. All snowmelt systems designated to remain must be fully operational at final acceptance. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Removals 02050 - 3 H. Site walls and stone shall be removed as indicated o n construction plans. Foundations and associated miscellaneous items for these items shall be removed and disposed of at the Contractor’s expense. In specific locations portions of existing site walls are to remain, sawcutting or other approved methods shall be performed at these location of the extent of demolition where indicated on the construction plans. Sa wcutting shall be to the full thickness of the material and shall be straight and true. I. Building veneer and related appurtenances shall be remov ed as indicated on plans. Contractor shall field verify and coordinate removals from building faces with Owner’s Representative and Property Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for protecting building materials exposed by veneer removal during construction. Where adjacent buildi ng improvements are damaged by the Contractor’s operations they shall be repaired and/or r eplaced to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative and at the Contractor’s expense. J. Landscape areas shall be removed as indicated on the construction plans including all plant material, mulch, topsoil, and related irrigation as indic ated on the plans or as directed by the Owner’s Representative. K. All materials designated to be removed or demolished a nd not designated to be reused or salvaged shall be hauled off the Project site and legally disposed of at the Contractor’s expense. 3.3 RESTORATION: A. Backfilling: 1. Holes and pits created by removing existing structures an d materials shall be backfilled with satisfactory soil material. This mat erial shall be placed in lifts, moisture treated and compacted in accordance with the requi rements of Section 02200. The backfill shall be graded to within plus or minus 0.1 foot of the elevations indicated on the final drawings. 2. Ensure that areas to be filled are free of standing w ater, frost, frozen material, and debris. 3.4 DISPOSAL: A. Remove trash, debris and waste materials, and legall y dispose of it off the property. B. All materials to be stockpiled, whether temporarily for reuse or for disposition by the Owner, shall be protected from contamination, defacement, degra dation, adverse weather condition, and vandalism in accordance with the contract documents. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Street scape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Earthwork 02200-1 SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and Install: 1. Excavation, including Haul 2. Fill 3. Removal and Replacement of Subgrade Material 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 02221: Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting For Ut ility Systems 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: All soils testing during construction will be conducted by an approved testing laboratory. B. All materials and operations under this section of t he Specifications shall be executed under the supervision of an Owner’s Representative employed by the Owner who will place qualified personnel on the site during earthwork operations, as nec essary. Provide free access to work sites and facilities at all times and provide the equipment and m anpower necessary for the Owner’s Representative to perform his work at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Regulatory Requirements: Applicable codes, ordinances a nd regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with: 1. Compaction standard: Standard Proctor Density, ASTM D -698-78. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Test reports of soils testing during construction will be distributed by the testing laboratory and/or Owner’s Representative. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Visit, inspect, and become familiar with the site and the work required under this Section. B. Contractor Investigation: Test borings and other explor atory work may be made by the Contractor, at no cost to the Owner, after obtainin g approval to proceed from the Owner’s Representative. The Contractor will not be entitled to extra compensation for any additional work required thereby. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Street scape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Earthwork 02200-2 C. Existing Utilities: 1. Locate all existing underground utilities and pipes in the a reas of work. If the utilities and pipes are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. Properly repair damage to utilities to the sa tisfaction of the utility company at no expense to the Owner. 2. Should pipes or utilities be encountered during excavation w hich had not been located or were incorrectly located, consult the utility company i mmediately and provide assistance and cooperation in repairing and restoring the utility ser vice. 3. Do not interrupt any existing utility service, except af ter obtaining written permission from both the utility company and the Owner. Provide a cceptable temporary utility services during these interruptions. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Fill and Backfill: Settlement in backfill, fill, o r in structures and paving built over backfill or fill, which may occur within the two year warranty period sh all be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Restore any structures damaged by settlement to their or iginal condition at no cost to the Owner. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL A. General: Fill material shall be approved as to type by the Geotechnical Engineer and/or Owner’s Representative before placement. B. Fill Material: On-site excavated material free deb ris, organic, expansive and frozen materials and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and/or Owner’s Representative, meeting moisture placement limitations. 2.02 HAUL The transportation of unusable excavated material from the work site to a disposal area or the haul of fill into the site as may be required. Haul will not be paid separately, and costs should be included in the “Earthwork-Complete in Place” quantities. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Site Visit: Visit and inspect the site and take int o consideration known or reasonably inferable conditions affecting the work. Failure to visit the si te will not relieve the Contractor of furnishing materials or performing the work required. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field Engineering: See the drawings for benchmarks, m onuments, reference points and layout of the work. B. Explosives: The use of rock breaker charges may be al lowed upon receipt of Town of Vail prior approval on a case by case basis. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Street scape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Earthwork 02200-3 C. Protection: 1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this wo rk and post warning lights. Provide barricades and warning lights as recommended by aut horities having jurisdiction. 2. Adequately protect all structures, utilities, sidewalks, pa vements, and other facilities existing prior to this work from damage caused by settlemen t, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwor k. 3. Restore any structure or facility existing prior to th is work which is damaged during completion of this work to a condition as good as or bet ter than existed before the work commenced, regardless if the damage was caused accidentally or through carelessness. Restoration shall be approved by the Owner’s Representa tive or other parties having jurisdiction over the facilities and shall be at no addi tional cost to the Owner. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate existing materials to the lines and grades indicated. Remove materials in such a manner as to provide as readily usable a material as possible. The quantities of earthwork are calculated by end area method for this project. The quantity calculations are based on an additional thi ckness of 11 inches of excavation below bottom of existing pavement to obtain proper subgrade eleva tion for proposed roadway pavement section. Additional excavation to be hauled off as part of the uti lity construction may be required but will not be paid as part of Earthwork Pay Item. No additional earthwork quantities will be paid for unless changes to the 11- inch thickness used in the calcul ations is justified. Actual quantities will vary due to excess material excava ted for the structures, utility trench system, storm sewer trench riprap placement, etc. No additional payment will be made for this earthwork and shall be paid as part of the work required for the related construction item. B. Excess Material: The Fill quantities include a 15 % factor in volume loss t o compensate for compaction of material above natural ground compaction levels. . C. Unclassified Excavation: All excavation is consider ed as unclassified and is defined as removal of all material encountered, regardless of soil type. U nclassified excavation is considered normal excavation and no extra payments will be allowed. 1. Methods of Excavation: It is anticipated that excavat ion can be performed by conventional equipment. 3.04 STABILIZATION MATERIAL A. Observation: When excavation has reached the design ed lines and grades, notify the Owner’s Representative who will observe the conditions in the excavation. B. Remedial Work: If material exposed in the excavations is deemed unsuitable for construction, remove and replace the unsuitable material with angular r ock ranging in size from 3-inch spalls to Type VL, as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Use of Stabilization Material below design lines and grades shall only be completed upon prior appr oval by the Owner’s Representative. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Street scape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Earthwork 02200-4 3.05 PREPARATION OF NATURAL GROUND A. General: Remove frozen or muddy ground in fill areas. B. Structure Subgrade Preparation: Prior to placing any ne w fill, fill areas should be stripped of all the asphalt, loose soils, existing fill, vegetation and organic soil To properly prepare the Structure Subgrade area may require l owering of the groundwater level. This may be accomplished by installation of an interc eptor drain, trench or dewatering wells. The ground surface beneath the embankment prism should be s carified to a depth of 6 inches, moisture conditioned, and compacted to 95% of the maximum modi fied Proctor density prior to the beginning of fill placement. 3.06 FILLING A. General: Fill and compact to levels required to compl ete the work indicated. Filling may require soil material in excess of quantity of suitable materia l available from required grading and excavations. Some material may require adjustment of mo isture and rehandling before placement. B. Placing Fill: Distribute material to avoid formati on of lenses or layers of material differing substantially from surrounding material. Deliver materi al at uniform rate to permit satisfactory procedure to result in well and uniformly compacted fill. Avoid unnecessary concentration of travel causing ruts and uneven compaction. Regrade and compa ct ruts and hollows more than 6 inches deep before compacting. Spread fill material in h orizontal layers not greater than 8 inches thickness of loose material to within optimum moisture limits described below. C. Environnemental Conditions: 1. Under no condition shall fill be placed on frozen soi l nor shall frozen fill or fill containing snow or ice be placed. Fill shall be mater ial having a temperature of 32 o Fahrenheit or more. 2. Fill placement during inclement weather shall be as di rected by the Geotechnical Engineer. 3. Due to the site location and planned construction perio d, freezing conditions may be expected in the fill. Develop fill placement techniques w hich will prevent frozen fill conditions from developing. Removal and replacement of f rozen fill shall be at the Contractor's expense. D. Fill Moisture Content: Distribute uniformly and con sistently as possible throughout the fill material. The moisture content of the fill shall be as specified below and the fill shall be at the specified moisture content prior to placement. 1. Moisten fill material by the addition of water, if fill moisture contents are below the moisture contents specified. Aerate and dry the fill ma terial if fill moisture contents are above those specified. The addition of water or addition al drying of fill material may be allowed after placement, prior to compaction, so long as such procedures provide a uniform and consistent fill moisture content as designat ed by the Owner’s Representative. 2. The final in-place moisture shall be within minus 2% and plus 2% of optimum unless below a structure or used to construct an embankment. Se e Section 02221 for additional fill placement requirements. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Street scape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Earthwork 02200-5 E. Compaction requirements Soil Classification (AASHTO M 145) AASHTO T 99 Minimum Relative Compaction (Percent) AASHTO T180 Minimum Relative Compaction (Percent) A-1 100 95 A-3 100 95 A-2-4 100 95 A-2-5 100 95 All Others 95 90 RAP N/a 95 (max wet density A representative of the project geotechnical engineer s hould be present to observe and test the placement and compaction of each left placed for structura l fill. 3.07 DAMAGED OR UNUSABLE MATERIAL A. Earth that has been rendered unfit to receive planti ng due to concrete water, mortar or lime water dumped on it shall be removed from the site and replaced wi th clean earth. 3.08 FINISH GRADING A. General: Cut and fill areas as indicated or required t o permit finishing to the finish grades indicated. B. Subgrade under Sidewalk, Curb, Gutter and Slabs-on-Grade: Finish grade to bearing surface as required. Tolerance (+/-) 0.05 foot. C. Subgrade Under Paving: Finish grade to bottom elevatio n of aggregate base course or other material to be placed. Tolerance: (+/-) 0.05 foot. D. Subgrade Under Landscaped Areas: Finish grade to elevati ons indicated. Tolerance (+/-) 0.1 foot. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Placement Method: Obtain the Owner’s Representati ve's approval of the method of placing and compacting before starting compacted fill or backfill plac ement. B. Compaction: Comply with Section 02221, Trenching, Backfi lling, And Compacting. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stree tscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Excavating, Backfilling and Compa cting 02221-1 SECTION 02221 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Construct and complete: 1. Excavation for box culverts, footers, storm sewer fa cilities, utility trench facilities and drain lines as shown on the Plans. 2. Backfilling of trenches and structures. 3. Compacting of backfilled areas. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01570; Traffic And Pedestrian Control B. Section 02050; Removals C. Section 329000; Landscape General Conditions D. Section 02200; Earthwork 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Contractor shall visit, inspec t, and become familiar with the site and the work required under this section. Underground obstructions kno wn to the Owner’s Representative, except service lines, are noted on the Drawings in their approximate locations. These locations may prove to be inaccurate, and other obstructions not shown may be encountered. Regardless, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to protect and restore all underground obstructions encountered. B. All excavations shall be protected from the entry o f storm and snowmelt runoff, and shall be adequately barricaded to achieve the highest level of publi c safety possible. Pedestrian and vehicular traffic shall be maintained as established e lsewhere in these specifications. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Backfill: Settlement of backfill around structures an d within utility trenches within the two year warranty period shall be corrected by the Contractor a t no cost to the Owner. Moreover, any structures damaged by settlement shall be restored to the ir original condition or replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stree tscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Excavating, Backfilling and Compa cting 02221-2 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 BEDDING A. Where required by the project Plans and Details, beddin g under and around pipes and structures shall conform to CDOT Standard Specifications Section 703.03 for Class 6 Aggregate Base Course, except that asphaltic material will not be an a llowed aggregate. 2.02 BACKFILL A. Utility Trench Backfill Material: Within the Bac kfill zone as identified on the Details, on-site excavated material shall conform to CDOT Standard Specif ications Section 703.08 for Class 2 Structure Backfill, and shall exclude rock fragments larger t han 6 inches as measured in the greatest dimension. The Owner’s Representative shall approve all backfill material, and may, at the Owner’s Representative's option, require the Contra ctor to import a more suitable material. B. Structure Backfill Material: Backfill material with in the structure excavation limits defined by CDOT Standard Plan No. M-206-1 for inlets, manholes, vault s, and other structures, and as specifically shown on CDOT Standard Plan No. M-603-3 for pr ecast box culverts, shall conform to CDOT Standard Specifications Section 703.08 for Class 2 S tructure Backfill, and shall exclude rock fragments larger than 3 inches as measured in the gre atest dimension. Beyond this zone, rock fragments up to 6 inches in diameter will be allowed. The Owner’s Representative shall approve all backfill material, and may, at the Owner’s Representative's option, require the Contractor to import a more suitable material. 2.03 FLOW-FILL A. Where required by the project Plans and Details, flow -fill shall conform to CDOT Standard Specifications Section 206.02. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. General: Except where otherwise shown on the approv ed Drawings and except when the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE gives written direction to do o therwise, all excavations shall be made by open cut to the depth required to construct the pipeli nes and structures as shown on the Drawings. The length of trench or size of excavation permitted to be open at any one time may be limited when, in the opinion of the OWNER, such lim itation is necessary for the safety and convenience of the public. The CONTRACTOR shall perfo rm all excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered to the depths indic ated on the Drawings or as otherwise specified. During excavation, material suitable for backf illing shall be piled in an orderly manner to a sufficient distance from the banks to avoi d overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins. Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, or as directed by the OWNER, all excavated materials not suitable for backfill shall be removed from the site. Such grading shall be done as may be necessary to prevent surface water f rom flowing into trenches or excavations and any water accumulating therein shall be removed by pum ping or by other approved methods. B. Any larger than 6 inch rocks and boulders or unsuitable material encroaching on the limits of the trench excavation shall be removed and shall be included as part of the work required for the related construction item. No additional payment will b e made for additional excavation and related backfill. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stree tscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Excavating, Backfilling and Compa cting 02221-3 C. Excavation Support: Excavations shall be adequately suppor ted and the safety of the workers provided for as required by the most recent Occupational Sa fety and Health Administration (OSHA) "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction." These regulations are described in Subpart P, Part 1926 of the Code of Federal Regulations. She eting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughin g of the excavation that may be detrimental to human safety, the ongoing work, or to any existing structure. Excavated material shall not be placed nearer than two (2) feet from the sides of the excavation. Heavy equipment shall not be used or placed near the sides of the excavat ion unless the excavation is adequately braced. D. Preparation of Foundation: When the excavation is i n firm earth, care shall be taken to avoid excavation below the established grade plus the required spec ified overdepth to accommodate the bedding material. If soft, or otherwise unsuitable founda tion material is encountered in the bottom of the excavation, the Owner may order its rem oval and its replacement with stabilization material to provide a suitable foundation. The fact tha t the excavation bottom is wet will not necessarily be considered as evidence of instability. However, any water accumulating therein shall be removed by pumping or by other approved methods and the dewatered condition maintained for regular assessment of stability of the excavation. 3.02 BEDDING A. General: After completion of the excavation and pro per preparation of the foundation, bedding material shall be placed on the excavation bottom for support of the work. The extent of bedding above and below pipes, and under structures, shall be in ac cordance with the Plans and Details. Placement of the bedding shall insure the filling of all voids, shall be in 6-inch maximum lifts throughout the bedding zone, and may be accomplished using any means and methods necessary to protect the facilities and insure continuous support of the installation. B. Pipe Bedding: Bell holes shall be excavated below eac h pipe joint. All pipe shall be installed in such a manner as to insure full support of the pipe barrel over its entire length. After the pipe is adjusted for line and grade and the joint is made, the beddin g material shall be carefully placed to insure the filling of all voids and continuous support of th e pipe. 3.03 BACKFILLING A. General: Backfill material shall be placed in maxim um 12-inch lifts throughout the backfill zone. Placement of the backfill may be accomplished us ing any means and methods necessary to protect the facilities and to conform to the compactio n requirements as specified herein. B. Subterranean Structures: Under no conditions shall c onstruction vehicles pass over subterranean structures until such time as the first lift of backfill has been placed, moistened and compacted as directed herein. All damages, remedial measures, excavati on and backfill necessary to verify the condition of subterranean structures resulting from the C ontractor's failure to place backfill as directed above shall be at the Contractor's expense. 3.04 COMPACTION A. Bedding material utilized beneath structures and all bac kfill material shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% of the modified Proctor Density as specifi ed in ASTM D 1557. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stree tscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Excavating, Backfilling and Compa cting 02221-4 B. Compaction: After the backfill material has been brought to the specified moisture content and placed in the prescribed lifts, the material shall be c ompacted using the compaction equipment specified herein in accordance with the following require ments: Soil Classification (AASHTO M 145) AASHTO T 99 Minimum Relative Compaction (Percent) AASHTO T180 Minimum Relative Compaction (Percent) A-1 100 95 A-3 100 95 A-2-4 100 95 A-2-5 100 95 All Others 95 90 RAP N/a 95 (max wet density A representative of the project geotechnical engineer s hould be present to observe and test the placement and compaction of each left placed for structura l fill. C. Compaction Equipment: 1. General: Contractor shall furnish the appropriate co mpaction equipment necessary to achieve the specified compactions for the various mater ial types. 2. Sheepsfoot compactors shall not be used for compacting fill within one foot above subterranean structures placed during construction. Hand-oper ated compaction equipment shall be used to compact fill above subterranean structures and within two feet of retaining walls, manholes, inlets or other v ertical structures within the project. 3. Sheepsfoot compactors shall be utilized to achieve ade quate bonding of cohesive materials as opposed to smooth-drum compactors. 4. Vibratory-type compactors or other construction tech niques as approved by the Owner’s Representative shall be utilized on all sand and gravel m aterials. Vibratory plate compactors shall not be used on or within two feet of any clay layers. 5. Damages or delays in construction caused by the Contra ctor's failure to comply with these restrictions shall be remedied at the Contracto r's expense. 3.05 COMPACTION QUALITY CONTROL A. Related Requirements: Section 02200, Earthwork B. Testing - General: 1. Contractor shall provide such equipment and facilities as the Owner may require for conducting field tests and for collecting and forwarding sam ples. 2. Any material used by the Contractor may be tested a t any time during their preparation or use. When requested by the Owner’s Representative, C ontractor shall furnish the required samples without charge and make sufficient arrangeme nts to permit the testing. 3. Tests shall be made by an accredited testing laborat ory selected by the Owner. Except as otherwise provided, sampling and testing of all materials and the laboratory methods and testing equipment shall be in accordance with the lat est standards and tentative methods of the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). 4. Where additional or specific information concerning testing methods, sample sizes, etc. is required, such information is included under the applicable sections of the Specification February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stree tscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Excavating, Backfilling and Compa cting 02221-5 5. Any modification of, or elaboration on these test procedures which may be included for specific materials under the respective sections in the Specifications shall take precedence over these procedures. C. Fill and Backfill Tests 1. Control tests of fill and backfill shall be made as determined by the Owner’s Representative. 2. Notification: Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative at least 24 hours prior to filling and backfilling operations. 3. Test Results: The testing laboratory will have a pe riod of 24 hours after field-testing to report the final results. Results will be reported verb ally with written confirmation later provided to the Contractor, Owner, and Owner’s Represent ative. D. Compliance 1. Contractor retains the right to have tests performe d at his own expense on any material, at any time, for his own information and job control . 2. Compliance of compaction requirements shall be based o n tests specifically directed by, and performed in the presence of the Owner’s Representat ive. Failing tests shall be paid for by the Contractor and re-tested until passing results have been obtained to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. The Con tractor shall be liable for any corrective action deemed appropriate by the Owner’s Repre sentative, including, but not limited to, the complete removal and replacement of defe ctive material. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stree tscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Aggregate Base Course 02232-1 SECTION 02232 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION The work specified herein shall consist of furnishing a nd placing of Aggregate Base Course in conformity with the project Plans and Details. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 02200; Earthwork B. Section 02221; Excavating, Backfilling, And Compacting For U tility Systems C. Section 02513; Asphalt Pavement D. Section 02515; Concrete Paving 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. An Aggregate Base Course sieve analysis, wear abrasi on, liquid limit, and moisture density curves shall be submitted by the Contractor for review by the Owner’s Representative prior to delivery to the site: 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CDOT Standard Specifications Section 304; Aggregate Base Course. B. CDOT Standard Specifications Section 703.03; Aggregate for Bases. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Aggregate Base Course shall conform to CDOT Standard S pecifications Section 703.03 for Class 6 Aggregate Base Course, except that asphaltic material wil l not be an allowed aggregate. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Placing, mixing, and compaction of Aggregate Base Course shall be in accordance with CDOT Standard Specifications Section 304. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Watering 02233 - 1 SECTION 02233 WATERING PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: The work of this section consists of furnishing, hauling, and applying water required for compaction of embankments, backfills, subgrade, and for la ndscaping, dust control, and other construction operations. 1.02 RELATED WORK: A. Earthwork – Section 02200 B. Sod Turf – Section 329200 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER: Free of debris, organic matter, and other ob jectionable substances. Coordinate with Owner’s Representative for water supply location. Contractor s hall supply water meter to measure water usage and shall be responsible to pay all costs related to and fo r water usage. The cost of water shall be the same amount as charged to the Town of Vail. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 WATER TRUCK: A. At least 1,000 gallon capacity. B. Keep at least one water truck on site when directed by Owner’s Representative. 3.02 APPLICATION: Use pressure type distributors or a pipelin e equipped with sprinkler system. Provide approved meter devices near points of discharge. A. Ensure a uniform application of water for optimum moi sture content. Avoid excessive runoff and minimize water waste. B. The Contractor may water excavation areas before excavating. Drill full depth of excavation to make moisture determinations. C. If overwatering occurs, de-water at no additional expe nse to the Owner. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Cir cle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Fine Grading 02260 - 1 SECTION 02260 FINE GRADING PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Execute finish grades complete, as shown, and as specified. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 02200 – Earthwork B. Section 02521 – Concrete Unit Paver C. Section 329000 – Landscape General Conditions 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Perform work in accordance with all applica ble laws, codes and regulations required by local governing agencies. B. Applicable Standards: Apply the current or latest editio n of the State Department of Highways, Division of Highways, State of Colorado, Standard Specif ications for Road and Bridge Construction. C. Testing Agency: Testing agency, selected and paid for by the Owner will confirm compaction densities. Contractor required to set roadway hubs to det ermine adherence to grading criteria set forth in Section 02200. D. Soils Report: Refer to Site Geotechnical Report. E. Field Density Tests: Intervals not exceeding 2 ft. fi ll height with compaction tests made by Testing Agency. F. Overcutting: Replace and compact all overcut material to required percent compaction. 1.04 LAYOUT AND SURVEY A. Licensed Surveyor or Civil Engineer: Employ a licens ed surveyor or civil engineer to stake out lines and levels. B. Discrepancies: Right is reserved to make minor adjustm ents as necessary if discrepancies are found. 1.05 SITE MAINTENANCE A. Standing Water: Keep site free of standing water at a ll times. Provide and maintain ditches, grading or pumping as necessary to prevent erosion, softeni ng of compacted surfaces and formation of mud in trenches and excavation. B. Dust: Assume full responsibility for all alleviation or prevention of dust nuisance on or about the site. February 15, 2012 E LH Cir cle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Fine Grading 02260 - 2 C. Bulkheading and Shoring: Provide as necessary, and maint ain temporary slopes during construction. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL: Refer to Section 02920 – Soil Preparation. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Suspension of Work: If grading is suspended, disturbed areas shall be brought to required grade and immediately seeded and mulched. B. Verification of Previous Work: Verify that all are as to receive imported topsoil have been completed prior to commencement of fine grading. 3.02 MOISTURE CONTENT A. Inadequate Moisture Content: Add water and thoroughly mix into fill material until the moisture necessary is uniformly dispersed throughout. B. Excessive Moisture Content: Aerate fill material b y blading or other acceptable methods until moisture content is uniformly reduced to achieve required c ompaction. 3.03 COMPACTION: Refer to Section 02200 – Earthwork. 3.04 FINISH GRADING A. General: 1. Grade smooth all planting areas after weeding, soil pre paration, and soil conditioning have been completed and soil has been thoroughly water s ettled. 2. Provide all grades for natural runoff of water without low spots or pockets. Accurately set flow line grades at 2% minimum gradient unless otherwise n oted in Drawings. Finish grades shall pitch away from structures. In no case shal l drainage from the project site be so altered or controlled as to result in damage from ero sion or flooding, or the potential for damage, to adjacent property or to any portion of the work executed under this Contract. 3. Finish grades shall be smooth, even and on a uniform plane with no abrupt changes of surface. Slope uniformly between given spot elevations. 4. Grades not otherwise indicated shall be uniform level s or slopes between points where elevations are given, or between points established by walks, paving, curbs or catch-basins. 5. Tops and toes of all slopes shall be rounded to produce a gradual and natural-appearing transition between relatively level areas and slopes. February 15, 2012 E LH Cir cle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Fine Grading 02260 - 3 B. Grades: 1. Finished Grades of Shrub and Groundcover Areas: 1 in. be low top of adjacent pavement, headers, curbs, or walls unless otherwise indi cated on the Drawings. 2. Finished Grades of Lawn and Grass Areas: ½ in. below top of adjacent pavement, curbs or headers. 3. Tolerance: Refer to Section 02200 – Earthwork. 3.05 CLEAN-UP A. Keep all areas of work clean, neat and orderly at all times. B. Clean up and remove all equipment, deleterious materia ls and debris from the entire work area prior to Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Water Control 02400-1 SECTION 02400 WATER CONTROL PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and Install: 1. The Contractor shall temporarily provide, place and m aintain ample means and devices with which to remove promptly and dispose of properly all surface and subsurface water entering excavations or which may flow along or across the site. 2. The Contractor shall protect excavation from the e ffects of surface and subsurface water entering or leaving the excavation. B. Water Control generally falls into the following categories: 1. Storm/flood flows 2. Flows from adjacent surfaces, roof drains, and pipeline s 3. Subsurface flows from saturated soils or underground sourc es 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01040, Coordination B. Section 01565, Erosion Control C. Excavation: Section 02200, Earthwork D. Trenching: Section 02221, Excavation, Backfilling And Compa cting 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project Site: The Contractor shall determine the methods in which they will temporarily divert, detain or otherwise control the flow of the surface w ater, as well as any alluvial or subsurface water, springs, surface runoff, excessive soil moisture, and any and all other forms of water which may occur during normal, drought, or flood conditions. The work is located in a confined street area. The confined street work area is subject to periodic runoff from rainstorms and snow melt, as well as may be impacted by groundwater. B. Any controlling of water (surface water and/or groun dwater) must be performed in such a manner that recently constructed portions of the projec t are not damaged by either surface or subsurface waters. Any such damage to completed work shall be deemed to be the result of the inadequate control measures taken by the Contractor and s hall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. Such repair shall include the re-establishment of grading and the removal of silt or debris which may be deposited within the project area by the flows of water. C. Adjacent Property: At no time during construction sh all the Contractor affect existing drainage patterns of adjacent property. Any damage to adjacent prope rties which results from the February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Water Control 02400-2 Contractor's alteration of any drainage pattern shall be repaired by the Contractor, at no expense to the Owner. The Contractor shall, at all times, maintain a me thod to route surface and subsurface water. Temporary structures such as berms, sandbags, pipeline diver sions, sumps, pumping, well points, etc. shall be permitted for the control of water, as long as such measures are not a major obstruction to flood flows, do not worsen flooding, or a lter historic flow routes. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: The Contractor shall submit to the Ow ner’s Representative, for review, a descriptive written plan showing the elements for control of surfa ce and subsurface water control and dewatering. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Materials: All materials necessary for the cont rol of water shall be provided by the Contractor. These may include, but shall not be limited to, temporar y cofferdams, pumps and associated energy costs, well materials, inlets, pipe and other dev ices necessary to bypass and control water around or through the construction area. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide water control or othe rwise control the water so that the project can be constructed in accordance with the Contr act Documents. B. All excavations shall be kept dry and dewatered until th e structures and appurtenances to be built therein have been completed. Upon completion of the wo rk, the Contractor shall remove such temporary means and devices utilized in the control of w ater. C. Temporary drainage facilities shall be provided to prev ent water from draining into excavations. When work is completed, restore temporary ditches or cuts to original grade or finished grade as indicated. 3.02 DEWATERING A. Extent: Dewatering of the excavations will be nece ssary to provide a dry working area for completion of the work. Dewatering systems shall be o f sufficient size and capacity to permit excavation and subsequent construction in dry conditions an d to lower and maintain the groundwater level a minimum of 2 feet below the lowest po int of excavation. B. Pumps used for dewatering, water control, or other uses within the project area shall be enclosed by sound deadening devices to reduce noise from pumpi ng activities. C. Water accumulated in the site shall be allowed to se ttle prior to release for the purpose of sediment removal. When pumping accumulated water, care sha ll be taken to pump water that has settled and is relatively clear of sediment, and to not allow the suction end of the pump to convey deposited sediments. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Water Control 02400-3 3.03 SEDIMENT CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF DOWNSTREAM REC EIVING WATERS A. Control of water shall be done in a manner that protects the quality of downstream receiving waters and is compliant with the Contract Documents he rein, and all local, State and Federal regulations and associated permits (see Section 01040 Coordina tion). This includes proper control of sediment from the work areas in accordance with Section 01565 Erosion Control and proper handling of hazardous materials. Storage of fuels, c hemicals, trash, debris, construction materials, and equipment shall be prohibited within West Mill Creek excavations. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetsc ape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Asphalt Pavement 02513-1 SECTION 02513 ASPHALT PAVEMENT PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION The work specified herein shall consist of furnishing an d placing of Asphalt Pavement in conformity with the project Plans and Details. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 02200; Earthwork B. Section 02221; Excavating, Backfilling, And Compacting For U tility Systems C. Section 02232; Aggregate Base Course 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit an Asphalt Pavement mix desi gn including aggregate gradation, asphalt grade, and filler and bituminous material composition for review by the Owner’s Representative prior to delivery to the site: 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CDOT Standard Specifications Section 401; Plant Mix Pav ements-General. B. CDOT Standard Specifications Section 403; Hot Bituminous Pavement. C. CDOT Standard Specifications Section 702 Bituminous Mate rials D. CDOT Standard Specifications Section 703; Aggregates PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Asphalt Pavement shall conform to CDOT Standard Spec ifications Section 401. The Gradation shall conform to Type SX as shown in CDOT Table 703-4 in accordance with the 2011 Standard Specifications (Green Book) for Road and Bridge constructi on. B. Binder shall conform to CDOT Standard Specifications 702. The binder shall conform to PG 58-28 as shown in CDOT Table 702-1. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Construction requirements associated with the furnish ing and placing of Asphalt Pavement shall be in accordance with CDOT Standard Specifications Sect ion 401. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stree tscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Con crete Pavement 02515-1 SECTION 02515 CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION The work specified herein shall consist of furnishing a nd placing of concrete for paving, bands, curb and gutter, valley pans, and sidewalks in conformity with the project plans and details. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 02200; Earthwork B. Section 02221; Excavating, Backfilling, And Compacting For U tility Systems C. Section 02232; Aggregate Base Course D. Section 02513; Asphalt Pavement 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit a Concrete Pavement mix des ign including aggregate gradation, concrete class, and admixtures for review by the Owner’s Represen tative prior to delivery to the site. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CDOT Standard Specifications Section 412; Portland Ceme nt Concrete Pavement B. CDOT Standard Specifications Section 601; Structural Con crete 1.05 COLORED CONCRETE PRE-CONSTRUCTION MOCK UP A. Schedule mock-up presentation as described for each item for acceptance 30 days prior to installation of paving represented by the mock-up. B. Locate mock-up panel in area accepted by the Owner’s R epresentative. C. Continue to produce mock-ups until acceptable mock-up is produc ed. Accepted mock-up shall be the standard for the colored concrete and workmanship for the work. D. Use the same installation procedures accepted in mock -ups in the final work, unless otherwise directed by the Owner’s Representative. E. Protect accepted mock-up from damage until completion and acceptance of the work represented by the mock-up. F. Remove mock-up panel from site at the completion of t he project, as directed by the Owner’s representative. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stree tscape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Con crete Pavement 02515-2 G. Construct mock-up panel for each item as stated to demo nstrate the ability to install concrete to achieve color and finish required. Mock-ups shall include or meet the following requirements: 1. Concrete pavement mock-up panels shall be full depth 5 x 5 f eet in size. 2. Provide mock-ups simulating actual design and execution condit ions for concrete work. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Pavement shall conform to the requirement s of CDOT Standard Specifications Section 412 and 601. Concrete shall be CDOT Class P unless otherwis e shown on plans or directed by Owner’s Representative. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Construction requirements associated with the furnish ing, placing, and curing of Concrete Pavement shall be in accordance with CDOT Standard Spec ifications Section 412 and 601. B. Contractor shall provide and place concrete in accor dance with CDOT 601.12 Hot and Cold Weather requirements. In addition, Contractor shall c omply with ACI 306.1 Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting and ACI 305.1 Spec ification for Hot Weather Concreting when applicable. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc/Mary Hart Design LLC Concrete Unit Pavers 02521 - 1 SECTION 02521 CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install concrete unit pavers. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02232 – Aggregate Base Course B. Section 02513 – Asphalt Pavement C. Section 02260 – Fine Grading D. Division 15 and 16 1.03 REFERENCES American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): A. C 33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. B. C 136, Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregate. C. C 140, Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. D. C 144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. E. C 936, Specification for Solid Interlocking Concrete P aving Units. F. C 979, Specification for Pigments for Integrally Color ed Concrete. G. D 698, Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using a 5.5-lb (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 in. (305 mm) drop. H. D 1557, Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using a 10-lb (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) drop. I. D 2940, Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases fo r Highways or Airports. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture o f concrete interlocking pavers for a minimum of three (3) years. B. Installation shall be by a contractor and crew wi th at least three (3) years of experience in placing interlocking concrete pavers on projects of similar n ature or dollar cost. C. Installation Contractor shall conform to all lo cal, state/provincial licensing and bonding requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product drawings and data. B. Submit full size sample sets of concrete paving units to indicate color and shape selections. Color will be selected by Landscape Architect/Owner from manufacturer’s available colors. C. Submit sieve analysis for grading of bedding and joint sand. D. Submit test results from an independent testing labor atory for compliance of paving unit requirements to ASTM C 936. E. Indicate layout, pattern, and relationship of paving j oints to fixtures and project formed details. F. Substitutions: Substitutions shall be submitted 10 days prior to bid opening for acceptance. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc/Mary Hart Design LLC Concrete Unit Pavers 02521 - 2 1.06 MOCK-UPS A. Install a 7 ft. x 7 ft. (2 m x 2 m) paver area as descri bed in Article 3.02. Contractor shall provide mock-up for each paver area. These area shall be the st andard from which the work will be judged. Consideration shall be given with regard to differen ces in age of materials from time of mock-up erection to time of actual product delivery. Mock-ups shall not be part of the work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel bande d, plastic banded, or plastic wrapped cubes capable of transfer by fork lift or clamp lift. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product. B. Sand shall be covered with waterproof covering to pr event exposure to rainfall or removal by wind. The covering shall be secured in place. C. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize in terference with normal use of buildings adjacent to paving. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install sand or pavers during heavy rain or s nowfall. B. Do not install sand and pavers over frozen base ma terials. C. Do not install frozen sand. D. Ensure asphalt or concrete substrate drains properly. Do not install sand or pavers over substrate with low points that puddle water. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS A. Concrete pavers shall be supplied by Pavestone Compan y, Denver, CO: (303) 287-3700 or approved equal unless otherwise noted. B. Product names/shape, color, overall dimensions, and thic kness shall be: 1. East Lionshead Circle Crosswalk: a. All pavers shall be 80mm thickness b. Field Pattern: City Stone Series 148 mm (6”) square, Charcoal -Buff Blend Color, verify with Owner’s Representative prior to co nstruction c. Soldier course: Holland Stone Series, Charcoal -Buff Blend Color d. Reference construction plans for pattern and layout 2. East Lionshead Plaza a. All pavers shall be 60mm thickness b. Flow line: City Stone Series 148 mm (6”) square, Charcoal -Buff Blend Color, verify with Owner’s Representative prior to constructi on February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc/Mary Hart Design LLC Concrete Unit Pavers 02521 - 3 b. Center Drive Lane between Flowline/Intermediate Pave r Bands: Field Pattern: City Stone S eries 148 x 223 mm (6” x 9”) rectangular, Charcoal -Buff Blend Color. c. Intermediate Solider Course Bands in Center Drive Lane: City Stone Series 148 x 223 mm (6” x 9”) rectangular, Charcoal -Buff Blend Color. d. Walk outside of Flowline: Holland Stone Series, V ail Blend Color (50% Charcoal, 30% Oaks Blend, and 20% Light Brown), 80mm Thickness. e. Reference construction plans for pattern and layout. 3. ADA Accessible Ramp (Truncated Dome Pavers): Paver to be ADA Compliant Detectable Warning Paver, 80mm thickness, c olor shall be Terra Cotta. 4. Concert Hall Plaza a. All pavers shall be 60 mm min. thickness b. Field Pattern: Strassen Classic Paver (non tumbled) in a Circle Paver as manufactured by Borgert Products or approved equal. Verify wit h Owner’s Representat ive prior to construction. Color shall be charcoal b uff blend of other pavers. c. Reference construction plans for pattern and layout B. Interlocking Concrete Pavers: 1. Paver Types and Patterns: See Detail 1 Sheet L300. Refer ence construction plans for pattern and layout. Note installation and type of edge r estraint. a. Material Standard: Comply with material standards set fo rth in ASTM C 936. b. Colors: Winter Blend, Vail Blend and Charcoal. Veri fy with Owners representative prior to purchase. c. Color Pigment Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 979. d. Size: 60 mm typically, 80 mm in crosswalks e. Average Compressive Strength (C140): 8000 psi (55 MPa) with no individual unit under 7200 psi (50 MPa) per ASTM C 140. f. Average Water Absorption (ASTM C 140): 5% with no unit greater than 7%. g. Freeze/Thaw Resistance (ASTM C 67): Resistant to 50 fre eze/thaw cycles with no greater than 1% loss of material. Freeze-thaw test ing requirements shall be waived for applications not expos ed to freezing conditions. C. Pavers shall meet the following requirements set fo rth in ASTM C 936, Standard Specification for Interlocking Concrete Paving Units: 1. Average compressive strength of 8,000 psi (55 MPa) with no individual unit under 7,200 psi (50 MPa). 2. Average absorption of 5% with no unit greater than 7% w hen tested in accordance with ASTM C 140. 3. Resistance to 50 freeze-thaw cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1645 /C1645M-09. D. Pigment in concrete pavers shall conform to ASTM C 979. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc/Mary Hart Design LLC Concrete Unit Pavers 02521 - 4 E. Materials shall be manufactured in individual layers on production pallets. F. Materials shall be manufactured to produce a solid hom ogeneous matrix in the produced unit. 2.02 VISUAL INSPECTION A. All units shall be sound and free of defects that woul d interfere with the proper placing of units r impair the strength or permanence of the construction. B. Minor cracks incidental to the usual methods of manufa cture, or chipping resulting from customary methods of handling in shipment and delivery, sh all not be deemed grounds for rejection. 2.03 SAMPLING AND TESTING A. Manufacturer shall provide access to lots ready for de livery to the Owner’s Representative for testing in accordance with ASTM 936-82 for sampling of mater ial prior to commencement of paver placement. B. Manufacturer shall provide a minimum of three (3) year s testing backup data showing manufactured products that meet and exceed ASTM 936-82 when teste d in compliance with ASTM C-140. C. Sampling shall be random with a minimum of nine (9) s pecimens per 20,000 sq. ft. per product shape and size with repeated samples taken every additional 20,000 sq. ft. or a fraction thereof. D. Test units in accordance with ASTM for compressive strength, absorption and dimensional tolerance. A minimum of three (3) specimens per test re quired for an average value. Testing of full units is preferred. 2.04 REJECTION In the event the shipment fails to conform to the spe cified requirements, the manufacturer may sort it, and new test units shall be selected at random by the Owne r’s Representative from the retained lot and tested at the expense of the manufacturer. If the second set of test units fails to conform to the specified requirements, the entire lot shall be rejected. 2.05 EXPENSE OF TESTS The expense of inspection and intial testing shall be bo rne by the Owner. The expense of retesting shall be borne by the Contractor. 2.06 BEDDING AND JOINT SAND A. Bedding and joint sand shall be clean, non-plastic, fr ee from deleterious or foreign matter. The sand shall be natural or manufactured from crushed rock. Li mestone screenings or stone dust shall not be used. When concrete pavers are subject to vehicular traffic, the sands shall be as hard as practically available. B. Grading of sand samples for the bedding course and joints shall be done according to ASTM C 136. The bedding sand shall conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 33 as shown in Table 1. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc/Mary Hart Design LLC Concrete Unit Pavers 02521 - 5 Table 1 Grading Requirements for Bedding Sand ASTM C 33 Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) 100 No. 4 (4.75 mm) 95 to 100 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 85 to 100 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 50 to 85 No. 30 (600 µm) 25 to 60 No. 50 (300 µm) 10 to 30 No. 100 (150 µm) 2 to 10 C. The joint sand shall conform to the grading requireme nts of ASTM C 144 as shown in Table 2 below: Table 2 Grading for Joint Sand ASTM C 144 Natural Sand Sieve Size Percent Passing No. 4 (4.75 mm) 100 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 95 to 100 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 70 to 100 No. 30 (600 µm) 40 to 75 No. 50 (300 µm) 10 to 35 No. 100 (150 µm) 2 to 15 No. 200 (75 µm) 0 2.07 PORTLAND CEMENT/BEDDING SAND MIX: A. Portland Cement shall conform to ASTM C 150 specif ication. B. Bedding Sand shall conform to Section 02521, 2.06 Bedding and J oint Sand. C. Portland Cement and Bedding Sand shall be mixed in a me chanical concrete mixer until completely blended. 1. Portland Cement/Bedding sand ratio by volume a. Vehicular areas: 12% Portland Cement 88% Bedding Sand b. Non-Vehicular areas: 0% Portland Cement 100% Bedding Sand February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc/Mary Hart Design LLC Concrete Unit Pavers 02521 - 6 2.08 Asphalt Setting Bed A. Asphalt Setting Bed Materials 1. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381, viscosity grade PG64-22 or appro ved equivalent. 2. Fine Aggregate: Clean, hard sand, free of organic matt er, uniformly graded from coarse to fine, all passing the No. 4 sieve meeting the gradatio n requirements when testing in accordance with ASTM C 136. 3. Mixing: Provide plant mixed asphalt setting bed by combin ing dry fine aggregate (approximately 93 percent) and hot asphalt cement (approximate ly 7 percent) and heat to approximately 300 degrees F. Provide each ton of setting bed material apportioned by weight with the approximate ratio of 145 lbs. of asphalt to 1, 1885 lbs. of sand. B. Setting Bed Primer: Cut back asphalt, ASTM D 2028, grade a s recommended by the paver manufacturer. C. Asphalt Adhesive: Standard neoprene modified asphalt a dhesive containing oxidized asphalt combined with 2% neoprene and 10 percent long fibered miner al fibers with a softening point of 155 degrees F. Asphalt adhesive shall be Karnak 230 2% neo -asphalt paving block adhesive. D. Joint Filler Materials: Sand conforming with ASTM C 144 with 100 percent passing a No. 16 sieve. Joint stabilizer sand shall be Techniseal Po lymetric Jointing Sand as manufactured by Techniseal, 300 Avenue Liberté, Candiac, Québec, Canada j 5r 6x1, 1-800-465-7325. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that all systems are operable and in workin g condition or prove operability in the future prior to installation of snowmelt paver section. Pre ssure test, video inspection, pull actual wiring, etc.- provide necessary testing to insure operabl e systems. C. Verify that subgrade preparation, compacted density and e levations conform to the specifications. The Owner’s Representative should inspect subgrade preparati on, elevations, and conduct density tests for conformance to specifications. D. Verify that snowmelt systems have been placed acco rding to specifications. D. Verify that aggregate base materials, thickness, com paction, surface tolerances, and elevations conform to the specifications. E. Verify location, type, installation and elevations of edge restraints around the perimeter area to be paved. F. Verify that base is dry, uniform, even, and ready to support sand, pavers, and imposed loads. G. Beginning of bedding sand and paver installation means acceptance of base and edge restraints. 3.02 SAND BED INSTALLATION A. Install snowmelt systems as shown on constructi on plans including wire mesh and plastic zip ties. Secure wire mesh to substrate to prevent disloca tion during placement of bedding material. Do not overlap sections of galvanized mesh. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc/Mary Hart Design LLC Concrete Unit Pavers 02521 - 7 B. Screed Portland/bedding sand mix to a depth of 1 ½” abov e substrate. Ensure that snowmelt tubing is covered by a minimum of ¼” of Portland cement / bedding sand mix. C. Compact Portland cement / bedding sand mix with a low amplitude, high frequency plate vibrator. Make multiple passes with plate compactor in o pposite directions until the plate compactor leaves only a minimal impression. D. Screed regular bedding sand over compacted Portland ceme nt / bedding sand mix to a depth of ¾”. Pre-compacted paver elevation should be approximately 1/8” above finished elevation to allow for settling during compaction. 3.03 CONCRETE UNIT PAVER INSTALLATION A. Ensure that pavers are free of foreign material b efore installation. Pavers shall be selected from a variety of pallets so that color character is consistent throughout installation. B. Lay the pavers in the pattern(s) as shown on the construction plans. Maintain tight joints and straight pattern lines. Tight joints shall take preceden ce over straight patterns lines where necessary. Joint width shall be between 1/16” and 1/8”. No more than 20% of joints shall be 1/8” in width within any 9 square foot area. C. Fill gaps at edges with cut paver units or edge units wh ere specified. Pavers shall be cut precisely to fill space. Maximum joint width shall be 1/8”. D. Sweep joint sand over entire surface working at 90 degre e angles to paver joints. Leave 1/8” to ¼” layer of joint sand over surface. E. Compact pavers and joint sand with a low amplitude, hi gh frequency plate vibrator. Use Table 3 below to select size of compaction equipment. Table 3 Minimum Centrifugal Paver thickness Compaction Force 60 mm 3000 lbs 80 mm 5000 lbs F. Vibrate the pavers, sweeping dry sand into the join ts and vibrating until they are full. Make multiple in alternating directions. Do not vibrate wit hin 3 ft. of any unrestrained edge of the paver area. G. Leave excess sand on the paver surface for one week unless directed by Owner’s Representative to remove it at an earlier date. H. Roll the paver installation with a clean, pneumat ic tired vibratory roller, minimum weight 8 tons having tire pressures of 90 psi. Rolling should be continue d for a minimum of 10 passes over each paver. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF BITUMINOUS SETTING BED A. Place solid steel 3/4 inch thick control bars directl y on the base or slab. Install shims under bars for minor adjustment of depth and finish paver elevations and slopes. Space bars no more than 8 feet apart and parallel to each other to serve as guides for strikeoff boards. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc/Mary Hart Design LLC Concrete Unit Pavers 02521 - 8 B. Place asphalt setting bed at not less than 200 degrees F . in panels between control bars on the primed concrete slab or binder course to not less than 3/4 inch compacted thickness. Spread material and strike off by pulling the material with a 12 foot long x 2 inch x 6 inch wood board several times to produce a smooth firm and even setting bed. Add fresh material in low, porous spots after each pass of the strikeoff board. After ea ch panel is complete remove and advance the first control bar to the next panel position in readine ss for placing and striking adjacent panels. Fill in depressions left by the control bar and any s hims. C. Roll setting bed with a roller (not over one ton i n weight) to a nominal depth of 3/4 inch thick while it is still hot. Add additional material to adjust thickness required and to allow for setting of pavers to finish elevations and slopes. 1. Maximum thickness shall not be greater than 1” 2. If pavers are not installed immediately after settin g bed, provide protection of setting bed with minimum 1/2 inch plywood sheet laid on the setting be d with butted joints. Repair all damage to the setting bed prior to installing pavers. 3.05 CONCRETE UNIT PAVER INSTALLATION OVER BITUMINOUS SETTING BED A. Install precast concrete pavers in locations, patte rns and at elevations and with slopes for surface drainage as shown on the Drawings. Install precast con crete pavers in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions and the final reviewed shop drawings. B. Apply neoprenemodified asphalt adhesive on the cured sett ing bed by squeegeeing or troweling. If troweled on, use a trowel with serrations not excee ding 1/16 inch depth. Place adhesive to not more than 1/16 inch thickness over the total surface of the setting bed. Do not begin installation of pavers, slabs and curbs until adhesive is dry to the t ouch. C. Lay out pavement in 30 foot working area modules. Set pr ecast concrete pavers, slabs and curbs by hand on dry adhesive in patterns shown on the Drawin gs with hand tight joints 0 to 1/8 inch wide joints and uniform top surfaces. D. Field cut precast concrete pavers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for methods, equipment and precautions. E. Maintain accurate alignment and check for creep and sh rinkage. Make adjustments to creep and shrinkage within the 30 foot module area. F. Sweep specified joint sand over pavement surface in ac cordance with the manufacture’s recommended procedures. Do not allow traffic on install ed pavers, slabs or curbing until the joints have been filled. G. Protect newly laid pavers, slabs and curbs with plywo od panels on which workers stand. Advance protective panels as work progresses but maintain protecti on in areas subject to continued movement of materials and equipment to avoid creating depre ssions or disrupting alignment of installed pavers, slabs and curbs. H. Install the specified joint filler where precast co ncrete pavers, slabs and curbs abut curbs, other vertical surfaces and other construction. I. Replace cracked or chipped precast concrete pavers, slab s and curbs at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND COMPLETION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Alpine Engineering, Inc/Mary Hart Design LLC Concrete Unit Pavers 02521 - 9 A. The final surface elevation shall not deviate mo re than 3/8” under a 10 ft. straightedge. B. The surface elevation deviation between individual pavers and between individual pavers and adjacent surface materials shall be less than ¼”. C. The resanding as necessary of paver joints shall be accomplished by the contractor for a period of 180 days after completion of work. D. The paver surface shall have positive drainage and s hall slope away from buildings and site walls as indicated on the drawings and field directed by the Owne r’s Representative. E. After removal of excess sand, check final elevati ons for conformance to the drawings and specifications. F. Contractor shall provide the Owner with 25 additiona l concrete unit pavers in each style, size, and color to match installation. Additional pavers sha ll be provided to Owner in accordance with 1.07. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetsc ape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Reinforced Co ncrete Pipe 02621-1 SECTION 02621 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnishing and installation of Reinforced Concrete P ipe (RCP) pipe and fittings in association with storm sewers. 1.02 WORK EXCLUDED A. Pipe associated with the sanitary sewer system and water distribution and snowmelt systems are not included in this Specification. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 02221; Excavating, Backfilling, And Compacting For U tility Systems PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 RCP PIPE A. Reinforced concrete pipe. Shall confirm to Section 706 of the CDOT Standard Specifications 2011, unless otherwise shown on plans. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation of reinforced concrete pipe shall conf orm to Section 603 of the CDOT Standard Specifications 2011. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetsc ape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Plastic Pipe 02622-1 SECTION 02622 PLASTIC PIPE PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnishing and installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (P VC) and High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe and fittings in association with storm sewers, roo f drain laterals, planter box drain laterals, and landscape underdrains. 1.02 WORK EXCLUDED A. Pipe associated with the sanitary sewer system and water distribution and snowmelt systems are not included in this Specification. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 02221; Excavating, Backfilling, And Compacting For U tility Systems PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 PVC PIPE A. Roof, Fountain, and Planter Box Drainage Pipe and Fitt ings 1. PVC drainage pipe and fittings shall conform to the requi rements of ASTM D3034 and shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi and be SDR = 35. Pipe shall be of push-on-joint assembly manufactured with bell and spigot joint s integral with the pipe wall and shall be furnished with a factory-assembled, solid c ross-section rubber ring gasket firmly secured in place. The pipe shall be produced by a co ntinuous extrusion process employing a prime grade of white unplasticized PVC, and shal l be as uniform as commercially practical in color, opacity, density and o ther physical properties. The pipe and fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions or other injurious defects. 2. Fittings shall be manufactured with integral bell and s pigot ends in the same manner as the pipe, and shall be furnished with factory-assembled ga skets that eliminate the need for ring insertions in the field and solvent-welded conn ections. B. Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings 1. PVC storm sewer pipe and fittings in sizes 4-inch thro ugh 15-inch shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D3034 and shall have a minimum pipe stif fness of 46 psi and be SDR = 35. PVC storm sewer pipe in 18-inch and 24-inch sizes shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F679 and have a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi. Storm sewer pipe and fittings shall otherwise conform to the Specifi cations set forth above for Roof, Fountain, and Planter Box Drainage Pipe and Fittings. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetsc ape Alpine Engineering, Inc. Plastic Pipe 02622-2 2. Connections of drainage laterals into storm sewer m ains shall be made using rubber gasketed wye saddles or fittings oriented to allow the lat eral to introduce flows into the main from above the crown of the main line in the ge nerally downstream direction. 2.02 HDPE PIPE A. Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings 1. High Density Polyethylene Pipe – smooth interior, AD S –N12 or approved equal, AASHTO M-252 and M294. 2. The pipe and fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and f ree from visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions or other injurious defects. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Preparation of Pipe Prior to Installation: Inspect all pipe and fittings before lowering into the prepared trench to ensure that no cracked, broken, or defec tive pipe or fittings are being used in the work. Remove foreign matter and soil from the ins ide of the pipe. B. Handling: Provide and use proper methods, tools, and fac ilities for the safe and proper protection of the work. Protect pipe from sunlight during storage. Lo wer all pipe into the trench in such a manner as to avoid any physical damage to the pipe. Stre tch in excess of 2 feet per 100 feet of the preinstalled length will not be permitted. Reject a ll damaged pipe and remove from the jobsite. C. Lines and Grades: Pipe shall be laid to the lines, grades, and elevations shown on the Plans. Storm sewer and lateral drain line pipe shall be sloped un iformly in accordance with the Plans to allow for continuous gravity drainage. D. Installation of Pipe and Fittings: Pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Owner's Representative’s approval of the pipe installation shall be required prior to backfilling the pipe zone. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 1 SECTION 02815 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Work of this Section generally includes provisions for the design and installation of an underground irrigation system including the following: A. Static pressure verification and coordination with landscape material installation. B. Trenching, stockpiling excavation mate rials, refilling and compacting trenches. C. Complete irrigation system including but not limited to irrigation system design, piping, backflow preventer assemblies, valves, fittings, heads, c ontrollers and wiring, and final adjustments to insure complete coverage. D. Water connections. E. Replacement of unsatisfactory materials. F. Tests, Clean-up, inspections, and approval. G. Installation of automatic valve and Irrigation zone control. H. Programming of controllers according to zone valve and timing chart as shown on plans. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Examine all sections related to project work. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 - General requirements as well as provisions of all applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations. B. Conform to requirements of reference information listed below except where more stringent requirements are shown or speci fied in Contract Documents. 1. American Society for Testing and Material s (ASTM) - Specifications and Test Methods specifically referenced in this Section. 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL Wires and Cables. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications - An employer of work ers that include a certified landscape technician in accordance with Associated Landscape Contract ors of Colorado. Installer shall have had considerable experience and demonstrate ability in the installation of irrigation system(s) of specific type(s) in a neat orderl y, and responsible manner in accor dance with recognized standards of workmanship. To demonstrat e ability and experience necessary for this Project, and financial stability, submit if requested by Owners Representa tive, prior to contract award the following: February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 2 1. List of 3 projects completed in the last 2 years of similar complexity to this Project. Description of projects shall include: a. Name of project. b. Location. c. Owner. d. Brief description of work and project budget. 2. Current company financial statement. B. Special Requirements: 1. Work involving substantial plumbing for installation of copper piping, backflow preventer(s), and related Work shall be executed by licensed and bonded plumber(s). Secure a permit at least 48 hours prior to start of installation. 2. Tolerances - Specified depths of mains and laterals and pitch of pipes are minimums. Settlement of trenches is cause for remova l of finish grade treatment, refilling, compaction, and repair of finish grade treatment. 3. Coordination with Other Contractors - Protect, maintain, and coordinate Work with Work under other Section. 4. Damage To Other Improvements - Contractor shall replace or repair damage to grading, soil preparation, seeding, sodding, or planting done under other Sections during Work associated with installation of irrigation system at no additional cost to Owner. 5. Sleeves under hard surfaces shall be coordina ted with the grading an d prior to installation of paving, concrete, pr pervious paver subgrade is complete. 6. Connection and expansion of existing irrigation systems shall be coordinated with the property Owner and the responsible Grounds Keeper. C. Pre-Construction Conference - Contractor shall schedule and conduct a conference to review in detail quality control and construction requirements for equipment, materials, and systems used to perform the Work. Conference shall be scheduled not less than 10 days prior to commencement of Work. All parties required to be in attendance shall be notified no later than 7 days prior to date of conference. Contractor shall notify qualified representatives of each party concerned with that portion of Work to attend conference, in cluding but not limited to Architect, Owners Representative, Contractor's Superintendent, and Installer. 1. Minutes of conference shall be recorded and distributed by Contractor to all parties in attendance within five days of conference. 1.05 SUBMITTALS - Prepare and make submittals in accordance with conditions of the Contract. A. Complete Irrigation System Design - Contractor shall prepare a complete irrigation system design providing 100% coverage to all landscaped areas which do not have a specific irrigation design shown in the construction plans, i.e. refurbishe d areas. Design shall follow these specifications and details and shall be based on the following. Design shall be drafted on sepia mylar paper or utilizing AutoCAD by a qualified draftsperson. Final design shall be submitted to Owners Representative for review and approval prior to ordering any material or commencement of any construction. 1. Product Data: For each type of product in dicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinklers, controllers, and automatic control valves to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Static pressure verification - Prior to beginning work, Contractor shall field verify the pressure available at the site. This pressure shall be provided to the irrigation designer. If pressure is greater than 85 PSI, a pressure regulating valve shall be included at the tap location. If the available water pressure is not sufficient to operate the irrigation system, February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 3 Contractor shall indicate that to the Owner. If no pressure is stated on plans, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to verify the pressure available at the site prior to submitting a bid. 4. Mainline system - Mainline shall be designed such that velocities within the piping do not exceed five feet per second. No pressurized mainline shall be installed within ten feet of building foundations without written permission from the project Owner. 5. Turf areas a. Small turf areas (8 feet wide or less) shall be irrigated with a sub-surface irrigation system. a. Small turf areas (8 to 25 feet wide) shall be irrigated with fixed nozzle pop-up spray heads with matched precipitation rate nozzles. Nozzles shall be sized to match head spacing. b. Large turf areas (wider than 25 feet) sh all be irrigated with gear driven rotors with a minimum precipitation rate of .45" per hour for a full circle rotor. 6. Shrub bed areas adjacent to building foundations and medians shall be drip irrigated(plant material one gallon in size and larger). Drip valves shall be piped and zoned such that the east and north sides of buildings are on separate zones from the west and south sides of buildings. Install Rainbird Xeri-Bug drip emitters in the quantities listed below; Emitters required Plant Material Size (per Plant) One Gallon Material One XB-05PC Five Gallon Material Two XB-10PC 2" to 4" Caliper Tree Four XB-10PC 6" Caliper Tree Six XB-10PC 8" Caliper Tree Eight XB-10PC 6 ft. to 8 ft. Evergreen Three XB-10PC 10 ft. to 12 ft. Evergreen Four XB-10PC 14 ft. to 18 ft. Evergreen Six XB-10PC 7. Shrub Beds away from building foundations and medians, Perennial and Annual bed areas shall be spray irrigated with 12" pop-up heads with a maximum spacing of 10 ft. O.C. C. Record Drawings (As-Builts): 1. At onset of irrigation installation provide mylar sepias of original irrigation design to Owner. At the end of every day, revise prints for Work accomplished that day in red ink. As-built sepias shall be brought up-to-date at the close of the working day every Friday by a qualified draftsperson. A print of record plan(s) shall be available at Project Site. Indicate zoning changes on weekly as-bu ilt drawings. Indicate non-pressure piping changes on as-builts. Upon completion of Project, submit for review, prior to final acceptance, final set of as-built mylar sepias. Dimensions, from two permanent points of reference (building corners, sidewalk, road inter-sections or permanent structures), location of following items: a. Connection to existing water lines. b. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines c. Control valves. d. Quick coupling valves. e. Drain valves. f. Drip line blow-out stubs. g. Control wire routing if not with pressure mainline. h. Gate valves. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 4 2. Owner’s Representative will not certify any pay request submitted by the Contractor if the as-built drawings are not current, and pro cessing of pay request will not occur until as-builts are up-dated. D. Operation Instructions - Submit 3 written operating instructions including winterization procedures and start-up, with cut sheets of products, and coordinate controller/watering operation instruction with Owner maintenance personnel. 1. Controller Charts: a. Do not prepare charts until Owners Representative has reviewed record (as-built) drawings. b. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed. 1) Chart may be reproduction of record drawing, if scal e permits fitting of controller door. If photo reduction prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size possible to retain full legibility. 2) Chart shall be blueline print of actual "as-built" system, showing area covered by that controller. c. Identify area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a distinctly different pastel color drawing over entire area of coverage. d. Following review of charts by Ow ners Representative, they shall be hermetically sealed between two la yers of 20-mm thick plastic sheet e. Charts shall be completed and reviewed prior to final review of irrigation system. E. Shop Drawings - Submit Shop Drawings if noted on construction drawings, include a complete materials list indicating manufacturer, model number, and description of all materials and equipment to be used. Show appropriate dimens ions and adequate detail to accurately portray intent of construction. F. Unit Pricing – The bid tabulation is a Lump Sum bid item for irrigation installation. The contractor shall provide a schedul e of unit prices for each component or assembly of components of the irrigation system, as shown on the drawings and necessary for the refurbishment areas. This shall be provided at the time irrigation design for the refurbishment areas is provided. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING - Deliver, un load, store, and handle materials, packaging, bundling, products in dry, weatherproof, condition in manner to prevent damage, breakage, deterioration, intrusion, ignition, and vandalism. Deliver in original unopened packaging containers prominently displaying manufacturer's name, volume, quantity, cont ents, instructions, and conformance to local, state, and federal law. Remove and replace cracked, broken , or contaminated items or elements prematurely exposed to moisture, inclement w eather, snow, ice, temperature ex tremes, fire, or jobsite damage. A. Handling of PVC Pipe - Exercise care in handling, loading and storing, of PVC pipe. All PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle which allows length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated exte rnal loads. All sections of pipe that have been dented or damaged shall be discarded, and if installed, sha ll be replaced with new piping. B. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. C. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.07 JOBSITE CONDITIONS: A. Protection of Property: February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 5 1. Preserve and protect all trees, plants, monuments, structures, and paved areas from damage due to Work of this Section. In the event damage does occur, all damage to inanimate items shall be completely repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner, and all injury to living plants shall be repaired by Owner. All costs of such repairs shall be charged to and paid by Contractor. 2. Protect buildings, walks, walls, and other property from damage. Flare and barricade open ditches. Damage caused to asphalt, conc rete, or other building material surfaces shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to Owner. Restore disturbed areas to original condition. B. Existing Trees: 1. All trenching or other Work under limb spread of any and all evergreens or low branching deciduous material shall be done by hand or by other methods so as to prevent damage to limbs or branches. 2. Where it is necessary to ex cavate adjacent to existing trees use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation, in areas where 2 inch and larger roots occur, shall be done by hand. Roots 2 inches or larger in diameter, except directly in the path of pipe of conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Wher e a trenching machine is operated close to trees having roots smaller than 2 inches in di ameter, wall of trench adjacent to tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through roots. Trenches adjacent to trees shall be closed within 24 hours, and when this is not possible, side of trench adjacent to tree shall be kept shaded with moistened burlap or canvas. C. Protection and Repair of Underground Lines: 1. Request proper utility company to stake exact location (including depth) of all underground electric, gas, or telephone lines. Take whatever precautions are necessary to protect this under-ground line from damage. If damage does occur, Utility Owner shall repair all damage. Contractor shall pay all costs of such repairs unless other arrangements have been made. 2. Request Owner, in writing, to locate all private utilities (i.e., electrical service to outside lighting) before proceeding with excavation. If, after such request and necessary staking, private utilities, which were not staked, are encountered and damaged by Installer, Owner shall repair them at no cost to Installer. If Contractor damages staked or located utilities, they shall be repaired by Utility Owner at Co ntractor's expense unless other arrangements have been made. D. Replacement of Paving and Curbs - Where trenches an d lines cross existing roadways, paths, curbing, etc., damage to these shall be kept to a minimum and shall be restored to original condition. E. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not inte rrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than 10 days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Owner's written permission. 1.08 WARRANTY/GUARANTY: - Manufacturer shall warr ant materials against defects for a period of one February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 6 year from date of Substantial Completion. Insta ller(s) shall guaranty workmanship for similar period. A. Settling of backfilled trenches that may occur du ring guaranty period shall be repaired at no expense to Owner, including complete restoration of damaged property. B. Expenses due to vandalism before substantial completion shall be borne by Contractor. C. Owner will maintain turf and planting areas duri ng warranty period, so as not to hamper proper operation of irrigation system. 1.09 MAINTENANCE: A. Furnish the following maintenance items to Owner prior to final Acceptance: 1. 2 Sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling, and adjusting each type of sprinkler head and valve supplied on this Project. 2. Two 6-foot valve keys for operation of gate valves or stop and waste valves (if applicable). 3. 2 keys for each automatic controller. 4. 4 quick coupler keys and 2 matching hose swivels for each type of quick coupling valve installed. 5. 2 aluminum drain valve keys of sufficient length for operation of drain valves. B. Winterization - include cost in bid for winterizing complete system at conclusion of sprinkling season (in which system received final acceptance) within 3 days notification by the Owner. System shall be voided of water using compressed air or similar method reviewed by Owners Representative. Reopen, operate, and adjust syst em malfunctions accordingly during April of following season within three days of notification by Owner. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK - In addition to installed system furnish the following items to Owner: A. 10 Pop-up spray heads with nozzles of each type used. B. 4 Rotor heads of each type used. C. 30 Drip emitters of each type used. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. General Piping: 1. Pressure Supply Line (from point of connection through backflow prevention unit) - Type "k" Hard Copper. 2. Pressure Supply Lines (downstream of backflow prevention units) - Class 200 PVC BE (1" - 2 1/2") and Class 200 PVC RT (3" and larger). 3. Non-pressure Lines - Class 200 PVC BE 4. PVC Sleeving - Class 200 PVC. 5. Drip Tubing - Hardie Dura-Pol EHD 164 5 3/4" with .050 inch wall thickness. 6. Emitter Tubing - As recommended by emitter manufacturer. B. Copper Pipe and Fittings: February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 7 1. ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22 2. Copper Pipe - Type K, hard tempered. 3. Fittings - Wrought copper, solder joint type. 4. Joints - Soldered with solder, 45% silv er, 15% copper, 16% zinc, and 24% cadmium and solidus at 1125~F and liquids at 1145~F. 5. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. 6. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends. C. Brass Pipe and Fittings: 1. Brass Pipe - 85% red brass, ANSI Schedule 40 screwed pipe. 2. Fittings - Medium brass, screwed 125 pound class. D. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: 1. Identification Markings: a. Identify all pipe with following indelible markings: 1) Manufacturer's name. 2) Nominal pipe size. 3) Schedule of class. 4) Pressure rating. 5) NSF (National Sanitation F oundation) seal of approval. 6) Date of extrusion. 2. Solvent Weld Pipe - Manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound in accordance with ASTM D2241 and ASTM D1784; cell classification 12454-B, Type 1, Grade 1. a. Fittings - Standard wright, Schedule 40, injection molder PVC; complying with ASTM D1785 and D2466, cell classification 12454-B. 1) Threads - Injection molded type (where required). 2) Tees and ells - Side gated. b. Threaded Nipples - ASTM D2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads. c. Joint Cement and Primer - Type as recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings. 3. Gasketed End Pipe - Manufactured from virgin Polyvinyl Chloride compound in accordance with ASTM D2241 and ASTM D1784; cell cla ssification 1254-B, Type 1,Grade 1. a. Fittings and service tees (3" and larger) - Ductile iron, grade 70-55-05 in accordance with ASTM A-536. Fittings shall have deep bell push-on joints with gaskets meeting ASTM F-477. b. Gaskets - Factory installed in pipe and fittings, having a metal or plastic support within gasket or a plastic retainer ring for gasket. c. Lubricant - As recommended by manufacturer of pipe fittings. 4. Flexible Plastic Pipe - Manufactured from virgin polyethylene in accordance with ASTM D2239, with a hydrostatic design stress of 630 psi and designated as PE 2306. a. Fittings - Manufactured in accordance with ASTM D2609; PVC Type 1 cell classification 12454-B. b. Clamps - All stainless steel worm gear screw clamps. Use 2 clamps per joint on 1-1/2 inch and 2 inch fittings. E. Drip / Sub-Surface Irrigation Systems: 1. Drip Tubing - Manufactured of flexible vinyl chloride compound conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Category 4, P14 and ASTM D3350 for PE 122111C. 2. Fittings - Type and make recommended by tubing manufacturer. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 8 3. Drip Valve Assembly - Type and size shown on Drawings. a. Wye Strainer - Plastic construction with 120 mesh nylon screen and 1/2 inch blow-out assembly. b. Control Valve - 2 way, solenoid pilot operated type made of synthetic, non-corrosive material; diaphragm activated and slow closing. Include freely pivoted seat seal; retained (mounted) without attachment to diaphragm. Hardie 700 series. c. Pressure Reducing Valve - Plastic construction as detailed. 4. Emitters - Single port, pressure compensating, press on type by Hardie. 5. Sub-Surface: as specified on plan, installed per manufacture’s recommendation. F. Gate Valves: 1. Gate Valves for 3/4 inch through 2-1/2 Inch Pipe – meet MSS SP-80, Brass construction; solid wedge, IPS threads, and non-rising st em with wheel operating handle. CWP rating of 200 psig, asbestos free packing. 2. Gate Valves for 3 Inch and Larger Pipe - Iron body, brass or bronze mounted AWWA C509 gate valves with a clear waterway equa l to full nominal diameter of valve; rubber gasket or mechanical joint-type only. Valves shall be able to withstand a continuous working pressure of 200 psi and be equipped with a square-operating nut. G. Quick Coupling Valves - Bra ss two-piece body designed for working pressure of 150 PSI; operable with quick coupler. Equip quick coupler with Vandal-resistant locking feature and rubber cover. Include one matching key. Key size and type as shown on Drawing. Rain Bird 44LRC H. Valve Boxes: 1. Gate Valves, Drip Line Blow-out Stubs, and Wire Stub Box - Carson #910-12 with 3B, Brooks #1100, box as detailed. 2. 3/4 inch through 2 inch Control Valves - Carson #1419-12 with 3B, Brooks #1419 Box. 3. Drip Valve Assemblies - Carson #1324-12 with 3B as detailed. 4. All lids shall be branded with the application/appurtenance that is located in the box, including, but not limited to, zone numbers, isolation valves, air vents, drain valves, quick connects, and wire junction box. I. Electrical Control Wiring: 1. Low Voltage: a. Electrical Control Wire - AWG UFUL approved No. 14 dir ect burial copper wire or larger, if required to operate system as designed. b. Wire Colors: 1) Control Wires - Red. 2) Common Wires - White. 3) Master Valve Wires - Blue. 4) Spare Control Wires - Black. 5) Spare Common Wires - Yellow. c. If multiple controllers are utilized, and wi re paths of different controllers cross each other, both common and control wires from each controller shall be different colors approved by Owners Representative. d. Control Wire connections and splices shall be made with 3M direct bury splice, Rain Bird Pentite connectors, or similar dry splice method. 2. High Voltage - Type required by local codes and ordinances, of proper size to accommodate needs of equipment serviced. 3. Communication cable shall be 18 AWG with a minimum of 3-pairs. The cable construction shall be: February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 9 1. Type PE-89, for direct burial. Ground communication cable at intervals and details according to manufacturer instructions. J. Automatic Controller - Size and type shown on Drawings; mounted as detailed. Rainbird 12 Station ESP SAT. 1. Controller Stations for Automatic Control Va lves: Each station is variable from approximately one minute to ten hours, minimum. Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each station. 2. Exterior Control Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4, weatherproof, with locking cover and two matching keys; include provision for grounding. a. Body Material: Molded plastic. b. Mounting: Surface type for wall. 3. Interior Control Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12, drip proof, with locking cover and two matching keys. a. Body Material: Molded plastic. b. Mounting: Surface type for wall. 4. Control Transformer: 24-V secondary, with primary fuse. 5. Timing Device: Adjustable, 24-hour, 14-day clock, with automatic operations to skip operation any day in timer period, to operate every other day, or to operate four or more times daily. a. Manual or Semiautomatic Operation: Allows this mode without disturbing preset automatic operation. b. Flash memory or Nickel-Cadmium Batt ery and Trickle Charger: Maintains program during power outages. c. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide-varistor type on each station and primary power. 6. Moisture Sensor (if applicable): Adjustable from one to seven days, to shut off water flow during rain. 7. Wiring: UL 493, Type UF multiconductor, with solid-copper c onductors; insulated cable; suitable for direct burial. a. Feeder-Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers. b. Low-Voltage, Branch-Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers and automatic control valves; color-coded different from feeder-circuit-cable jacket color; with jacket s of different colors for multiple-cable installation in same trench. c. Splicing Materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of insulating, spring-type connector or crimped joint and epoxy resin moisture seal; suitable for direct burial. 8. Concrete Base: Reinforced precast concrete not less than 36 by 24 by 4 inches (900 by 600 by 100 mm) thick, and 6 inches (150 mm) greater in each direction than overall dimensions of controller. Include opening for wiring. 9. Grounding: Ground all controller systems in accordance with the latest version of the American Society of Irrigation Consultants Guideline 100 for Earth Grounding Electronic Equipment in Irrigation Systems. 10. Controllers shall be Maxicom compatible unless specifically stated on the plans as not communicating with Maxicom. All maxicom communication shall be compatible with the existing maxicom system in place. Coor dination with Owner’s in house Maxicomm specialist or local Rainbird Ma xicomm Authorized Dealer sha ll take place to confirm that February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 10 controller and communication is compatible with existing system, configured and installed properly. K. Electric Control Valves - Size and type shown on Drawings having manual flow adjustment (except drip valves) and manual bleed nut. Cast Bronze body or Molded-plastic body, as specified on drawing, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual-flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid. Rain Bird PEB series or Irritrol 700 series. L. Sprinkler Heads - As indicated on Drawings. Fa bricated riser units in accordance with details on Drawings - with riser nipples of same size as riser opening in sprinkler body. Pop-up and Hi-pop spray heads Rain Bird 1804-SAM-PRS and 1812-SAM-PRS. Gear driven rotors Hunter I-20 and I-25. 1. General Requirements: Designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated at available water pressure. 2. Metal, Exposed, Impact-Drive Rotary Sprinklers: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: i. Nelson, L.R. Corporation. ii. Rain Bird Corporation. b. Description: i. Construction: Brass and other corrosion-resistant metals. ii. Mounting: Aboveground, exposed on riser. 3. Plastic, Exposed, Impact-Drive Rotary Sprinklers: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: i. Rain Bird Corporation. b. Description: i. Construction: ABS and corrosion-resistant metals. ii. Mounting: Aboveground, exposed on riser. 4. Plastic, Pop-up, Gear-Drive Rotary Sprinklers: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: i. Hunter Industries Incorporated. ii. Rain Bird Corporation. b. Description: i. Body Material: ABS. ii. Nozzle: ABS. iii. Retraction Spring: Stainless steel. iv. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant. 5. Plastic, Pop-up Spray Sprinklers: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: i. Hunter Industries Incorporated. ii. Rain Bird Corporation. b. Description: i. Body Material: ABS. ii. Nozzle: ABS. iii. Retraction Spring: Stainless steel. iv. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant. v. Pattern: Fixed, with flow adjustment. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 11 6. Plastic Shrub Sprinklers: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: i. Rain Bird - 1300, 1400 series bubblers. b. Description: i. Body Material: ABS or other plastic. ii. Pattern: Fixed or with flow adjustment. M. Backflow Preventer - Size and type indicated on Drawings; Brass construction with 150 psi working pressure. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 LANDSCAPE PLAN REVIEW AND COORDINATION - Contractor will be held responsible for coordination between landscape and irrigation system installation. Landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan shall take precedence over the irrigation system equipment locations. If irrigation equipment is installed in conflict with the landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan, the Contractor will be required to relocate the irrigation eq uipment, as neces sary, at Contractor’s expense. 3.02 INSPECTION - Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section is to be performed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfact ory conditions have been corrected. A. Grading operations, with the exception of final grading, shall be completed and approved by Owner before staking or installation of any irrigation system begins. 3.03 PREPARATION: A. Staking shall Occur as Follows: 1. Mark, with powdered lime, routing of pressure supply line and flag heads for first few zones. Contact Owners Representative 48 hours in advance and request review of staking. Owner’s Representative will advise in staller as to the amount of staking to be prepared. Owner’s Representa tive will review staking and di rect changes if required. Review does not relieve installer from cove rage problems due to improper placement of heads after staking. 2. If Project has significant topography, freef orm planting beds, or other amenities, which could require alteration of ir rigation equipment layout as deemed necessary by Owners Representative, do not install irrigation equipment in these areas until Owners Representative has reviewed equipment staking. B. Install sleeving under asphalt paving and concrete walks, prior to concrete placement and paving operations, to accommodate piping and wiring. Co mpact backfill around sl eeves to 95% Modified Proctor Density within 2% of optimum moisture content in accordance with STM D1557. C. Trenching - Trench excavation sh all follow, as much as possible, layout shown on Drawing. Dig trenches straight and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trench bottom shall be clean and smooth with all rock and organic debris removed. 1. Clearances: a. Piping 3 Inches and Larger - Make trenches of sufficient width (14 inches minimum) to properly assemble and position pipe in trench. Minimum clearance of piping 3 inches or larger sha ll be 5 inches horizontally on both sides of the trench. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 12 b. Piping Smaller than 3 Inches - Trenches shall have a minimum width of 7 inches. c. Line Clearance - Provide not less than 6 inches of clearance between each line and not less than 12 inches of clear ance between lines of other trades. 2. Pipe and Wire Depth: a. Pressure Supply Piping - 18 inches from top of pipe. b. PVC Sleeving - 18 inches from top of pipe. c. Non-pressure Piping (rotor) - 18 inches from top of pipe. d. Non-pressure Piping (pop-up) - 12 inches from top of pipe. e. Control Wiring - Side of pressure main. f. Drip Tubing - 12 inches from top of pipe. g. Emitter Tubing (Micro-tubing) - 8 inches from top of pipe. 3. Boring will be permitted only where pipe must pass under obstruction(s) which cannot be removed. In backfilling bore, final density of backfill shall match that of surrounding soil. It is acceptable to use sleeves of suita ble diameter installed first by jacking or boring, and pipe laid through sleeves. Ob serve same precautions as though pipe were installed in open trench. 3.04 INSTALLATION - Locate other equipment as near as po ssible to locations designated. Deviations shall be reviewed by Owners Representative prior to installation. A. EARTHWORK 1. Excavating, trenching, backfilling, and concrete shall be installed in accordance with all other Divisions in the specifications regarding earthwork and concrete. 2. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping for main lines 12 inches below finished grades, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavement and slabs. 3. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 to 3 inches as indicated on plans. Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt-saturated felt and b ackfill remainder with excavated material. 4. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: a. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 24 inches below finished grade. b. Circuit Piping: 12 inches. c. Sleeves: Same as piping type – maintain grade. B. PVC Piping - A. Location and Arrangement: Drawings indicate locati on and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings. Snake pipe in trench as much as possible to allow for expansion and contraction. Do not install pipe when air temperature is below 40~F . Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F (5 deg C) before te sting. Place manual drain valves at low points and dead ends of pressure supply piping to insure complete drainage of system. When pipe laying is not in progress, or at end of each day, close pi pe ends with tight plug or cap. Perform Work in accordance with good practices prevailing in piping trades. B. Install piping at minimum uniform slope of 0.5 percent down toward drain valves. Install piping free of sags and bends. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to pe rmit valve servicing. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller pipe connection. flanges adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) or larger pipe connection. Install underground thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 690. 1. Solvent Weld PVC Pipe - Lay pipe and make all plastic to plastic joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Gasketed End Pipes: a. Lay pipe and make pipe to fitting or pipe to pipe joint, following OR70 recommendations (Johns-Manville Guide for Installation of Ring-Tite Pipe), or pipe manufacturer's recommendations. b. Construct thrust blocks behind all gasketed fittings, tees, bends, reducers, line valves, and caps in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 13 Contact Owners Representative prior to placing thrust blocks, for observation of thrust block excavation and initial placement. Size thrust blocks based on tables below: THRUST BLOCK SIZING GUIDE: Thrust developed per 100 PSI pressure (l bs. force) for various fitting configurations. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Pipe Fitting Fitting Valves, Tees Size 90 deg. Elbow 45 deg. Elbow Dead Ends ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3 1,000 600 800 4 1,800 1,100 1,300 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Approximate bearing st rength of typical soils. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Soil Type Lbs/ft 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Mulch, Peat, etc. 0 Soft Clay 500 Sand 1,000 Sand and Gravel 1,500 Sand and Gravel with Clay 2,000 Sand and Gravel Cemented with Clay 4,000 Hard Pan 5,000 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3. Flexible Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe - Lay pipe and assemble fittings following manufacturer's recommendations. C. Drip Tubing: 1. Make all fitting connections as per manufacturers recommendations. 2. Use only manufacturer provided or recommended hole punch when making penetrations in drip tubing for insert fittings. Use of any other hole punch shall be cause for immediate removal and replacement of all installed drip tubing. 3. Install drip line blow-out stubs at all dead ends of drip tubing. D. Control Wiring: 1. Low Voltage Wiring: a. Bury control wiring between controller and electric valves in pressure supply line trenches, strung as close as possible to main pipe lines with such wires to be consistently located below and to one side of pipe, or in separate trenches. b. Bundle all 24 volt wires at 10 foot intervals and lay with pressure supply line pipe to one side of the trench. c. Provide an expansion loop at every pr essure pipe angle fitting, every electric control valve location (in valve box), and every 500 feet. Form expansion loop by wrapping wire at least 8 times around a 3/4 inch pipe and withdrawing pipe. d. Make all splices and E.C.V. connections using Rain Bird Pentite connectors or similar dry splice method. e. Install all control wire splices not occurring at control valve in a separate splice valve box. f. Install one control wire for each control valve. g. Run two spare #14 AWG UFUL control wires and one common wire from February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 14 controller pedestal to the end of each an d every leg of main line. Label spare wires at controller and wire stub box. 2. High Voltage Wiring for Automatic Controller: a. Provide 120 volt power connection to automatic controller. b. All electric work shall conform to local codes, ordinances, and authorities having jurisdiction. All high voltage electrical work shall be performed by licensed electrician. E. Automatic Controller: 1. Install controller in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as detailed and where shown on Drawings. 2. Connect remote control valves to controller in numerical sequence as shown on Drawings. 3. Final location of controller shall be approved by Owners Representative prior to installation. 4. Each controller shall be a dedicated separate ground wire and grounding rod as detailed. 5. All above ground conduit shall be rigid ga lvanized with appropriate fittings. All below ground conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC. F. Electric Control Valves - Install cross-handle 3 inches below finished grade where shown on Drawings as detailed. When grouped together, allow at least 12 inches between valve box sides. Install each remote control valve in a separate valv e box. Install individu al valve box flush with grade. G. Quick Coupling Valves - Install quick couplers on double swing-joint assemblies of Schedule 80 PVC pipe; plumb and flush to grade. Angled nipple relative to pressure supply line shall be no more than 45 degrees and no less than 10 degrees. Install quick coupling valves as detailed at all dead-ends of the pressure mainline and spaced at 300 ft. O.C. through-out mainline system. H. Drip / Sub-Surface Valve Assemblies - Install valve assembly as detailed. I. Drip Emitters / Sub-Surface Tubing - Stake all surface emitters as detailed and staked with acceptable tubing stakes. Install Sub-Surface tubing per manufact ure’s recommendations and as detailed. Install application pressure regulato rs and filter units in piping near device being protected and in control-valve boxes. Install air relief valves and vacuum relief valves in piping, and aboveground or in control-valve boxes. Install drip tubing with integral emitters for subsurface application below finish grade at appropriated depth according to manufacturer or as stated on plans. J. Drain Valves - Install manual drain valves at all low points in pressure supply line as detailed. Provide one three cubic foot gravel drainage sump for each drain valve installed. K. Valve Boxes: 1. Install one valve box for each type of valve installed as detailed. Valve box extensions are not acceptable except for mast er valves. Install gravel sump after compaction of all trenches. Place final portion of gravel inside valve box after valve box is backfilled and compacted. 2. Brand controller letter and station number on lid of each valve box. Letter and number size shall be no smaller than 1 inch and no greater in size than 1 1/2 inches. Depth of branding shall be no more than 1/8 inch into valve box lid. L. Gate Valves - Install as detailed to isolate the mainline system. Mainline system shall be isolated such that one half of the system can remain operational at any time February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 15 M. Sprinkler Heads - Install sprinkl er heads where designat ed on Drawings or wh ere staked. Set to finish as detailed. Spacing of heads shall not exceed the maximum indicated on Drawing unless re-staked as directed by Owners Representativ e. In no case shall the spacing exceed maximum recommended by manufacturer. Install heads on double swing-joint risers of schedule 40 PVC pipe. Angled nipple relative to non-pressure line sh all be no more than 45 degrees or less than 10 degrees. Adjust part circle heads for proper coverage. Adjust heads to correct height after sod is installed. Plant placement shall not interfere with intended sprinkler head coverage, piping, or other equipment. Owner’s Representative may request nozzle changes or adjustments without additional cost to the Owner. N. Backflow Preventer - Install as detailed. And according to water department requirements. O. Backfilling - Do not begin backfilling operations until required system tests have been completed. Backfill shall not be done in fr eezing weather except with review by Owners Representative. Leave trenches slightly mounded to allow for settle ment after backfilling is completed. Trenches shall be finish graded prior to walk-through of system by Owners Representative. 1. Materials - Excavated material is generally considered satisfactory for backfill purposes. Backfill material shall be free of rubbish, vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger than 1 inch in maximum dimension. Do not mix subsoil with topsoil. Material not suitable for backfill shall be hauled away. Contractor shall be responsible for providing suitable backfill if excavated material is un acceptable or not sufficient to meet backfill, compaction, and final grade requirements. 2. Do not leave trenches open for a period of mo re than 48 hours. Open excavations shall be protected in accordance with OSHA regulations. 3. Compact backfill to 90% maximum density, determined in accordance with ASTM D155-7 utilizing the following methods: a. Mechanical tamping. b. Puddling or ponding. Puddling or p onding and/or jetting is prohibited within 20’-0" of building or foundation walls. P. Piping Under Paving: 1. Install piping in sleeves under parking lots, roadways, and sidewalks. Installation shall be coordinated for installation before subg rade of paving is placed and compacted by earthwork or paving contractor. 2. Provide for a minimum cover of 18 inches between the top of the pipe and the bottom of the aggregate base for all pressure and non-pressure piping installed under asphaltic concrete or concrete paving. 3. Piping located under areas where asphalt or concrete paving will be installed shall be bedded with sand (a layer 6" below pipe and 6" above pipe). 4. Compact backfill material in 6" lifts at 90% maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D155-7 using manual or mechanical tamping devices. 5. Set in place, cap, and pressure test all pi ping under paving, in presence of Owner prior to backfilling and paving operations. 6. Piping under existing walks or concrete pavement shall be done by jacking, boring, or hydraulic driving, but where cutting or breaking of walks and/or concrete is necessary, it shall be done and replaced at not cost to Owner. Obtain permission to cut or break walks and/or concrete from Owner. Q. Water Supply and Point of Connection - Water supply shall be extended as shown from water supply lines. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Flushing - After piping, risers , and valves are in place and connect ed, but prior to installation of February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 16 sprinkler heads, quick coupler assemblies, and hose valves, thoroughly flush piping system under full head of water pressure from dead end fittings. Maintain flushing for 5 minutes through furthermost valves. Cap risers after flushing. B. Testing - Conduct tests in pr esence of Owners Repres entative. Arrange for presence of Owners Representative 48 hours in advance of testing. Contractor shall supply force pump and all other test equipment. 1. After backfilling, and installation of all c ontrol valves, fill pressure supply line with water, and pressurize to 40 PSI over the designated static pressure or 120 PSI, whichever is greater, for a period of 2 hours. 2. Leakage, Pressure Loss - Test is acceptable if no loss of pressure is evident during the test period. 3. Leaks - Detect and repair leaks. 4. Retest system until test pressure can be maintained for duration of test. 5. Before final acceptance, pressure supply line shall remain under pressure for a period of 48 hours. 6. Observe all lateral lines, drip lines, swing/flexible connections, and sprinklers for evidence of leaks, excessive soil saturation, and/or pondi ng. Hand excavate to locate leakage at these observed points. C. Walk-Through for Substantial Completion: 1. Arrange for Owners Representative's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Entire system shall be completely installed and operational prior to scheduling of walk-through. 3. Operate each zone in its entirety for Owner s Representative at time of walk-through and additionally, open all valve boxes if directed. 4. Generate a list of items to be corrected prior to Final Completion. 5. Furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct all inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from Contract Documents. 6. During walk-through, expose all drip emitters under operations for observation by Owners Representative to demonstrate that they are performing and installed as designed, prior to placing of all mulch material. Schedule separate walk-through if necessary. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malf unctioning controls and equipment. D. Walk-Through for Final Completion: 1. Arrange for Owners Representative’s presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Show evidence to Owners Representative that Owner has received all accessories, charts, record drawings, and equipment as required before Final Completion walk-through is scheduled. 3. Operate each zone, in its entirety for Owners Representative at time of walk-through to insure correction of all incomplete items. 4. Items that are deemed not acceptable by Ow ners Representative should be reworked to complete satisfaction of Owners Representative. 5. If after request to Owners Representative for walk-through for Final Completion of irrigation system, Owners Representative finds items during walk-through which have not been properly adjusted, rewo rked, or replaced as indicate d on list of incomplete items from previous walk-through, Contractor shall be charged for all subsequent walk-throughs. Funds will be withheld from final payment and/or retainage to Contractor, in amount equal to additional time and expenses required by Owners Representative to conduct and document further walk-throughs as deemed necessary to insure compliance with Contract Documents. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Western Heritage Consulting & Engineering Irrigation System 02816 - 17 3.06 ADJUSTING - Upon completion of installation, "fine-tune" entire system by regulating valves, adjusting patterns and break-up arms, and setting pressure reducing valves at pro-per and similar pressure to provide optimum and efficient coverage. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible. Heads of same type shall be operating at same pressure +/- 7%. A. If it is determined that irrigation adjustments will provide proper coverage, and improved water distribution as determined by Owners Representative, contractor shall make such adjustments prior to Final Acceptance, as directed, at no ad ditional cost to Owner. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes, degrees of arc, and control valve throttling. B. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finish grade unless otherwise designated. C. Areas which do not conform to designated operation requirements due to unauthorized changes or poor installation practices shall be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. A. 3.07 CLEANING - Maintain continuous cleaning operation throughout duration of work. Dispose of, off-site at no additional cost to Owner, all trash or debris generated by installation of irrigation system. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stree tscape Town of Vail Concrete Formwork 03100-1 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED The work specified herein shall consist of the furnis hing and utilization of concrete formwork for the cast-in-place structures associated with the project . 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03201; Concrete Reinforcement B. Section 03300; Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CDOT Standard Specifications Section 601.09; Forms PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Forming materials shall conform to the requiremen ts of CDOT Standard Specifications Section 601.09. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Construction requirements associated with the furnish ing, use, and removal of formwork and form ties for cast-in-place concrete shall be in accordance with CDOT Standard Specifications Section 601.09. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Street scape Town of Vail Concrete Reinforcement 03201-1 SECTION 03201 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION The work described herein consists of the furnishing an d placing of reinforcing steel in cast-in-place concrete in accordance with these Specifications and i n conformity with the Plans. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03300; Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CDOT Standard Specifications Section 602; Reinforcing S teel B. ACI 350-01; Code Requirements for Environmental Engineeri ng Concrete Structures 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted for review prior to the fabrication of reinforcement. 1. Shop drawings detailing the placement of all required ste el reinforcement. 2. Bar List: Copies of all reinforcing steel and bendi ng diagrams shall be furnished to the Owner’s Representative at least one week prior to the placing of reinforcing steel. Such information will not be reviewed for accuracy. The C ontractor shall be solely responsible for the accuracy of the lists and for furni shing and placing all reinforcing steel in accordance with the details shown on the Pla ns. B. A certified copy of mill test reports shall be submi tted upon request of the Owner’s Representative. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING A. Reinforcing shall be substantially free from mill scale, rust, dirt, grease or other foreign matter. B. Reinforcement shall be shipped and stored with bars o f the same size and shape fastened in bundles with durable tags, marked in a legible manner with waterproof markings showing the same designations as shown on the submitted placement dra wings. C. Reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground and s hall be protected from moisture and kept free from dirt, oil, and other injurious contaminants. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Street scape Town of Vail Concrete Reinforcement 03201-2 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of the following specifications: Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ............. AASHTO M 31 (A STM 615) Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ............. AASHTO M 322 (A STM 996) Unless otherwise designated, bars conforming to AASHTO M 31 and M 322 shall be furnished in Grade 60 for #4 bars and larger. 2.02 BENDING Unless otherwise permitted, all reinforcing bars shal l be bent cold. Bars partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent except as shown on Plans or as permitted by the Owner’s Representative. Should the Owner approve the application of heat for field bendi ng of reinforcing bars, precautions shall be taken to assure that the physical properties of the steel wil l not be materially altered. In any case, bars shal l not be bent or straightened in any manner that could potenti ally injure the material. Hooks and bends shall conform to the requirements of AC I 350-01, Chapter 7. Bars which are shown as "hooked" on the Plans shall be "standard hooks" unless otherwise indicated. The term "standard hook" as used herein shall mean one o f the following: 1. A 180 degree turn plus an extension of at least four bar di ameters but not less than 2-1/2 inches at the free end of the bar, or 2. A 90 degree turn plus an extension of at least 12 bar diame ters at the free end of the bar, or 3. For stirrup and tie anchorage only, either a 90 degree o r a 135 degree turn plus an extension of at least six bar diameters but not less than 2-1/2 inches at the free end of the bar. The inside diameter of bends as measured on the inside o f the bar, except for stirrups and ties, shall be as follows: Bar Size Grade 60 #3 thru #8 6 bar diameters #9, #10, & #11 8 bar diameters #14 & #18 10 bar diameters The inside diameter of bends for stirrups and ties shall not be less than four bar diameters for sizes #5 and smaller, and five bar diameters for #6 to #8 inclusive. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Street scape Town of Vail Concrete Reinforcement 03201-3 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Minimum concrete cover and placement of reinforceme nt shall conform to ACI 350-01. B. The upper and lower mats of reinforcing steel in conc rete slabs shall be tied or otherwise fastened together at 4-feet maximum spacing in each direction prior to the concrete placement. C. Welding on reinforcing bars will not be permitted exce pt as noted on the Plans. Reinforcement placed in any member shall be inspected and approved before any concrete is placed. D. The placing, fastening, splicing and supporting of reinfor cing steel and wire mesh or bar mat reinforcement shall be in accordance with the Plans and the latest CRSI edition of "Placing Reinforcing Bars." In the event that any discrepancy exists between the Plans and the CRSI publication stated above, the Plans shall govern. E. Precast concrete blocking or other approved blocking ma terial shall be used to support footing bars and bars in slabs on grade. All other reinforcin g steel shall be supported with steel chairs or precast mortar blocks. All chairs coming in contact w ith forms shall be CRSI Class 1 or Class 2, Type B. F. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or approved, spl ices in adjacent lines of reinforcing bars shall be staggered. The minimum distance between staggere d splices for reinforcing bars shall be the length required for a lapped splice in the bar. G. Lapped splices will be permitted only at locations whe re the concrete section is sufficient to provide a minimum clear distance of two inches between the splice and the nearest adjacent bar. Minimum required clearance to the concrete surface shall be maintained in all cases. 3.02 INSPECTION In no case shall any reinforcing steel be covered wi th concrete until the amount and position of the reinforcement has been observed by the Owner’s Repres entative and his permission given to proceed with the pour. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of all inspections and any delays resulting from insufficient lead-time provided to the Own er’s Representative for the purposes of making the inspection. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stree tscape Town of Vail Cast-in-Place Concrete 03300-1 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION The work specified herein shall include the furnishing an d placing of cast-in-place Portland cement concrete in conformity with the lines, grades and dimen sions shown on the Plans. In particular, this Specification applies to, but shall not be limited to, f ooters, retaining walls, piers, aprons, and steps. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03201; Concrete Reinforcement B. Section 03100; Concrete Formwork 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CDOT Standard Specifications 503; Drilled Cassions B. CDOT Standard Specifications 601; Structural Concrete 1. CDOT Standard Specification 601.07; Mixing Concrete 2. CDOT Standard Specification 601.08; Air Content Adjustment 3. CDOT Standard Specification 601.12; Placing Concrete 4. CDOT Standard Specification 601.13; Curing Concrete 5. CDOT Standard Specifications Section 601.14; Finishing Har dened Concrete Surfaces 6. CDOT Standard Plan No. M-601-1; Single Concrete Box Culve rt 7. CDOT Standard Plan No. M-601-20; Wingwalls for Pipe of Box Culverts 8. CDOT Standard Plan No. M-603-3; Precast Concrete Box Culv ert 9. ACI 350-01; Code Requirements for Environmental Engineerin g Concrete Structures C. CDOT Standard Specifications Section 602; Reinforcing S teel D. CDOT Standard Specifications 503; Drilled Cassions 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted by the Contractor for review by the Owner’s Representative prior to the construction of any concrete facilities: 1. Proposed concrete mix designs. 2. Sieve analyses for all proposed aggregates. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. All cast in place concrete shall for concrete pier s at light poles shall be CDOT Class BZ with a minimum f’c = 4000 psi February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stree tscape Town of Vail Cast-in-Place Concrete 03300-2 B. Wall and Step concrete class shall conform to that specified by CDOT Standard Plan Nos. M-601-1, M-601-20, M-603-3 (headwall/cutoff wall detail). C. Joint Sealer shall conform to CDOT standard specifi cations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Construction requirements associated with the furnish ing, placing and curing cast in place concrete shall be in accordance with CDOT Standard Spec ifications 601.07, 601.08, 601.12, 601.13 and as noted herein. B. Construction requirements for concrete piers for ligh t poles shall be in accordance with CDOT Standard Specification 503; Drilled Cassions. C. Radii Edges: All formed concrete structures shall inc lude ½” radii on all exposed edges. D. Finishing of formed concrete surfaces shall conform to CDOT Standard Specifications Section 601.14. 1. Walls and slab surfaces to be covered by earth backf ill shall receive a Class 1 Ordinary Surface Finish. 2. Walls, light poles bases, and step surfaces exposed to publ ic view shall receive a Class 4 Sandblasted Finish or equal. E. Contractor shall hand tool all joints at site boul ders as directed by Owner’s Representative. Field verify with Owner’s Representative prior to constructi on. F. Contractor shall seal joints as shown in plans an d/or as directed by Owner’s Representative at concrete core walls – stone masonry and pavement. Con tractor shall provide sample of concrete – masonry sealer for approval by Owner’s Representative . END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Unit Masonry 04 2000 - 1 SECTION 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete Block. B. Mortar and Grout. C. Reinforcement and Anchorage. D. Flashings. E. Lintels. F. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Testing and inspection services. B. Section 04 4200 - Exterior Stone Cladding: Anchored stone cladding. C. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lin tels. D. Section 07 2123 - Loose Fill Insulation: Granular insula tion for masonry unit cores. E. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Air barrier under s tone cladding. F. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated masonry and at top of fire-rated walls. G. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control joints. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Mason ry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2008. B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Struc tures; American Concrete Institute International; 2008. C. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. D. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and P lain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b. E. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 2009a. F. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Shee t, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a. G. ASTM C 90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Conc rete Masonry Units; 2009. H. ASTM C91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2005. I. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Co ncrete Masonry Units; 2006. J. ASTM C 140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testin g Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units; 2010. K. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Maso nry Mortar; 2004. L. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement ; 2007. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Unit Masonry 04 2000 - 2 M. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006. N. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Uni t Masonry; 2008a. O. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Mas onry Grout; 2007. P. ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Mason ry; 2009. Q. ASTM C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction a nd Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2009. R. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriter s Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabric ated wire reinforcement, mortar, and masonry accessories. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site. B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Conform to applicable code f or requirements for fire rated masonry construction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means t hat will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches (400 x 200 mm) and nominal depth of 8 inches (200 mm). 2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight. a. Hollow block, as indicated. 3. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129. a. Hollow block, as indicated. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144. E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. F. Water: Clean and potable. G. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in co ld weather. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Unit Masonry 04 2000 - 3 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com. 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wi rebond.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420) deformed bil let bars; galvanized. C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, mill galvanized to ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3; 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) side rods with 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not les s than 1/2 inch (13 mm) of mortar coverage on each exposure. 2.04 FLASHINGS A. Plastic Flashings: Sheet polyethylene; 40 mil (1 mm) thick. As sepcified in Section 07 6500 B. Galvanized Steel Flashing: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 co ating, 24 gage (0.61 mm) total thickness. C. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to mason ry work or adjacent materials. 2.06 LINTELS A. Steel Lintels: See Structural drawings for opening wi dth to size of steel lintel requirements. 2.07 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proport ion Specification. 1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S. 2. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N. 3. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N. 4. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type N. 5. Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type O. B. Grout: ASTM C476. Consistency required to fill complet ely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inc hes (50 mm) or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches (50 mm). C. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with r eferenced standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other section s are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors sup plied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of mason ry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Unit Masonry 04 2000 - 4 B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to m aximum 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 3.04 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Pro tect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. For m vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inch es (200 mm). 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.05 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progre sses. D. Interlock intersections and external corners. E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. G. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as indicated. H. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horiz ontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. 3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 8 inches (200 mm) on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and se cond horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and s econd joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm). 3.07 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install maso nry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locati ons where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at l east 4 inches (100 mm) into adjacent masonry or turn up at least 4 inches (100 mm) to form wate rtight pan at non-masonry construction. 3.08 LINTELS A. Install loose steel lintels over openings. 3.09 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters. B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of dimensioned position. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Unit Masonry 04 2000 - 5 C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing rein forcing. D. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches (300 mm) either side of opening. 3.10 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frame s and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line . C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inche s (300 mm) from framed openings. D. Do not build into masonry construction organic mater ials that are subject to deterioration. 3.11 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 in ch (1.6 mm). B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm/3 m) and 1/2 inch in 20 ft (13 mm/6 m) or more. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per stor y non-cumulative; 1/2 inch (13 mm) in two stories or more. D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 f t (3 mm/m) and 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm/3 m); 1/2 inch in 30 ft (13 mm/9 m). E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 f t (3 mm/m). F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3.12 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry wo rk not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4500 - Quality Control. B. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety o f concrete unit masonry in accordance with ASTM C140 for conformance to requirements of this specificatio n. C. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accorda nce with ASTM C 780. 3.14 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. 3.15 PROTECTION A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Exterior Stone Cladding 04 4200 - 1 SECTION 04 4200 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cut sandstone veneer at exterior walls, solid grout. B. Metal anchors and supports. C. Joint sealing and Joint pointing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Concrete block supporting stone cladding. B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shelf angles and supports. C. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Air barrier under s tone cladding. D. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashi ngs at lintels. E. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant for perimeter and control joints. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Shee t, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007. B. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Col d-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. C. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Uni t Masonry; 2008a. D. ASTM C 616 - Standard Specification for Quartz-Based Dim ension Stone; 2008. E. IBC - International Building Code; 2009. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-installation Meeting: See Section 01 3100 - Projec t Management and Coordination, for meeting requirements. Convene two (2) weeks before starting wor k of this Section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on stone, mortar products, and sealant products. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, pertinent dimensions, anchorages, head, jamb, and sill opening details, and jointing methods. 1. Include Design Engineer's stamp on shop drawings for atta chments, anchors, and supports. D. Design Data: Submit structural calculations stamped by Design Engineer for attachments, anchors, and supports. E. Samples: Submit 4 stone samples aproximately 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size, illustrating color range and texture, markings, and surface finish. F. Samples: Submit mortar color samples. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Engineer's Qualifications: Design attachment s, anchors, and supports under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer, registered in the St ate of Colorado. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Exterior Stone Cladding 04 4200 - 2 1. Design anchors to resist positive and negative wind pre ssures and other loads. 2. Design anchor attachment to stone with a factor of safety of 5:1. 3. Design each individual anchor with a factor of safety in the vertical dead-load-bearing direction of 4:1 and in the horizontal lateral-load-bearing direction of 2:1. 4. Design anchors in compliance with International Buil ding Code (IBC); 2009. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Stone Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricat ing cut stone with minimum ten years of documented experience. D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in pe rforming the work of this Section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Construct stone wall mock-up, 5 feet (1.5 m) long by 5 fe et (1.5 m) high, including, corner condition, typical control joint, hollow metal door and frame, st eel lintel, head flashing, flexible flashing, and stone anchor accessories. B. Locate as directed by 4240 Architecure, Inc. C. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store stone panels vertically on edge, resting weight on panel edge. B. Protect stone from discoloration. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. During temporary storage on site, at the end of workin g day, and during rainy weather, cover stone work exposed to weather with non-staining waterproof coverings , securely anchored. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STONE A. Sandstone: Cut Veneer; complying with ASTM C616, Class ification I - Sandstone. 1. Acceptable Producers - Basis of Design: a. Gallegos Corporation; Product Stone Panel No. 6 - Tel luride Stained Face Parkitechture. www.gallegoscorp.com]. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MORTAR A. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N, Proportion specification, using Portland cement of white color. B. Mortar Color Additive: Mineral oxide pigment; color t o match stone veneer as selected by Architect. 2.03 ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and Other Components in Contact with Stone : Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1. Sizes and configurations: In compliance with Chapter 14, Section 1405.7 - Stone Veneer, of the International Building Code (IBC), 2009 Edition. 2. Wire ties are not permitted. B. Support Components not in Contact with Stone: Steel , ASTM A36, galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A123 1.25 oz/sq ft (380 g/sq m). C. Setting Buttons and Shims: Plastic type. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Exterior Stone Cladding 04 4200 - 3 D. Sheet Metal Flashings: Prefinished galvanized steel flashing; ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 coating, 24 gage (0.61 mm) total thickness. E. Flexible Membrane Flashing: W. R. Grace and Co.; "Vycor Plus". www.graceconstruction.com. F. Weeps: Preformed plastic tubes. G. Backer Rod and Sealant: Types as specified in Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers; color to match stone veneer as selected by Architect. H. Cleaning Solution: Type that will not harm stone, joint materials, or adjacent surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support work and site conditions are ready to receive work of this section. B. Verify that items built-in under other sections are properly located and sized. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean stone prior to erection. Do not use wire br ushes or implements that will mark or damage exposed surfaces. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install flashings of longest practical length and sea l watertight to back-up. Lap end joint minimum 6 inches (150 mm) and seal watertight. B. Erect stone in accordance with stone supplier's inst ructions and erection drawings. C. Install weeps in vertical stone joints at approximat ely 24 inches (600 mm) on center, running 8 inches horizontally within fully-grouted space at bend in flashi ng; immediately above horizontal flashings, above shelf angles and supports, and at bottom of walls, just ab ove grade. Do not permit mortar accumulation to plug weeps. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Positioning of Elements: Maximum 1/4 inch (6 mm) from true position. B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m); 1/2 inch in 50 feet (13 mm in 15 m). C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per stor y non-cumulative; 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any two stories. 3.05 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any item n ot so indicated on Drawings. B. Do not impair appearance or strength of stone work by cutting. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and sealant upon completion of w ork. B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. C. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stre etscape 4240 Architecture Inc Metal Fabrications 5 5000 - 1 SECTION 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3300 - Precast Concrete: Placement of meta l fabrications on precast concrete. B. Section 07 4200 - Metal Wall Panels. C. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Struct ural Steel; 2008. B. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel , Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2007. C. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Di p Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2009. D. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. E. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Inter mediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2003 (Reapproved 2007). F. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2009a. G. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts , Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009. H. ASTM A 500/A 500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010. I. ASTM A 588/A 588M - Standard Specification for High-Strengt h Low-Alloy Structural Steel, up to 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corros ion Resistance. J. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and No ndestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2007. K. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; America n Welding Society; 2010. L. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society fo r Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). M. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorgani c," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). N. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protect ive Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stre etscape 4240 Architecture Inc Metal Fabrications 5 5000 - 2 C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for w elders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Engineer under direct supervision of a Professio nal Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Colorado. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide two (2) year warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing, . C. Plates: ASTM A 283. D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for mate rials being welded. G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sec tions, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secur ed. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent fin ish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications . Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Bench supports: As detailed on drawings; galvanized and pr ime paint finish. B. Other metal fabrications as indicated and detailed on the drawings. 2.04 FINISHES - STEEL A. Galvanize all exposed steel items not recieving High Performance Coatings per Section 09 9300. B. Prime paint all non-exposed steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concret e or masonry. 2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact w ith concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing. C. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC -SP2. D. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign ma tter prior to finishing. E. Prime Painting: One coat. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stre etscape 4240 Architecture Inc Metal Fabrications 5 5000 - 3 F. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft (530 g/sq m) galvani zed coating. G. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize aft er fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. 2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum difference in diagona l measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m). E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in 48 i nches (1.2 m). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal whe re site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, fre e from distortion or defects. B. At wet areas, apply bituminous paint to concealed meta l that is below grade, below concrete, below exterior pavers, and the like. C. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient tempor ary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent a ttachments. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustmen ts not scheduled. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Rough Carpentry 06 1000 - 1 SECTION 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural dimension lumber framing. B. Roof Sheathing. C. Roofing nailers. D. Roofing cant strips. E. Preservative treated wood materials. F. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. G. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. H. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 06 1500 - Wood Decking. C. Section 06 1800 - Glued-Laminated Construction. D. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Air barrier over sheathing. E. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill f lashings. F. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based she athing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AFPA (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for On e- and Two-Family Dwellings; American Forest and Paper Association; 2001. B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. C. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Cha racteristics of Building Materials; 2010. D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification f or Treated Wood; American Wood Protection Association; 2010. E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National In stitute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood product s supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Sustainability Submittals: Submit invoices for each different product made of sustainably harvested wood, salvaged and reused wood, wood fabricated from recover ed timber, as well as locally-sourced wood. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Rough Carpentry 06 1000 - 2 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moistur e. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements o f specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeti ng the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approve d by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless o therwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permi tted. C. Provide FSC certified lumber for all products listed in this Section. 1. The use of locally-obtained beetle-kill pine and/or fi r is is permitted in lieu of FSC certified lumber. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C. Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2 by 6 through 4 by 16 (50 by 150 mm through 100 by 400 mm) ): D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Roof Nail Base: APA PRP-108/APA PRPR-108, Form B455, Struc tural I Rated Sheathing, Exterior Exposure Class, and as follows: 1. Span Rating: 24/0 (610/0). 2. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm), nominal. B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel el sewhere. B. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, plate width, glass fiber strip. 2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements o f AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected serv ice conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood m arked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of tr eatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Treatment: 1. Manufacturers - Basis of Design: a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc; Product: Wolman E Copper Azole: www.wolmanizedwood.com. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Rough Carpentry 06 1000 - 3 b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Gra de: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft (4.0 kg/cu m) retention. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture c ontent of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber exposed to weather. c. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. d. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members s pecified in other sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide tempora ry ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contamin ants. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of expo sed members. B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until comple tion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes an d AFPA Wood Frame Construction Manual. E. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling ope nings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless other wise detailed. F. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each j amb; support headers on cripple studs. 3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing a nd support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. C. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. D. Specifically, provide the following non-structural fra ming and blocking: 1. Countertops. 2. Handrails. 3. Grab bars. 4. Towel and bath accessories. 5. Wall-mounted door stops. 6. Display cases. 7. Wood paneling. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Rough Carpentry 06 1000 - 4 3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with de ck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where spec ifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels with long dimension per pendicular to framing members, with ends staggered and over firm bearing. 1. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted. B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches (610 mm) on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling he ight, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 2. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches (2440 by 4880 mm), installed horizontal ly at ceiling height. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm) from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inc h in 10 feet (2 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet (7 mm in 10 m) maximum. 3.08 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Sec tion 00 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements.. 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on th e ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the st orm drainage system. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stre etscape 4240 Architecture Inc Finish Carpentry 06 2000 - 1 SECTION 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for subm ittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and fini sh hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profile s, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories. 1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot (1:8). 2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Arch itectural Woodwork Standards. 3. Include certification program label. D. Samples: Submit two samples of finish plywood, 12x12 inch (300x300 mm) in size illustrating wood grain and specified finish. E. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 12 inch (300 mm ) long. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide produc ts of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade. 2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitt ed. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting pa ssage through building openings. B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide mater ials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stre etscape 4240 Architecture Inc Finish Carpentry 06 2000 - 2 B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items af fecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Archi tectural Woodwork Standards requirements for grade indicated. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (1 mm). Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm ). B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Mater ials: 1/32 inch (0.7 mm). END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Bituminous Dampproofing 07 1113 - 1 SECTION 07 1113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bituminous dampproofing at site retaining walls. 1. Drainage panels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D 41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing; 2005. B. ASTM D449 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in D ampproofing and Waterproofing; 2003 (Reapproved 2008). C. ASTM D2822 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cem ent, Asbestos-Containing; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide properties of primer, bitumen, a nd mastics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in pe rforming the work of this section with minimum five years experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F (5 degre es C) for 24 hours before and during application until dampproofing has cured. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Karnak Chemical Corp: www.karnakcorp.com. 2. Mar-Flex Systems, Inc: www.mar-flex.com. 3. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 HOT ASPHALTIC MATERIALS A. Bitumen: ASTM D449, Type I, asphalt. B. Primer: ASTM D41, compatible with substrate. C. Sealing Mastic: Asphalt roof cement, ASTM D2822, Type I. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Molded Sheet Drainage Panel: As specified in Section 07 1400 - Hot Fluid-Applied Waterproofing. B. Protection Board: Type and thickness recommended by da mpproofing manufacturer. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Bituminous Dampproofing 07 1113 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matte r detrimental to adhesion or application of dampproofing system. C. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to recei ve dampproofing are securely installed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive da mpproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in ac cordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to man ufacturer. D. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Foundation Walls: Apply two coats of asphalt dampproofi ng. B. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's ins tructions. C. Apply bitumen with mop. D. Apply bitumen at a temperature limited by equiviscous tem perature (EVT) plus or minus 25 F (14 C); do not exceed finish blowing temperature for four hours. E. Apply bitumen in one coat, continuous and uniform, at a rate of 25 sq ft/gal (0.6 sq m/L) per coat. F. Apply from 6 inches (150 mm) below finish grade elevatio n down to top of footings. G. Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface with m astic. Seal watertight. H. Place drainage panel directly over dampproofing where per imeter foundation drain DOES occur, butt joints, place to encourage drainage downward. I. Place protection board directly over dampproofing where perimeter foundation drain does NOT occur, butt joints, and adhere to tacky dampproofing. J. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Weather Barriers 07 2500 - 1 SECTION 07 2500 WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water-Resistive Barrier: Roof Underlayment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Vapor retarde r under concrete slabs on grade. B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Air barrier over conc rete masonry wall. C. Section 04 4200 - Exterior Stone Cladding: Air barrier unde r exterior cladding. D. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant materials an d installation techniques. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either wa ter-resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor retar ders. B. Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material t hat is relatively air impermeable but water vapor permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seam s and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impe rmeable air barriers are classified as vapor retarders. C. Water-Resistive Barrier: Water-shedding barrier ma de of material that is moisture-resistant, to the degre e specified, intended to be installed to shed water without sealed seams. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Pol ymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protecti on; 2009. B. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005. C. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2003. D. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resisti ve Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2009. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on material characterist ics, performance criteria, and limitations. C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings of special joint condi tions. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation, installation methods, and storage and handling criteria. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Install air barrier materials in mock-up specified in Section 04 4200 - Exterior Stone Cladding. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the ma terials manufacturers before, during and after installation. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Weather Barriers 07 2500 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES A. Roofing Underlayment: Provide in sloped roof construct ion. 1. Over plywood sheathing. 2.02 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER MATERIALS (NEITHER AIR BAR RIER NOR VAPOR RETARDER) A. Roofing Underlayment: Cold applied, self-adhering membr ane composed of polyethylene film and butyl rubber adhesive. 1. Manufacturers: a. Grace Construction Products; Grace Ultra: www.na.gr aceconstruction.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.03 SEALANTS A. Sealant Type: As recommended by weather barrier ma nufacturer, appropriate to application. See Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. B. Sealant Backers: As specified in Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. C. Primers, Cleaners, and Other Sealant Materials: As recommended by sealant manufacturer, appropriate to application, and compatible with adjacent materials. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Self-Adhesive Sheet Flashing: ASTM D 1970. B. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by material manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to acc ept the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation. B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesiv es in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply sealants and adhesives within recommended applicat ion temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer if temperature is out of this range. C. On Exterior: 1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal. 2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at lea st 6 inches. 3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12 inches (305 mm). 4. Install water-resistive barrier over jamb flashin gs. 5. Install air barrier UNDER jamb flashings. 6. Install head flashings under weather barrier. 7. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing fl anges, wrap excess sheet into opening; at head, seal sheet over flange and flashing. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Weather Barriers 07 2500 - 3 D. Coatings: 1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by coating man ufacturer; treat joints in substrate and between dissimilar materials as recommended by manufact urer. 2. Use flashing to seal to adjacent construction and to bridge joints. 3. Sprayed Coating: Install to thickness recommended by m anufacturer. 4. Use self-adhesive sheet flashing to seal to adjacent construction and to bridge joints. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer tha n recommended by manufacturer. B. Do not leave paper- or felt-based barriers exposed to weather for longer than one week. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaz a Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Wood Siding 07 4623 - 1 SECTION 07 4623 WOOD SIDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood trim, flashings, accessories, and fastening s. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 2100 – Thermal Insulation: exterior sheathing. B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant at per imeter openings and dissimilar materials. C. Section 07 6200: Supply of metal flashings and trim associated with wood siding for placement by this section. D. Section 09 9300 - Staining: Stain and seal fini sh. E. Section 08 9100 - Louvers: Wall vents and louve rs. 1.03 REFERENCES A. WRCLA – (Western Red Cedar Lumber Association). 1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01 3000 - Submittals: Procedures for su bmittals. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating materials , component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, sizes, surface texture, finishes, and acce ssories. C. Samples: Submit four samples 18 x 24 inch in si ze illustrating surface texture and coloring. D. Samples: Submit four samples 18 x 24 inch in si ze to Section 09 9300 for application of stain. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Grade materials in accordance with the following : 1. Lumber Grading: Certified by WRCLA. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store in ventilated areas with constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 55 percent. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Section 01 7000 - Contract Closeout. B. Correct defective Work within a two-year period after Substantial Completion for finished siding products from degradation of color or deterioration of finish. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaz a Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Wood Siding 07 4623 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD MATERIALS A. Cedar Lumber: Western Red Cedar, A and Better C lear grade, to WRCLA Standard Grading Rules. Kiln-dried to moisture content of 9-10 percent. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Hot dipped galvanized; non-staining, of size to penetrate solid wood 1-1/2 inches minimum, and strength to securely and rigidly retain the wor k. B. Furring strips: 5/4 pressure treated wood. C. Flashing: Per Section 07 6200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions prior to proceeding with work. B. Verify that substrate surfaces, wall openings, a nd framing are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Furring strips are laid horizontally with kerfs to allow water drainage. Vertically space furring 16 inched on center. B. Nail at 16 inches on center. Fasten siding in p lace level and plumb. Face nail with two nails per bearing, keeping nails 1-1/2 to 3 inches apart to a llow dimension movement without splitting. Nail to aligned pattern. At vertical siding, provide ho rizontal blocking at nail locations. C. Use a level or plumbline to ensure that the firs t board is installed plumb. D. Miter horizontal joints tight at 45 degrees. Co pe internal corners. D. Install siding for natural shed of water. E. Position cut ends over bearing surfaces. Sand c ut edges smooth and clean. F. Install metal flashing at heads of wall openings and sills. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb Level: ¼ inches per 10 feet (6 mm/3 m). B. Maximum Offset From Joint Alignment: 1 /16 inches (1.5mm). 3.04 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Site Finishing: Specified in Section 09 9000 END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stre etscape 4240 Architecture Inc Sheet Metal Roofing 07 6100 - 1 SECTION 07 6100 SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet metal roofing, fabricated as 'shingle', with associated flashings and accessories. B. Counterflashings. C. Snow guards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Dimensional lumber and sheathing as part of roof assembly. B. Section 06 1323 - Heavy Timber: As part of roof decking as sembly. C. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Rigid insulation as part of roof assembly. D. Section 07 5300 - Elastometic Membrane Roofing: EPDM r oofing at integral gutter. E. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Gutters and Downspouts. F. Section 07 9500 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Shee t, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a. B. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008. C. ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cem ent, Asbestos-Free; 2007. D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. E. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Assocoation- Roofing Manual. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: See Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination, for meeting requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pa ttern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. 1. Include Design Engineer's stamp on shop drawings for snow guard anchors and supports. C. Product Data: Provide data on metal types, finishes, and characteristics. D. Design Data: Submit structural calculations stamped by Design Engineer for snow guard anchors and supports. E. Submit two samples 16 inch x 16 inch (400 mm x 400 mm) in size , mounted on plywood backing, illustrating typical seam and finish. F. Submit two samples 16 x 16 inch (400 x 400 mm) in size illustra ting metal finish color. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stre etscape 4240 Architecture Inc Sheet Metal Roofing 07 6100 - 2 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design snow guard anchors and supports under direct supervisi on of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in the State of Colorado. B. Perform work as detailed in drawings and SMACNA Archit ectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain one copy on project site. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in pe rforming sheet metal roof installations with minimum five years of experience. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Construct mock-up of sheet metal roofing, 5’ feet (1.5 m ) minimum long by 5’ feet (1.5 m) wide, illustrating associated attachments. B. Locate where directed by Architect. C. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abras ion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause disc oloration or staining. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, f or additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a two (2) year period a fter Date of Substantial Completion. Defective work includes failure of watertightness or seals. C. Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty against cr acking, peeling and fading. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Shingles Basis of Design: 1. U. S. Metals: US-Flat-Lock Roofing System; www.usmetalsonline.com . 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; 22 gage (0.7 mm) core steel. B. Factory Finish: Full strength Kynar 500 PVDF resin-b ased coating, applied by manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line, with top side dry film thic kness of 0.80 to 0.90 mil over 0.20 to 0.30 mil prime coat, providing a total top side dry film thickness o f 1.1 mil, plus or minus 0.1 mil. Reverse side shall be coated with primer and wash coat of 0.30 mil, plus or minus 0.05 mil. 1. Color as indicated on drawings. C. Strippable Film: Applied to top side of painted coil to protect finish during fabrication, shipping and field handling. Strippable film shall be removed immediately b efore installation. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene w ashers. B. Underlayment: Per Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers. C. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stre etscape 4240 Architecture Inc Sheet Metal Roofing 07 6100 - 3 D. Primer: Zinc molybdate type. E. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. F. Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07 9005 - Joint Se alers. G. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I. H. Solder: ASTM B32; Sn50 (50/50) type. 2.04 COMPONENTS A. Dimensional Lumber and Sheathing: See Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry. B. Roof Decking: See Section 06 1323 - Heavy Timber. C. Rigid Insulation: See Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulatio n. D. Snow Fences: Details per Structural Drawings. 1. 3 Pipe-Style Snowguard: Tubing, brackets, target patch,coupl ings, end caps and end collars powder coated to match sheet metal roofing. Flashing materia l same as sheet metal roofing, fabricated to tie into roof. NO exposed fasteners. 2. Install expanded metal mesh inside face of horizontal tubing as indicated on drawings. a. Expanded Metal Mesh: McNichols; 1/2 inch (12.5 mm), 18 gage, 'flattened', carbon steel. E. Roof Tie Offs: Details per Structural Drawings. 1. Continuous steel cable at ridge supported by steel plates attached to roof structure. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Panel Size: 18 inches (203 mm) x 24 inches (610 mm) with t op and bottom edges parallel to the ridge. Conform to SMACNA Figure 6-3 'Flat Seam Roofs'. 1. With 4240 Architecture's approval of size, the panel can be adjusted to maximize coil or sheet efficiency. B. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square , and free from distortion or defects. C. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, same gage as roofing sheet, interlockable with sheet. D. Fabricate starter strips, interlockable with sheet . E. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. F. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and se am corners. G. Form material with flat lock seams, except where ot herwise indicated. H. Allow 1 inch (25 mm) minimum of sealant at seam. I. Solder shop formed metal joints. After soldering, re move flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. Weather seal joints. J. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inc h (450 mm) long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. K. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed out ward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to drains. B. Verify deck is dry and free of snow or ice. Verify joints in wood deck are solidly supported and fastened. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stre etscape 4240 Architecture Inc Sheet Metal Roofing 07 6100 - 4 C. Verify correct placement of wood nailers and insulat ion positioning between nailers. D. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets are in place, and nailing strips located. E. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are i n place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before st arting installation. B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and leve ls. Seal top of reglets with sealant. C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in co ntact with dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil (0.4 mm). D. Place eave edge metal flashings tight with fascia bo ards. Weather lap joints 2 inches (50 mm) and seal with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced per manufacterer's recommendation. 3.03 INSTALLATION – ROOF SYSTEM A. Install board insulation per Section 07 2100 - Thermal In sulation. B. Install exterior plywood sheathing over board insulati on, atop rough framing, overlapping joints of sheathing so that joints do not align. Allow gap for ma terial expansion and contraction. C. Provide integral gutter framing, support and membrane as indicated on Drawings. D. Apply roof underlayment over entire roof sheathing an d per Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers. 1. Apply in single layer laid perpendicular to slope; weather lap edges per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Install snow guards as detailed and located on drawings. 1. Color: As indicated on Drawings. F. Install heat trace as indicated on Drawings. G. Install prefinished metal downspout. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FLAT SEAM SHINGLE ROOFING A. Conform to manufacturer's standard instructions and to standards set forth in SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual figure 6-3 requirements, except as otherw ise indicated. B. Provide formed metal pans and boots for protrusions th rough roof, finish to match roofing. C. Lay sheets with long dimension parallel to ridge. Appl y pans beginning at eaves. D. Cleat and seam all joints. Lock cleats into seams and flatten in direction of drainage. E. Stagger transverse joints of roofing sheets by one-third the width of the sheet. F. At eaves and gable ends, terminate roofing by hooking over edge strip. G. Fold lower ends of seams at eaves over at 45 degree an gle. H. Form valleys of sheets not exceeding 10 feet (3 m) in length. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) in direction of drainage. I. At valley, fold valley and roofing sheets and secure with cleats spaced 18 inches (400 mm) on center. 3.05 INSTALLATION - FLASHINGS A. Conform to manufacturer's standard instructions and to standards set forth in SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements, except as otherwise indi cated. B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stre etscape 4240 Architecture Inc Sheet Metal Roofing 07 6100 - 5 C. Cleat and seam all joints. D. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings a nd felt flashings. E. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, sur faces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected roof surface. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Street scape 4240 Architecture Inc Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 6200 - 1 SECTION 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, co unter-flashings, gutters, downspouts, and conductor heads. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 6100 - Sheet Metal Roofing. B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Shee t, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a. B. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008. C. ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cem ent, Asbestos-Free; 2007. D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: See Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination, for meeting requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pa ttern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work as detailed in drawings and SMACNA Archit ectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain one copy of document on site. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company s pecializing in sheet metal work with minimum five years of experience. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. See Section 07 6100 - Sheet Metal Roofing, for mockup requir ements. Incorporate appropriate sheet metal flashing and trim as part of mock-up. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abras ion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause disc oloration or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Street scape 4240 Architecture Inc Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 6200 - 2 (0.6 mm) thick base metal. 1. Color: As selected by 4240 Architecture, Inc. from man ufacturer's full colors. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene w ashers. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. D. Sealant: Typeas specified in Section 07 9005 - Joint Sea lers. E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I. F. Solder: ASTM B32; Sn50 (50/50) type. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square , and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and se am corners. D. Form material with standing seams, except where othe rwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Solder shop formed metal joints. After soldering, re move flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. Weather seal joints. F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inc h (450 mm) long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed out ward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. H. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches (50 mm) over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges. 2.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. Gutters and Downspouts: Round profile in drawings and SMA CNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements, unless otherwise indicated. B. Gutters and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manua l. C. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA require ments. 2. Gutter Supports: Straps. 3. Downspout Supports: Straps. a. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Figure 135J. D. Downspout Boots: Steel. E. Seal metal joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are i n place, sealed, and secure. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Street scape 4240 Architecture Inc Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 6200 - 3 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before st arting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective b acking paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil (0.4 mm). 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings a nd felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, sur faces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. E. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fast eners. F. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot (20 mm/m) minimum. G. Connect downspouts to downspout boots. Grout connectio n watertight. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Flexible Flashing 07-6500 - 1 SECTION 07 6500 FLEXIBLE FLASHING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Self-adhesive elastomeric flexible flashing at exteri or wall openings, sill plates, wall caps and as shown on Drawings. 2. Prefabricated flashing panels for mechanical ducts and electrical and plumbing devices at exterior wall. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements. B. Division 01 – General Requirements. C. Section 03 3000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Thru-wall fla shing. D. Section 05 1200 – Structural Steel Framing. E. Section 07 2500 – Weather Barrier. F. Section 07 2100 – Thermal Insulation. G. Section 07 4213 – Metal Wall Panels. H. Section 07 9005 – Joint Sealants. I. Division 08 – Openings: Openings in exterior wall. J. Section 09 2100 – Plaster and Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gyps um board sheathing. K. Section 10 3100 – Manufactured Fireplaces: Combustion air a nd flue termination at exterior envelope. L. Division 22 – Plumbing: Piping penetrating exterior envel ope. M. Division 23 – HVAC: Supply, return and vent penetrating e xterior envelope. N. Division 26 – Electrical: 1. Conduits, penetrating exterior envelope. 2. Electrical switch boxes and junction boxes at exterio r envelope. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ABAA – Quality Assurance Program. B. ASTM D412 – Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber an d Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Flexible Flashing 07-6500 - 2 C. ASTM D471 – Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Effec t of Liquids. D. ASTM D570 – Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. E. ASTM D1004 – Standard Test Method for Initial Tear Resis tance of Plastic Film and Sheeting. F. ASTM D1970 – Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Poly mer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. G. ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transm ission of Materials. H. ASTM E154 – Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Retarder s Use in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover. I. ICC-Evaluation Services, Inc. – ES-AC148. J. NRCA – The Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Self-adhesive flashing membrane resisting penetratio n of moisture in conjunction with moisture barrier at building envelope. B. Prefabricated flashing panels for weatherproofing ele ctrical and plumbing devices penetrating the building envelope. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 3300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material location, jointin g pattern, jointing details, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit three (3) 12-inch by 12-inch samples ea ch. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Material shall comply with ICC – ES-AC148. B. Perform work in accordance with the following: 1. AABA – Quality Assurance Program. 2. NRCA – Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. 3. Manufacturer’s installation manual and its quality con trol program. C. Maintain one (1) copy of each document on site. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in w ork of this Section with five years documented experience. 1. Installer shall be responsible to review the Draw ings for openings and devices penetrating the exterior wall and provide all appropriate flashing and c omponents suitable for the conditions. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Flexible Flashing 07-6500 - 3 2. Adjustment to Bid will NOT be allowed after award of Bid. 1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene minimum two (2) weeks prior to commencing wor k of this Section under provisions of Section 01 3100. 1. Invite all trades affected by the work. B. Review preparation and installation procedures, and coo rdination scheduling required with related work. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to jobsite under provisions of Section 01 6000. B. Deliver flexible flashing materials and components i n manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Store flexible flashing materials as recommended by manufacturer. Keep away from open flame or sources of ignition. D. Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply flashing during inclement weather or when ambient temperatures are below 40 degrees F or above 80 degrees F. B. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun da mage for more than 30 days. C. Do not allow flashing material to come in contact with polysulfide sealants, creosote, uncured coal tar products of EPDM, unless approved by manufacturer. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 3100. B. Coordinate work with installation of openings in exte rior wall framing and air barrier and vapor retarder, and other devices penetrating exterior wall. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide 10-year material and installation warranty un der provisions of Section 01 7000. B. Warranty: Cover damage to building and contents result ing from failure to resist penetration of water. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Self-Adhesive Flashing: 1. DuPont Building Innovations. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Flexible Flashing 07-6500 - 4 2. Grace Construction Products. 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01-2500. B. Prefabricated Flashing Panels: 1. Hyload, Inc. (www.hyloadflashing.com 800-457-4056). 2. Quickflash Weatherproofing Products, Inc. (www.quickflashproducts.com 702- 614-6100). 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01-25-00. 2.02 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Self-adhesive Flashing: Cross laminated polyethylen e film laminated to preformed rubberized asphalt with release paper on one side, self-adhering, 40-m il thick minimum, 36-inch wide rolls; conforming to the following criteria: 1. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96, Method B; 0.05 perms . 2. Water Absorption: ASTM D570; 0.1% max by weight. 3. Elongation, Membrane: ASTM D412; 175% minimum. 4. Low Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D1970; -25 Degree F, unaf fected. 5. Tensile Strength: ASTM D412, 650 psi minimum. B. Prefabricated Flashing Panel: 1. Flashing Type for Plumbing: Combination of high-densit y polyethylene (HDPE) and low-density polyethylene (LDPE) with the following cha racteristics: a. HDPE, Tensile Strength at Yield: ASTM D638; 3,100 psi. b. LDPE, Tensile Strength at Yield: ASTM D638; 1,300 psi. c. Weatherproof Seal: Thermoplastic elastomer. d. Hardness: ASTM D2240, Shore A, 10 Seconds; 46. e. Tensile Strength: ASTM D412: 490 psi. 2. Flashing Type for Electrical: Thermoplastic elastome r with the following characteristics: a. Hardness: ASTM D2240, Shore A, 10 Seconds; 93. b. Tensile Strength: ASTM D412; 1,300 psi. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Surface Conditioners and Primers: Of type as recomm ended by flashing system manufacturer. B. Sealant, Adhesives and Tapes: Of type as recommended by flashing system manufacturer and as specified in Section 07 9005 – Joint Sealers. C. Counter Flashings: Of type and profile suitable to th e condition. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matte r detrimental to adhesion or application of flashing under provisions of Section 01 4500. B. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive f lashing are securely installed. C. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimen tal to proper and timely completion of work. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Flexible Flashing 07-6500 - 5 D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have b een corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. E. Beginning of installation means installer accepts e xisting conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install continuous wood blocking on sill of openings fr om stud to stud and on the inside face of the opening, creating a dam on the inside. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install flashing in accordance with manuf acturer’s recommendations and NRCA – Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and ABAA’s Quality Assuran ce Program. B. Self-Adhesive Flashing: 1. Precut pieces of flashing to easily handled lengths for each location. 2. Remove silicone-coated release paper and position flas hing carefully before placing it against the surface. 3. At sill plates, install flashing above concrete foun dation, stem walls and retaining walls for full depth of wall with downturn leg of 6 inches minim um. 4. At wall openings, install flashing for full depth of wa ll thickness and over the wall for minimum of 6 inches. a) Coordinate installation of flashing with air barrier. b) Install sill flashing extending with ends upturn a minimum o f 6 inches and over a continuous blocking to form an end dam, with the seams sealed, or provide manufacturer’s pre-molded pieces. c) Install jamb flashing overlapping sill flashing by 4 inch es minimum. d) Install head flashing overlapping jamb flashing by 4 inche s minimum. 5. At shelf angles and lintels, install flashing over s ubstrate extended over the front edge of shelf angle and lintel, and with upturn leg 8 inches minimum up the wall. Do NOT expose the front edge to view. 6. At wall caps, install flashing over the walls with longest continuous piece for full depth of walls and downturn leg of 6 inches minimum. 7. When properly positioned, place against surface by pressi ng firmly into place by hand roller. Ensure that flashing is fully adhered to substra te to prevent water from migrating under flashing. 8. Overlap adjacent pieces 4 inches minimum and roll all s eams with a steel hand roller. 9. Additional Consideration: a) When required by dirty or dusty site conditions or by surfa ces having irregular or rough texture, apply surface conditioner by spray, brush, or roller at the rate recommended by manufacturer, prior to flashing installati on. Allow surface conditioner to dry completely before flashing application . b) Apply a bead or trowel coat of mastic along flashing top edge, seams, cuts, and penetrations. C. Prefabricated Flashing Panel: 1. Select flashing panel required to suit device type, size and condition. 2. Push flashing panel over the device in accordance to m anufacturer’s instructions to form weatherproof seal. 3. Ensure flashing panel collar edge is flush with edge of de vice as per manufacturer’s instructions. 4. Attach flashing panel to framing and tape panel edges to substrate. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Flexible Flashing 07-6500 - 6 3 .04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01 5000 – Tem porary Facilities and Controls. B. Remove all debris and check that all components are prope rly sealed and secured. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Joint Sealers 07 9005 - 1 SECTION 07 9005 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Precompressed foam sealers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Sealants used in conjunc tion with unit masonry. C. Section 04 4200 - Exterior Stone Cladding: Sealants used in conjunction with exterior stone cladding. D. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Sealants used in co njunction with air barriers and vapor retarders. E. Section 07 6100 - Sheet Metal Roofing: Sealants used in conjunction with roofing. F. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sealan ts used in conjunction with sheet metal flashing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010. B. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2008. C. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Jo int Sealants; 2010. D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with other sections referencin g this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemica l characteristics. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 inch (300 mm) long sample s illustrating sealant colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document coveri ng installation requirements on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in per forming the work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of sealant joints in conjunction with mock-ups specified in the Sections listed above including Section 04 4200 - Exterior Stone Cladding, under provisio ns of Section 01 4300 - Quality Assurance. B. Construct mock-up with specified sealant types and with other components noted. C. Locate where directed by 4240 Architecture, Inc. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Joint Sealers 07 9005 - 2 D. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the se alant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, f or additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a one year period afte r Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants a nd accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Silicone Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com. 3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.ch emrex.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.ch emrex.com. 4. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Acrylic Sealants: 1. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Butyl Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. E. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.ch emrex.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. F. Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers: 1. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd: www.emseal.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide products hav ing volatile organic compound (VOC) content as specified in Section 01 6116. B. Type A - General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyureth ane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single, or multi- component. 1. Color: To be selected by 4240 Architecture, Inc. from selected manufacturer's full range. 2. Product: As recommended by selected manufacturer. 3. Applications: Use for: February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Joint Sealers 07 9005 - 3 a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant i s indicated. C. Type B - Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: Precompres sed foam sealer; urethane with water-repellent; 1. Face color: To match surrounding construction. 2. Size as required to provide weathertight seal when inst alled. 3. Provide product recommended by manufacturer for traffic-b earing use. 4. Product: EMSHIELD WFR2 manufactured by Emseal. www.ems eal.com. a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 5. Applications: Use for: a. Exterior wall expansion joints. D. Type F - Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyuretha ne, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Class 25, Uses T, I, M and A; single or multi- component. 1. Color: Color as selected by Architect from select ed manufacturer's full range. 2. As recommended by selected manufacturer. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant m anufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type , recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant ; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compa tible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that coul d impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacture r's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer 's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accor dance with ASTM C919. D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to a chieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except wh ere specific dimensions are indicated. E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape 4240 Architecture Inc Joint Sealers 07 9005 - 4 F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. H. Tool joints concave. I. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) below adjoin ing surface. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION 4240 Architecture Inc Painting and Coat ing 09 9000 - 1 SECTION 09 9000 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not limite d to surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfac es. 1. Paint all exposed-to-view surfaces whether or not col ors are designated, except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted, remain natural or specified as work under other Sections. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfac es. If color or finish is not designated, Architect will select from standard colors a vailable. a. Painting of gypsum board surfaces. b. Painting of steel and ironwork surfaces, including but n ot limited to steel framing structure and deck, snow fences and safety tiebacks unless they are prefinished. c. Painting, and staining and sealing of wood surfaces. d. Painting of concrete and masonry unit surfaces, unless they are prefinished. e. Painting of bare and covered pipes and ducts (including col or coding), hangers, exposed steel and ironwork, and primed metal surfaces of mec hanical and electrical equipment, including roof area. f. Painting is not required on factory/fabricator-finis hed products, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels unless otherwise no ted or scheduled. 1) Factory/fabricator-finished products includes, but not n ecessarily limited to the following: a) Architectural woodwork and casework and finish carpentr y. b) Finish hardware, except prime-coated items. c) Finished mechanical equipment and devices. d) Finished plumbing and fire protection devices. e) Finished electrical devices and fixtures. f) Other products as specified in appropriate Sections. 2) Finished metal surfaces include, but not necessarily l imited to the following: a) Anodized Aluminum. b) Stainless steel. c) Copper. d) Brass, Bronze and all copper alloys. 3) Concealed surfaces include: a) Inaccessible areas in wall and ceiling. b) Interior of chase walls. 4) Operating parts and components include moving parts of oper ating equipment, such as the following: a) Valve and damper operators. b) Linkages. c) Sensing devices. 5) Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter’s Laboratori es, Factory Mutual and other Code required labels and equipment names, identific ation, performance rating, and nomenclature plates. 4240 Architecture Inc Painting and Coat ing 09 9000 - 2 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements. B. Division 01 – General Requirements. C. Division 05 – Metals: Lintels, grating and other exposed -to-view structural steel and miscellaneous steel. D. Division 09 – Finishes E. Division 23 – HVAC. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D16 – Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, V arnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D2016 – Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. C. ASTM D3273 – Standard Test Method for Resistance to Grow th of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. D. PDCA P3 – Designation of Paint Color. E. PDCA P4 – Responsibility fro Inspection and Acceptance of Surfaces Prior to Painting and Decorating. F. PDCA P5 – Benchmark Sample Procedures for Paint and Oth er Decorative Coating Systems. G. PDCA P15 – Painting of Shop Primed Siding and Other Archi tectural Features. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Paint: Complete system of enamels, paints, sealer s, fillers, and stains, whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. B. System: Materials and quantities recommended by approv ed materials manufacturer for specified surface; includes preparation, priming/sealing, int ermediate and finish coats. C. Concealed Spaces or Surfaces: Included items specified in this Section that will be covered by other trades with finish materials in a manner such t hat items are not exposed to view when construction is completed. D. Exposed Spaces or Surfaces: Includes items specified in this Section that are exposed to view when construction is completed. This includes both exter ior and interior spaces and surfaces. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 3300 – Submittal Proce dures. B. Samples: Provide four color samples for each color in accordance with scheduled color selections. Provide document indicating locations for e ach color. 1. Prepare painted samples for finishing gypsum board in the following manner: 4240 Architecture Inc Painting and Coat ing 09 9000 - 3 a. Apply paint on heavy white paper 8-1/2 inches (215 mm) x 11 in ches (280 mm) in size for initial selection. b. After initial selection apply paint on actual samples for final selection. 1) For gypsum board, sheet and panel products provide sample of 8-1/2 inches (215 mm) x 11 inches (280 mm) in size. 2) For trim materials and products provide sample of 11 inche s (280 mm) in length. 2. Approved samples shall be used for judging colors of finish ed work. C. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer’s technical data sheets, published instruct ions, Material Safety Data sheets (MSDS), and other relevant data. a. All factory pre-finished items must submit paint and pr imers, solvents, MSDS, and material data sheets. 2. Material List: Submit a complete list of proposed mat erials to Architect for review, including sealers, primers, and stains. Identify each ma terial by manufacturer’s name, product name and number, and type of surfaces to receive in dividual finishes. D. Manufacturer’s Certification: Provide each shipment of materials delivered to jobsite with an affidavit from manufacturer, certifying that each class ification or type of materials furnished complies with Specification requirements and approved mater ials list. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Qualifications: 1. For every specific system, furnish materials and produc ts from a single manufacturer, unless approved otherwise by manufacturer of finish coati ng material or product. 2. Interior and exterior paint materials shall have ant i-mildew agents incorporated into the formulation. Additionally, for exterior materials incl ude carefully balanced ultraviolet inhibitors. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: In addition to co mplying with other legal requirements, comply with: 1. Consumer Products Safety Commission (CPSC), 16 CFR Par t 1303. 2. SCAQMD, Regulation XI. 1.07 QUALIFICATION A. Manufacturer and Applicator: Companies specializing in manufacturing and application of the product with minimum of five years of experience. B. Applicator must review Finish Schedules for proper deter mination of listed finishes to all given areas specified. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site unde r provisions of Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements. B. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufact urer’s original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer’s name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder t ype). 3. Federal Specification number, if applicable. 4240 Architecture Inc Painting and Coat ing 09 9000 - 4 4. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture. 5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituen ts. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number. C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered conta iners in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. D. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and o rderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work a reas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and applicatio n. 1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient tempe ratures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of the product, surfaces to be painted, and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F and 90 degre es F. Do not apply if temperatures might drop to this level within four hours af ter application. C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of the product, surfaces to be painted, and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F and 95 degrees F. Do not apply if temperatures might drop to this level within four hours af ter application. D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85%, at temperatures less than 5 degrees F above the dew point, to damp or wet surfaces, or when rain is imminent. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfa ces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. F. Provide lighting level of 80-foot candles measured mid-he ight at substrate surface. 1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATE A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 7000 – Execution and Clo seout Requirements. 1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01 7000 – Execution and Cl oseout Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Paint: 1. Benjamin Moore. 2. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. 4240 Architecture Inc Painting and Coat ing 09 9000 - 5 3. ICI Dulux Paints. 4. Kelly Moore Paint Manufacturing., Inc. 5. Kwal Paint, Inc. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company. 7. Sophir/Morris. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Paint Types: 1. 100% Acrylic Latex Wood Primer. 2. 100% Acrylic Latex Enamel. 3. 100% Acrylic Concrete Primer/Sealer. 4. 100% Acrylic Drywall Primer. 5. Vinyl/Acrylic Sandable Primer. 6. Elastomeric Acrylate Adhesive Primer. 7. Vinyl/Acrylic Primer/Sealer. 8. Vinyl/Acrylic Latex Enamel. 9. 100% Elastomeric Wall Coating. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate is ready to receive work under provis ions of Section 01 4500 – Quality Control. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint finishes f or conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, and quality of work. 1. Inspect metal items specified under other Sections to be pretreated or primed prior to finish painting under this Section. 2. Perform moisture, adhesion, and similar tests to dete rmine suitability of surfaces to receive paint materials. 3. Notify Architect in writing if surfaces and condition s are not proper for producing best quality work. C. Do not apply paint or finish until unsatisfactory con ditions have been corrected. D. Do not apply finish to wet, damp, dusty, dirty, finger m arked, rough, unfinished, or defective surfaces. Repair imperfections as described for each ty pe of material and fill with appropriate, compatible patching materials. E. Faulty sub surfaces will not excuse defective painting w ork. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware acc essories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, electrical outlet plates and similar it ems in place that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparatio n and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adja cent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items r einstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 4240 Architecture Inc Painting and Coat ing 09 9000 - 6 1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatme nts. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust an d other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly paint ed surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified in appropriate Sections. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or r emove and re-prime. Notify the Architect and Owner in writing of problems anticipated w ith using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces smooth an d dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applicat ion of primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Putty fillers shall match adjoining color of finish ed surfaces. c. Prime, stain, and seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, includin g cabinets, counters, cases and paneling. d. When transparent finish is required, back-prime with spa r varnish. e. Back-prime paneling on interior partitions where maso nry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. f. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors wi th a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions. a. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of pa int in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. b. Stir material before application to produce a mixture o f uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. c. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. 5. Protection: a. Provide drop cloths, masking and other protection neces sary to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces. When protection is removed to per mit access by other trades, replace same to original conditions and assume ful l responsibility for all damage. b. Provide barricades or otherwise isolate freshly pai nted surfaces from damage by other trades. Remove all implements of work at complet ion of painting operations. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply paint materials with appropriate brushes, rollers or spray. 1. Rate of Application: Do not exceed paint manufacturer’s recommendation for the surface involved, less 10% allowance for losses. 2. Maintain brushes, rollers and spraying equipment clean, dry, free from contaminants and appropriate for required finishes. 4240 Architecture Inc Painting and Coat ing 09 9000 - 7 B. Apply stain materials with brush or roller, or othe r methods such as brush and wipe etc. as specified in appropriate Sections to achieve the desired a ffect. Spray applications shall include back-rolling or back brushing and is only when pre-approved b y 4240 Architecture, Inc. 1. Apply finish coats smooth, free of brush marks, strea ks and laps with surfaces uniformly covered. a. Finished metal surfaces shall be free of skips, voids or pinholes in any coat when tested with a low voltage detector. b. Where opaque finishes are indicated, finish coats sha ll completely cover, hide and obscure underlying color of surface to which they are applied. Provide finish color coats in addition to specified quantity, nec essary to completely cover, hide, and obscure underlying colors. 2. Leave details of moldings and ornaments clean and true without excess paint in corners and depressions. C. Do not apply to wet or damp surfaces. D. Pre-finish exterior siding materials as specified in appropriate Sections. E. Apply black primer in glazing rabbets prior to installa tion of glazing. F. Apply black paint inside of ducts and vents to the extent where is exposed to view through louvers, diffusers and grills. G. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or color s clean and sharp with no overlapping. H. Refinish entire wall where portion of finish has been damaged or is not acceptable. I. Conform to applicable Federal, State, and Local regula tions for health, safety, and hazardous waste disposal. 3.04 TOUCH-UP WORK A. Touchup abraded, stained or otherwise disfigured portion, o r refinish as necessary, to produce best quality Work. 3.05 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty ca ns, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the Project site. 1. Cleaning Equipment: Do not use plumbing fixtures for clean ing painting equipment. Keep brush washed outside paint storage area, and remove br ush washes from Project site daily. B. Upon completion of painting, clean paint-spattered surfa ces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Do not mar surface finish of items being cleaned. D. Leave paint storage spaces clean. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01 5000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls. 4240 Architecture Inc Painting and Coat ing 09 9000 - 8 B. Protect Work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, a s acceptable to Architect. Provide “wet paint” signs to protect newly painted finishes. Re move temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after co mpletion of painting operations. The Contractor, subcontractor and their employees must obse rve all OSHA and regulations and requirements. C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces to the approval of Architect, Interior Designer and Owner. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. Exterior (unless otherwise noted, each material and system component shall represent a separate color and sheen): 1. Wood – Opaque a. First Coat: 100% Acrylic Latex Wood Primer. b. Second and Third Coats: 100% Acrylic Latex Enamel. 2. Wood – Stained Finish a. First Coat: S-W WoodScapes Semi-Transparent Stain, A15T5. b. Second Coat: S-W WoodScapes Semi-Transparent Stain, A15T5. 3. Ferrous Metal: c. Surface Areas at 8 feet or Lower from Walking Surface . 1) First Coat: Urethane Zinc-Rich. 2) Second and Third Coats: Acrylic Polyurethane. d. Surface Areas at Higher than 8 feet from Walking Surfac e. 1) First Coat: Polyamide Epoxy or Polyamidoamine Epoxy. 2) Second and Third Coats: 100% Acrylic High-Performance D irect to Metal Enamel. 4. Galvanized Metal: a. First Coat: Polyamide Epoxy or Polyamidoamine Epoxy. b. Second and Third Coat: 100% Acrylic High Performance Di rect to Metal Enamel. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stre etscape 4240 Architecture Inc Staining and Transparent Finishing 09 9300 - 1 SECTION 09 9300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Transparent wood finish systems for field application . B. Additional product requirements, execution, and surfaces no t to be finished are specified in Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: 1. Base Manufacturer: a. Sherwin-Williams: WoodScapes; polyurethane, semi-tr ansparent stain; www.sherwin-williams.com. b. Products of other manufacturers may be used under conditi ons specified in Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating. 2. Sanding Sealers: Where the manufacturer offers option s on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 EXTERIOR TRANSPARENT FINISH SYSTEMS A. Exterior Wood - Stain Finish: For all exterior woo d items unless otherwise indicated: 1. Preparation as specified by manufacturer. 2. Flat Semi-Transparent: 2 coats Sherwin-Williams Wo odScapes; polyurethane, semi-transparent stain. PART 3 EXECUTION (SEE SECTION 09 9000) END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stre etscape 4240 Architecture Inc High Performance Coatings 09 9600 - 1 SECTION 09 9600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. High performance coatings of structural steel, bench supports. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2006. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating coating material s. C. Samples: Submit 2 samples 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size i llustrating finishes and colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products me et or exceed specified requirements. F. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning procedures and repai r and patching techniques. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Town of Vail's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Coating Materials: 1 gallon (4 liters) of each type and color. 2. Label each container with manufacturer's name, product number, color number, and room names and numbers where used. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in per forming the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Provide two mock-ups of tenemec and coatings, 12 inches (300 mm) long, illustrating coating, color, and surface sheen. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install materials when temperature is below 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) or above 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). B. Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of coating. C. Restrict traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stre etscape 4240 Architecture Inc High Performance Coatings 09 9600 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: 1. Tenemec Coating: B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Coatings - General: Provide complete multi-coat sys tems formulated and recommended by manufacturer for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indica ted; number of coats specified does not include primer or filler coat. B. Tenemec Decorative Coating: 1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 6. 2. Primer: Series 90-97 Tnemec-Zinc; DFT 2.5 to 3.5 mils. 3. Intermediate: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; DFT 2.0 t o 3.0 mils. 4. Finish: 1070V, 1071V or 1072V Fluoronar; DFT 2.0 to 3.0 mils. a. Color: As indicated on drawings. C. Primers: As recommended by coating manufacturer for specific substrate, unless otherwise specified. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the coating manufacturer. Obtain and follow manufacturer's instructions for examination a nd testing of substrates. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces of loose foreign matter. B. Remove substances that would bleed through finished coa tings. If unremovable, seal surface with shellac. C. Remove finish hardware, fixture covers, and accessor ies and store. D. Protect adjacent surfaces and materials not receivi ng coating from spatter and overspray; mask if necessary to provide adequate protection. Repair damage. 3.03 PRIMING A. Apply primer to all surfaces, unless specifically not required by coating manufacturer. Apply in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 COATING APPLICATION A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instr uctions, to thicknesses specified. B. Apply in uniform thickness coats, without runs, drips, pi nholes, brush marks, or variations in color, texture, or finish. Finish edges, crevices, corners, a nd other changes in dimension with full coating thickness. 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. Clean surfaces immediately of overspray, splatter, a nd excess material. C. After coating has cured, clean and replace finish har dware, fixtures, and fittings previously removed. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Stre etscape 4240 Architecture Inc High Performance Coatings 09 9600 - 3 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finished work from damage. END OF SECTION February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 1 SECTION 15 010 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are part of these specifications. Consult them further instructions and be governed by the requirements thereunder. 1.2 DESCR IPTION A. Work Included 1. Furnish all labor and materials and perform all operations necessary for the installation of complete and operating mechanical systems subject to the conditions of the contract. The work also includes the completion of such mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all systems; this includes the furnishing of all materials for filling systems to make them operable, including water, refrigerant, oil, grease, antifreeze a nd brine. Prove satisfactory operation of all equipment and controls to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER on request. B. Work Not Included 1. Certain labor and materials may be furnished and/or installed under other divisions of these specifications. Coordinate with oth er trades and arrange the work to make the parts fit together. The following items are to be accomplished under other divisions of these specifications. a. Temporary Heat: See Paragraph 1.7, this Section and Division 1. b. Concrete: See paragraph 3.10, this Se ction. c. Electrical Equipment and Wiring: See paragraph 3.11, this section. d. Temporary Water and Toilet: See Division 1. C. Equipment Furnished by Owner 1. The Owner will award contracts, which will commence concurrently with this contract. Specifically this work will include: a. Equipment Installation: Refer to appropriate drawings for equipment furnished by the Owner. 2. Rough -in service pipes to locations as required by architectural and mechanical drawings and equipment shop drawings. Provide service valves on all pipes except waste and vent pipes, plug or cap these. Final connections to equipment will be made by the Contractor . 1.3 PROVISIONS A. Work performed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 1, and the mechanical dr awings and all items hereinafter specified. 1. Prior to any work being performed under this division, examine architectural, structural, food service, civil, electrical, specialty systems, and interior design drawings and specifications. If any February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 2 discrepancies occur between them and the mechanical drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. 2. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the mechanical work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 3. Coordinate the mechanical work with the General Contractor and be resp onsible to him for satisfactory progress of the work. Coordinate mechanical work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. 4. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any tim e by representatives of the Architect and Owner. If the Architect or Owner’s agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifications, Contractor shall remove the material from the premises and correct the insta llation to the satisfaction of the agent. 5. In acceptance or rejection of installed mechanical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 1.4 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES/SITE A. Visit the premises site before submitting bid as n o extras will be allowed for lack of knowledge of existing conditions. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Conform to applicable sections of NFPA 13. B. Conform to the National Electrical Code, 2008 Edition. C. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. D. In case of differe nce between these specifications, codes, laws, industry standards, and/or utility company regulations the most stringent shall govern. E. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. 1.6 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES A. Ap ply for and pay for all permits, fees, licenses and inspections for this Division of work. 1. Do not include the cost of any "Plant Investment Fee" or "System Development Charge" for sewer and/or water charged by the City. This will be arranged for and paid for by the Owner. 2. Do not include the cost of any "Gas Application Fee" charged by the Utility Company. This will be arranged and paid for by the Owner. B. Notify proper authorities when work is ready for inspections required by applicable codes, rules and re gulations, allowing sufficient time for inspections to be made without hindering progress of the work. Furnish to the Owner copies of inspection certificates of acceptance. 1.7 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Temporary heat will be furnished by the General Contractor. Use of the permanent heating system will not be allowed without written authorization from the MECHANICAL ENGINEER. In case the February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 3 permanent heating system is used for temporary heat, the General Contractor shall pay all costs until acceptance by the Owner. 1.8 EXISTI NG UTILITIES A. The plans indicate the location, type and sizes of various utilities within the site where known. These utilities are indicated as accurately as possible. If utilities are encountered during construction, which are not shown on the drawings, ask for instructions from the Architect. Any relocation or remodeling required will then be directed by change order. Assume all responsibility for protection of all utilities, shown or not, and repair any damage caused by this construction at no extra charge to the Owner. B. Investigate with proper authorities for all existing water taps, etc. and make arrangements to pay for all removal charges in original bid. C. Owners of all underground utilities shall be notified at least 2 business days prior to excavat ion so that they can locate and mark underground facilities. 1.9 DRAWINGS A. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and are not to be scaled for dimensions. Take all dimensions from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings, and from the structure itsel f before fabricating any work. Verify all space requirements, coordinating with other trades, and install the systems in the space provided without extra charges to the Owner. B. Conceal all piping in finished areas of the building except where otherwise not ed on the drawings. C. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, unless approval is given in writing by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER for deviation. 1.10 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents care fully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Architect for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretat ion or correction will be issued as an addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made o n behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Failure to so request clarification of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility. The signing of the Contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. 1.11 ROUGH -IN A. Verify fin al locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment. B. Refer to equipment specifications in other Divisions for additional rough -in requirements. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 4 1.12 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit a set of coordination drawings showing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other building components. Prepare drawings to an accurate scale of ¼”=1”-0” or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment and materi als, including clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment. Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. B. Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and details to conclusively coordinate where space is limited, and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessary limited) to the following: 1. Ductwork 2. Hydronic Piping 3. Plumbing Piping 4. Fire sprinkler p iping 5. Electrical conduit mains 1.13 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components. B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building compon ents to allow for mechanical installations. D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installat ions of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing -in the building. F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the i nstallation of mechanical equipment and materials. G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible, and in accordance with minimum required clearances as specified in codes and regulations. H. The word “concealed” as used in this specification refers to such spaces as pipe and duct chases, pipe and duct trenches, above plastered ceilings, in walls and buried where pipe and/or duct is inaccessible when building is complete. “Exposed” is intended to be within equipment rooms, unfinished areas, above “push up” ceilings, accessible pipe and duct tunnels. I. The term “furnish” means supply and deliver to Project, unless otherwise defined in greater detail. The term “install” is used to describe operations at Project, from inspecting and unloading, to completion in place, ready for intended use. The term “provide” means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, unless otherwise defined in greater detai l. 1.14 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 5 B. Proposed Product List: Include Products specified in Divisions 22 and 23 specifications. C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, Products, and acc essories in a single submittal. D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. E. Submit miscellaneous items specified on the drawings, but not covered in the specifications. Make no substitutions without prior approval from the Architect. 1.15 SHO P DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings on all equipment, Temperature Controls and Fire Protection. Provide shop drawings to the Architect and Engineer showing locations of all access panels. B. Shop drawings required for this project are as follows: 1. Plumbing F ixt ures 2. Insulation 3. Boilers 4. Pumps 5. Fire Protection 6. Piping 7. Motor Starters 8. Temperature C ontrols 9. Exhaust Fans 10. Heat Recovery Ventilators 11. Cabinet and Unit Heaters 12. Water Heaters 13. Snowmelt and Radiant Tubing 14. Glycol Feeders 15. Grilles, Registers, Diffusers, and Louvers C. Pre sent shop drawing submittal data at one time, bound in three -ring binders, indexed in a neat and orderly manner. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Provide five sets of submittal data, unless noted otherwise in Division 1. Do not begin work until one (1) copy is returned. D. Provide, with shop drawing submittal, 1/4" scale layout drawings of rooms with boilers, chillers, and HVAC equipment. Layouts shall show locations of, and shall be coordinated with electrical equipment, and equipment shall be dra wn to scale. E. Place orders for all equipment in time to prevent any delay in construction schedule or completion of project. If any materials or equipment are not ordered in time, additional charges made by equipment manufacturers to complete their equipme nt in time to meet construction schedule, together with any special handling charges, shall be borne by the Contractor. F. Contractor agrees that shop drawing submittals processed by the engineer are not change orders. The purpose of shop drawing submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and contract documents in the form of design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to or a fter shop drawings and specifications shall control and shall be followed. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 6 G. Contractor to provide manufacturers’ recommended installation manuals for equipment. H. Review of shop drawings does not relieve this Contractor from the responsibility of furnishing equipment and materials of proper dimension, size, quantity, quality and all performance characteristics to efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the contract documents. Review does not relieve this Contractor from responsibility for errors on the shop drawings. If the shop drawings deviate from the contract documents, advise the MECHANICAL ENGINEER of the deviations in writing accompanying the shop drawings, including the reasons for the deviations. Coordinate all required changes with the other trades affected. If the changes are occasioned by the Contractor, he shall pay any costs involved. 1.16 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearra ngement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of Architect before proceeding. 1.17 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the process of the work, maintain an accurate record of the installation of the mechanical systems. Upon completion of the mechanical systems installation, transfer all record data to blue -line prints of the original drawings. Drawings shall include all addendum items, charge orders, alternations, reroutings, etc. As a conditi on of acceptance of the project, deliver to the Architect one copy of the record drawings. 1.18 WARRANTY A. All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified. B. Guarantee all workmanship, materials and equipment and replace any found defective with out cost to the Owner, for one year after final acceptance, as defined in General Conditions. C. Each warranty for longer than the one year described above (that comes with equipment used on the job) shall be passed on to the owner with dates of start and end of the warranty. 1.19 ENGINEERING BY CONTRACTOR A. The construction of this building requires the contractor to design several systems or subsystems. All such design shall be the completed responsibility of the contractor. B. Systems or subsystems which require eng ineering responsibility by the contractor include, but are not limited to: 1. Fire sprinkler. 2. Equipment supports, not fully detailed in the drawings. 3. Pipe hangers and anchors not specified in these documents, or catalogued by the manufacturer. 4. Temperature con trols. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 7 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER A. Equipment in the following categories shall be of one manufacturer or available through one manufacturer for each category to facilitate ease of maintenance for the Owner. 1. Motors (open drip -proof squirrel cage) 2. Starte rs 3. Temperature Controls 4. Plumbing Fixture Trim 5. Thermometers 6. Pressure Gauges 7. Gate Valves 8. Butterfly Valves 9. Plug Valves 10. Globe Valves 11. Check Valves 12. Balancing Valves 13. Radiator Valves 14. Traps 15. Dielectric Unions 16. Strainers 17. Air Filters 2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS (PRIOR APPROVALS) A. Bid der's Choice 1. Materials, equipment or services listed by several identifying names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed names may be bid without soliciting prior acceptance. Where more than one name is given in the specifications, the first named manufacturer's material, equipment or services is contemplated and any changes and their costs, required to accommodate the other named material or equipment as well as space requirements for the other named materials or equipment, must be assu med by the Contractor in his bid. (See Shop Drawing Requirement). B. Performance Specification 1. When any product is specified only by requirement to meet an industry standard or regulating body standard (such as U.L., AGA, AWWA, ANSI, etc.) and the item propo sed carries approval of that body, no prior acceptance by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER is needed. 2. When any product or service is specified by requirement to meet a performance standard or is specified by a generic specification, (no manufacturers name listed) n o prior acceptance by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER is needed except as specifically called for in these specifications. C. Acceptance 1. Material and equipment specified is used as a basis of standard, and while not specifically mentioned, material gauges, weights, a ppearance and space requirements must be met by any substitutions. 2. Action for substitutions specified herein will be given only after the receipt of complete data showing performance over entire range, physical dimensions and material construction all SPEC IFICALLY marked for the individual item. Letter of transmittal with at least one (1) copy February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 8 and one (1) marked up copy of all descriptive data shall be submitted to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER'S Office. 3. Submit shop drawings for all materials and equipment other than the first named in theses specifications showing any changes required in piping, ducting, electrical wiring, space allocation etc. Be responsible to make all changes required to accommodate and to pay for these changes. Coordinate changes required with all other trades. Pay for all changes resulting from re -arranging equipment. 4. See General Conditions for method of notification of acceptance. 2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS (CONTRACTOR AND/OR OWNER INITIATED) A. Materials or equipment listed by several manufacturers’ na mes are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed manufacturers may be used in the base bid. Materials or equipment not listed are considered substitutions. B. Performance Specification: When any item is specified by requirement to meet a perform ance, industry or regulating body standard or is specified by a generic spec, (no manufacturer's name listed) no prior approval by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer is needed unless specifically called for in these specifications. C. Contractor to be respons ible for any changes and costs to accommodate any equipment except the first named in the specification. D. Substitutions for Material 1. Equipment and materials not listed as equivalents may be proposed as deductive alternates to specified items by submitting i t as a separate line item to the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such alternate proposals shall not be substituted for the base bid and must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be deducted for each item and all deviations from specified items. Highlight all difference from specified equipment. If any such alternates are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items within 14 days of a ward of contract. Late requests for proposed substitutions shall not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concerns. 2.4 BID ALTERNATE(S) A. Refer to Division 1 and all contract documents for additional information. B. Alternate(s) for Material and Equipment 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive alternate(s) to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not b e substituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all materials, equipment, labor, electrical connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid alternates at the time the base bids are due. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 9 2.5 SAFETY PROVISIONS A. Any refrigeration syste m containing CFC -11, CFC -12, HCFC -123, HCFC -22, or any of the other refrigerants listed in the Clean Air Act as a Class I or Class II Ozone Depleting Compound shall comply with the Clean Air Acts and the Colorado Air Quality Control Commission Regulation #15. B. As a minimum all systems shall be equipped with refrigerant recovery service valves, relief valves capable of resetting after activation, and for system with more than 50 pounds of charge, and isolateable receiver and/or condenser capable of holding th e complete charge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STORAGE A. Provide for proper storage of all materials and equipment and assume responsibility for losses due to any cause. All storage shall be within the contact limit lines of the building site. Cover and store all equipment and materials out of elements; any rusted or weather damaged item shall not be used. 3.2 PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer’s Instructions 1. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the product manufacturer’s instructions and recommenda tions. 2. Consult with manufacturer’s technical representatives, who are recognized as technical experts, for specific instructions on special project conditions. 3. If a conflict exists, notify the Architect/Engineer in writing and obtain his instruction before proceeding with the work in question. B. Movement of Equipment 1. Wherever possible, arrange for the movement and positioning of equipment so that enclosing partitions, walls and roofs will not be delayed or need to be removed. 2. Otherwise, advise Contractor of o pening requirements to be maintained for the subsequent entry of equipment. C. Heavy Equipment 1. Coordinate the movement of heavy items with shoring and bracing so that the building structure will not be overloaded during the movement and installation. 2. Where me chanical products to be installed on the existing roof are too heavy to be hand -carried, do not transport across the existing roof deck; position by crane or other device so as to avoid overloading the roof deck. D. Clearances 1. Install piping and ductwork: a. Str aight and true. b. Aligned with other work. c. Close to walls and overhead structure (allowing for insulation). d. Concealed, where possible, in occupied spaces. e. Out -of -the -way with maximum passageway and headroom remaining in each space. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 10 2. Except as otherwise indica ted, arrange mechanical services and overhead equipment with a minimum of: a. 7’0” headroom in storage spaces. b. 8’6” headroom in other spaces. 3. Do not obstruct windows, doors or other openings. 4. Give the right -of way to piping systems required to slope for drain age (over other service lines and ductwork). 5. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes and ducts shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping pipes whether or not indicated on the drawings. Furnish and install a ll traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., as required to a ffect these offsets, transitions and changes in direction. E. Access 1. Install all work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchanger bundles, boiler tubes, fan shafts and w heels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and all other parts which might require periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, traps, starters, motors, control components and to clear th e openings of doors and of access panels. 3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be d one so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner's operation. B. Close all pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and delive r in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Architect. C. Do not allow any fans in the HVAC system to operate before the area served by the fan has been cleaned and vacuumed of all debris and dust which might enter the syst em. D. Any equipment, duct or piping systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above “MILL” or “SHOP” conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer’s satisfaction. E. Initial fill of traps 1. Provide initial water seal fill for all waste p -traps, condensate traps, or similar traps. 3.4 PROTECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS A. All temporary water connections shall be made with an approved back flow preventer. B. All hose bibbs shall have, as a minimum, a vacuum breaker to prevent back flow. 3.5 PROTECTION OF SYSTE MS SERVING OCCUPIED SPACES A. Where work is being performed in occupied spaces, or occupancy is to be phased in with ongoing construction contractor shall prevent contamination of all systems serving the occupants including but not limited to: February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 11 1. Supply or retur n air a. Systems shall be capped or provided with adequate particulate and gas phase filtration to prevent dust, chemical, or biological contamination. Particulate filters shall be as a minimum equivalent to those specified for the completed system. 2. Domestic Water a. Isolate sterilized portions from non -sterilized portions. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Division 1 sections of the specifications regarding requirements of Record Drawings and Operation and maintenance Manual submittal and systems demonstration. 1. Demonstrat e that each system operates properly. 2. Explain the operation of each system to the Owner’s Representative. Explain use of O&M manual in operating and maintaining systems. B. Date and time of demonstration will be determined by the Owner. 3.7 CONCRETE A. All poured i n place concrete shall be furnished under the Architectural Divisions of these Specifications. B. This Contractor shall coordinate all requirements for concrete surrounding buried duct. Ducts shall be tied down to concrete deadman and completely surrounded w ith 3" of concrete. 3.8 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING FOR MECHANICAL DIVISION A. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. (MD is Mechanical Division - ED is Electr ical Division). ITEM FURNISHED UNDER SET IN PLACE OR MOUNTED UNDER WIRED AND CONNECTED UNDER 1. Equipment Motors and Thermal overloads, resistance heaters (c ). MD MD ED 2. Motor Controllers; magnetic starters, reduced voltage starters and overload relays. M D ED(a ) ED 3. Disconnect switches, fused or unfused, H.P. rated switches, thermal overload switches and fuses, manual operating switches. ED(a ) ED(a ) ED 4. Push -button stations, pilot lights, multi -speed switches, float switches, thermostats, control relays, ti me clocks, control transformers, control panels, motor valves, damper motors, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches and interlocks. MD MD(b ) MD(b ) February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 12 5. Contactors, 120V control circuit outlets for control panels and for boiler controls and for fire protection co ntrols and smoke detectors. ED ED ED 6. Duct Detectors, fire/smoke dampers, elevator vent dampers. MD MD ED(c ) a. If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, wiring and connections only by ED. b. If float switches, line thermostats, P.E. switches, time switc hes, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, they shall be furnished by the Mechanical Division, but shall be set in place and connected under the Electrical Division, except that where such items are no integral part of the mechanical equipment, o r directly attached to ducts, piping, etc., they shall be set in place under the Mechanical Division and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor they shall be furnished, set in place and wired under th e Mechanical Division. Control devices carrying full load current furnished by Mechanical and wired by Electrical shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown on drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price. 1) Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system by ED; all control function wiring by MD. c. The above list does not attempt to include all components. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. B. Connec tions to all controls directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment shall be made with flexible connectors. 3.9 IDENTIFICATION A. Piping 1. All exposed piping, except piping in finished spaces, shall be identified in conformance with "Scheme for the Id entification of Piping Systems", ANSI A13. All markers must be in compliance with respect to (1) proper letter color, (2) proper letter size, (3) correct background color, and (4) proper marker length. 2. Directional flow arrows shall be applied adjacent to each pipe mark. 3. For pipes under 3/4" O.D. color coded (as described above) identification tags shall be securely fastened at all required locations. Tags shall be 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. 4. All piping shall be marked at the following locations: (1) next to each valve and fitting, (2) at each branch and riser take -off, (3) at each wall, ceiling or floor penetration, (4) on pipes that lead to and from underground areas, and (5) every 30 feet on horizontal and vertical pipe runs. Identification of all piping systems shall conform to the designations in the mechanical legend on the drawings. B. Valves 1. All valves shall be identified by color coded (to match piping system identification) tags which indicate both service and number. Tags shall be 1 -1/2 inch in diam eter and have 1/4 inch high letters to indicate service and 7/16 inch high numbers. Tags shall be securely fastened to all valves. Service designations shall match abbreviations for piping systems given in mechanical legend on the drawings. Valve charts shall be provided and shall include (1) valve identification number, (2) service, (3) location, and (4) purpose. Valve charts shall be mounted in metal frame with glass enclosure. One valve chart shall be secured on a wall in the boiler room. A second valve chart shall be delivered to the Owner's authorized representative. Also a copy of the valve chart shall be included in the Operations and Maintenance Instructions. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 13 C. All electric controls, starters, air handling units, pumps, and all other equipment a nd controls shall be identified by stencil or permanent labeling. D. Care shall be taken not to paint over nameplates. 3.10 FLUSHING, CLEANING & STERILIZING A. Intent: It is the intent of this specification to require that all work, including the inside of equipment , be left in a clean condition with all dust, grease, and construction debris removed. 1. Piping and connection equipment to be left free of sediments, core sand, grease, etc. 2. Clean all exposed surfaces of piping, ducts and hangers, etc., sufficiently to rece ive paint. Vacuum ducts as required for debris removal. 3. Air systems shall not be operated without filters. Replace the filters or clean permanent type filters just prior to substantial completion. All air systems shall be furnished with one additional se t of filters for owner replacement. 4. Remove and clean all screens, interceptors, strainers, etc., in piping systems just prior to substantial completion. 5. Clean and wipe dry all plumbing fixtures, exposed valves, faucets, and piping, etc . that are exposed ju st prior to substantial completion. Clean all equipment and fixtures per manufacturer’s specifications to avoid scratching finished surfaces. Leave all plumbing fixtures ready to use. 6. Clean interior and exterior of all air handling equipment of all const ruction debris. Clean exterior of all exposed ductwork just prior to substantial completion. 7. Thoroughly clean all equipment room floors after completion of equipment, pipe and duct cleaning. A condition of final acceptance will be the cleanliness of all exposed systems, equipment, and equipment rooms. B. Before final connections are made in the piping systems, blow out all piping with air and then wash out with cleaning compounds. Then flush the system to remove of all foreign materials. Furnish all tempor ary connections, valves, etc, required for this purpose. Clean the boiler and chiller by the same procedure. C. Clean the boiler by the same procedure. D. After flushing, sterilize the domestic water system in accordance with Section 221116 . 3.11 TESTING A. Test all d rain and waste lines with standing water test of twelve feet of head, held long enough to visually inspect each joint. B. Test all heating water, snowmelt, and reduced pressure domestic water piping at 150 psig hydrostatic pressure before connecting to unit. C. Test all domestic water service lines to PRV and radiant panel (embedded in concrete) and anti -freeze piping at 200 psig hydro static pressure. D. Test all ai r and gas piping under 60 psig air pressure. E. All tests must be done to the satisfaction of the local authorities having jurisdiction, before covering. F. All hydrostatic tests to be held for a minimum of six hours without loss of pressure. Air tests to be held for a minimum of two hours without loss of pressure. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 14 G. Furnish all instruments required for testing. 3.12 PLACING IN OPERATION A. Clean all ducts, pipes, equipment, controls etc., of plaster and other foreign debris. B. Before final acceptance, clean or replace all strainers, oil or grease all bearings and clean out all drains. Clean and recoat all permanent filte rs, replace throwaway type filters with new filters. C. The systems shall be put into operation. 1. The Contractor shall verify that all controls are set to meet operating conditions specified. a. Example: Boiler operating and limit controls set where specified. 2. T he contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment are operable and that all sequences of control are being met. 3. The contractor to adjust settings through 1st year as required by MECHANICAL ENGINEER. 3.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Books of Ope rating and Maintenance Instructions shall be personally delivered to the Owner's authorized representative and the Owner instructed as to their use and the equipment involved. (Provide two books for each building). Also, instruct the Owner's personnel on each valve and the valve chart previously specified. B. The book shall contain, but not be limited to, the following general items: 1. Spare parts lists for each piece of equipment. 2. Operating manuals for each piece of equipment and control. 3. Lubrication charts s howing type of lubricant and application methods and frequencies. 4. Filter cleaning or replacement schedule. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 5. Preventive maintenance schedule for checking all items such as belt drive, safety controls and oil and ref rigerant charges. Cleaning schedule of all strainers, traps, coils, tubes, tower pans, sprays, etc. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 6. Water treatment recommendations for boiler, tower, etc. 7. Normal operating instructions including a sequence of ope ration for each system. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 8. Instructions as to procedure to be followed for any emergency situation, such as alarms or safety items being tripped. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 9. Instructions on who to call f or service during guarantee period. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 10. Record of equipment installed (copy of each shop drawing as set forth under "Shop Drawing" Paragraph). 11. All warranties provided by Manufacturers on their equipment that run longer than the one year guarantee by the Contractor. C. Books shall be arranged in sequence to match the equipment schedules included in the specifications. D. Approval will not be given for final payment until the tests, balancing and operating instruction portions have been completed. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 15 3.14 EQUIPMENT START -UP A. All boiler s and packaged equipment shall be started by the manufacturer or under the manufacturer's supervision. Start -up data shall be recorded in logs. Copies of start -up logs shall be forwarded to Mechanical En gineer and included in Operation and Maintenance manuals. END OF SECTION February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Gen eral Provisions 15010 - 16 February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Basic Material and Method 15050 - 1 SECTION 15 050 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are a part of these specifications. Consult them for further instructions and be governed by the requirements ther eunder. 1.2 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or r epaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Architect or Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All equipment shall have housings suitable for the location installed. C. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defe cts, and free of damage and corrosion, unless specifically directed to reuse any existing materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. Furnish ball bearing, squirrel cage, open drip proof, normal starting torque motor of the horsepower and current characteristics specified with thermal overload protection and dustproof and leak proof bearing rings and constructed for use at the altitude where the work is to be located. Motors guaranteed to operate continuously at full load with temperature rise in any part not to exceed NEM A Standards. Motors shall be commercially, dynamically balanced and tested at the factory before shipment and selected for quiet operation. Provide motors for V -belt drives with a cast iron and steel base, with slide rail and adjustable screw device and belt guard. Line up motors and drives and place motors and equipment on foundations ready for operation. B. Motors rated 1 horsepower or greater shall be Department of Energy (DOE) approved “energy efficient”, meeting the requirements of EP Act 92, and sha ll meet NEMA 12 -6C full load efficiencies. Where not commercially available, power factors shall be capacitor corrected by equipment manufacturer to at least 90 percent under rated load conditions. 2.2 STARTERS A. Provide starters of current and capacity ratings to serve the motor intended. All three phase starters to have over current protection on all three legs. On three phase starters furnish a Phase Monitor Control Relay, Time Mark B258B, or A258B, three -phase monitor control relay to open on phase reversa l, phase failure or phase under voltage. Phase monitor control relay shall be mounted and wired in the starter enclosure by this contractor. Furnish switches and green running pilot light in starter cover. If pilot lights are specified on control panel, individual starter lights will not be required. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Basic Material and Method 15050 - 2 B. Provide integral transformer and 120 -volt control circuit on all starters, which are furnished with control circuits. C. Size thermal overload relays for approximately 115% of full load motor current. Switch an d fuse units will not be acceptable unless specifically indicated. 2.3 BELT DRIVES A. Provide belt drives with cast iron sheaves, either companion driven sheaves (except for two groove) or fixed pitch sheaves. If fixed pitch sheaves are used, the MECHANICAL ENG INEER reserves the right to direct speed changes be made, if in his opinion, these are warranted after final balancing. Fixed pitch sheaves shall be bushed type. Provide two groove adjustable drive sheaves with a key for holding pitch adjustment. Use st andard FHP, A, B, C and D Sections. FHP belt drives may be used for motors less than three horsepower. B. Provide matched belts sized for 150% of motor schedule horsepower. When A -B sheaves are used, use B Section belts only. 2.4 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide painted, steel access doors with key lock suitable for the surface in which they are installed and satisfactory to the Architect. Recessed style to accept plaster finish, recessed type to accept acoustical tile, flush panel for drywall or flanged flushed panel fo r remodeling. In installed in fire rated surface, access door to carry proper rating. 2.5 ALTITUDE RATINGS A. Except as otherwise noted, all equipment capacities, air qualities, etc., are adjusted ratings for the elevation of this project as noted on drawings. Manufacturer’s ratings shall be adjusted to provide net ratings shown. 2.6 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS A. For steel piping, construct with stainless steel inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. B. For copper piping, construct with bronze inner hose and braided exteri or sleeve. C. Use connectors suitable for minimum 125 psi WSP and 450º and 200 psi WOG and 250ºF. D. Construct spool pieces to exact size for insertion of flexible connection. 2.7 FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL A. General: 1. Products to be used shall have been tested in accordan ce with ASTM E 814 -88 and be listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. B. Bare Piping: 1. Model FD 150 or CP -25. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Basic Material and Method 15050 - 3 C. Insulated Piping: 1. Model: CP -25 or FS -195, Intumescent. 2. “No -sag” or “self -leveling” as required. D. Plastic Piping: 1. Model: CP -25 or FS -195 Intumescen t. 2. “No -Sag” or “Self -leveling” as required. E. Accessories: 1. Provide Fasteners, Restricting collars, backing materials, and protective coatings as required to comply with the UL system listing. F. Manufacturers: 1. 3M or G.E. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FREEZE PROTECTION A. Proximity o f any equipment component or fluid piping to potential damage from freezing sources shall be avoided wherever possible. Drawings are diagrammatic. Make location adjustments, add insulation and/or control devices and/or heat sources as necessary to prevent or minimize freeze damage potential. The Architect/Engineer will nei ther guarantee nor be responsible for any consequences of freezing. 3.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Equipment 1. Erect all floor mounted equipment on 4" high concrete pads over the complete floor ar ea of the equipment. 2. Mount supply and return centrifugal fans, cabinet fans and air handling units (where called for on plans) on inertia base with a weight equal to not less than 1 -1/2 times the combined weight of the fan and motor. Where centrifugal fan is used, mount fan and motor on common steel base. 3. Support each air or factory assembled air handing unit and fan by Mason Industries or equivalent spring type vibration isolators, as follows: EQUIPMENT GROUND SUPPORTED SLAB OR BASEMENT MASON 20' FLOOR S PAN POSSIBLE FLOOR DEFL 0.67" MASON Engr. Spec Min Static Defl. (in.) Engr. Spec. Min Static Defl. (in.) a. Factory Assembled H & V Units 1) Suspended Units a) Thru 5 HP D 1.0 D 1.0 b. Blowers 1) Centrifugal Blowers A -J .035 B -J 2) Tubular Centrifugal and Axial Fans February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Basic Material and Method 15050 - 4 a) Suspended Units D Refer to Guide. 4. All mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. 5. Equipment with operating weight diff erent than the installed weight shall be mounted on spring mountings as directed in Mason Engineeri ng Spec. B, but a housing shall be provided that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. Limit stops shall be out of contract during normal operation. B. Piping 1. Domestic Hot and Cold Water, Heating Water and Waste Pi ping a. Domestic hot and cold water piping one inch diameter and smaller shall be isolated with the Acousto -Plumb System of orange and blue pipe isolators, holders, and guide, as manufactured by LSP/Specialty Products Company, Tel (800) 854 -3215. b. Isolate wast e piping and domestic hot and cold water piping larger than one inch in diameter with Trisolator system of pipe isolators as manufactured by Elmdor/Stoneman, Tel. (818) 968 -8699. c. Do not allow the piping, pipe connectors, pipe hangers or valve to directly t ouch the structure, studs, gypsum board, or other pipes. d. Copper waste piping must be completely wrapped with Lowry’s acoustical pipe wrap. The wrap is manufactured by Harry A. Lowry, Tel. (818) 768 -4661. C. Flexible Connections 1. Where ductwork or piping is co nnected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment that may transmit vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. Connections sha ll be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible material shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections f or range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. 3.3 PIPE HANGERS A. General 1. Provide pipe supports for vertical lines at each floor. Provide pipe hangers to support the systems without sagging, including hangers at each offset or change in direction, at ends of bran ches over five feet in length and at the following maximum spacing: Pipe Size Hanger Spacing Hanger Rod Diameter(Minimum) a. 3/4" and smaller 6 ft. 3/8" b. 1" 8 ft. 3/8" c. 1 -1/4" through 2" 10 ft. 3/8" d. 2 -1/2" through 3" 10 ft. 1/2" e. 4" through 5" 10 ft. 1/2" f. 6" through 10" 2 ft 5/8" g. 12" and larger 12 ft. 7/8" h. Cast iron no hub 5 ft. and at joints B. Individual Hangers 1. Individual hangers for non -insulated copper piping and insulated copper heating piping and insulated domestic hot water and circulating water p iping shall be copper plated, adjustable swivel February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Basic Material and Method 15050 - 5 ring hangers similar to Auto Grip 500, Kin -Line felt lined 440 -F or Michigan Hanger Company Series 102 with polyvinyl coating, with insulation over hangers. 2. Individual hangers for insulated cold piping (steel or copper) shall be zinc plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip Figure 800, Kin Line 400 Series, Michigan Series 103. Hangers shall support pipe with hangers over the insulation. The system shall be complete with Auto Grip or Michig an Zinc plated steel shield, Pipe Shields or Kin -Line 460 zinc plated steel shield. Provide insulation insert of high density polyethylene foam, calcium silicate, high density glass fiber or expanded perlite divided in longitudinal half sections and cover ed with fire resistant vapor barrier jacket. High density inserts are not required in plumbing walls behind plumbing fixtures. 3. Individual hangers for all insulated or non -insulated steel piping shall be zinc plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip Figure 400, Kin -Line 400 Series, Michigan Series 100. Hangers shall support pipe with insulation over hangers. C. Trapeze Hangers 1. Parallel runs of piping may be supported on trapeze hangers. Trapeze shall be Unistrut P -1000 -3 or Kin Line 211, 3 71 or 372 equivalent by Elcen or Kindorff. System shall be selected to support five times the weight of thrust applied without failure. 2. All non -insulated steel pipe and insulated steel heating water pipe shall have standard pipe straps at each support. 3. Al l non -insulated copper pipe, insulated copper domestic hot and re -circulating water piping and insulated copper heating piping shall rest on neoprene sleeves and have standard pipe straps at each support. 4. All cold insulated pipe (steel or copper) shall res t on Fee and Mason Figure 81 or equivalent by unistrut, or Kin -Line, galvanized steel insulation shield or 360 o galvanized steel shield. Provide insulation insert of high density polyethylene foam, calcium silicate, high density fiber glass or expanded pe rlite divided in longitudinal half sections and covered with fire resistant vapor barrier jacket. Provide pipe strap over insulation at each support. High density inserts are not required in plumbing walls behind plumbing fixtures. 5. See this Section, 3.02 , Vibration Isolation for special hangers. 3.4 CONTROL VALVE PIPING A. If the control valve size is smaller than the pipe size marked on the drawing, the reduction in size pertains to the valve only. Gate valves, globe valves, and strainers on either side of the automatic valve shall be a minimum of the pipe size marked on the drawings. 3.5 PUMP CONNECTIONS A. Where the suction or discharge of any pump unit is smaller than the pipe size noted on the drawings, all strainers, valves, flexible connections, expansion joint s, etc., shall be a minimum of the pipe size noted on the drawings. 3.6 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish an access door for each pipe chase for each floor. This includes both toilet plumbing chases and pipe riser chases. Access doors assembly to be minimum size of 16" x 16". B. Also, furnish access doors in all non -removable ceilings and in partitions and walls where necessary to maintain access to plumbing cleanouts, shock absorbers, fire dampers, manual dampers, valves and other mechanical devices requiring access. Size these as required for access. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Basic Material and Method 15050 - 6 C. Provide all access doors to the General Contractor for him to construct into the building. D. Submit shop drawing indicating the locations of all access doors. 3.7 WELDING A. Provide all welding in accordance with the welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or other approved procedure conforming to the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. Only welders who have been fully qualified under the specified proc edure shall be employed. 3.8 PIPE DEPTHS A. Interior pipe below slabs shall be a minimum of 4 inches below slab and shall not be in contact with concrete at any point. Minimum exterior cover over water piping, unless otherwise shown or required by code, shall be 8 feet above the top of the pipe. Area drains shall have maximum cover possible consistent with finished landscape and acceptable flow lines. Gas piping shall have minimum of 3 foot cover with warning tape 12" above pipe. Sanitary waste and storm drain lines shall have 3 foot cover minimum. 3.9 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Full -length pipe in longest lengths possible shall be used. All threads shall be right hand, pipe standard, clean cut, full depth and tapering. Install piping so as to permit complete drainin g. Provide drains at all low points. All interior soil, waste and condensate lines shall have uniform pitch in the direction of flow of not less than 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise noted. Ream out all pipe ends, turn on ends and rattle before instal ling. 3.10 DUCTS A. Construct straight and smooth with neatly finished joints, airtight and free from vibration. Internal ends of slip joints shall be made in the direction of flow. Changes in duct dimensions and shape shall be gradual and uniform. Curved elbo ws, unless otherwise noted, to have centerline radius of at least 1 -1/2 times the duct width. Air turns shall be installed in all abrupt elbows and shall be arranged to permit air to make turns without appreciable turbulence and to remain quiet when the s ystem is in operation. Construction of ducts shall be per the details and recommendations of the latest edition of the ASHRAE handbook and U.M.C. The most stringent requirement governs in conflicts. "Duct mate" joint method may be utilized provided all portions of seam/joint materials are provided by "duct mate" and installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's standards. 3.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Where ductwork or piping is connected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment that may transm it vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. Connections shall be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible m aterial shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections for range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Basic Material and Method 15050 - 7 3.12 CLEANING A. Intent: It is the intent of this specification to require that all work, including the inside of equipment, be left in a clean condition with all dust, grease, and construction debris removed. Refer also to Division 01 specification s . B. Piping and connected equipment to be left fr ee of sediments, core sand, grease, etc. C. Clean all exposed surfaces of piping, ducts and hangers, etc., sufficiently to receive paint. Vacuum ducts as required for debris removal. D. Air systems shall not be operated without filters. Replace the filters or c lean permanent type filters just prior to substantial completion. All air systems with disposable filters shall be furnished with one additional set of boxed filters for owner replacement. E. Remove and clean all screens, interceptors, strainers, etc., in pi ping systems just prior to substantial completion. F. Clean and wipe dry all plumbing fixtures, exposed valves, faucets, and piping, etc. that are exposed just prior to substantial completion. Clean all equipment and fixtures per manufacturer's specification s to avoid scratching finished surfaces. Leave all plumbing fixtures ready to use. G. Clean interior and exterior of all air handling equipment of all construction debris. Clean exterior of all exposed ductwork just prior to substantial completion. H. Thorough ly clean all equipment room floors after completion of equipment, pipe and duct cleaning. A condition of final acceptance will be the cleanliness of all exposed systems, equipment, and equipment rooms. 3.13 EXPANSION COMPENSATION A. Examine piping layout and pro vide anchors or expansion joints required to adequately protect system. B. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. C. Accomplish structural work and provide equipment required to control expansion and co ntraction of piping, loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, and provide corrugated bellows type expansion joints where required. 3.14 SLEEVES, CUTTING, PATCHING A. Major openings in the structure for mechanical work may be shown on the structural drawings; these w ill be done under the Architectural Division of these Specifications. It is the Contractor's responsibility to set necessary sleeves and boxes for pipe and ducts (not shown on the structural drawings) before erection of structure. This Contractor is resp onsible for the correct size and location of all openings including coordination with the other trades. All sleeves shall be large enough to allow for continuous insulation to pass through the sleeve. B. In mechanical equipment room floors, all pipe sleeves to the Schedule 40 pipe and shall extend 1" above finished floor. In mechanical equipment room floors, all ducts shall have a 4" high concrete curb around duct. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Basic Material and Method 15050 - 8 C. Caulk all pipes and ducts leaving equipment rooms between sleeve and duct or pipe, 1" deep on each side of wall, floor, or roof. Caulk bare pipes and ducts with lead wool. Caulk insulated pipes with 1 - or 2 -part polysulphide caulking compound. D. In the same manner as described in Paragraph C above, caulk all other pipes and ducts throughout the bui lding which penetrate walls and floors and roofs this includes pipe and ducts to rooftop units. E. All pipes which may be in view shall be finished with chrome floor, wall and ceiling plates, except in equipment rooms. 3.15 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation, tren ching, bedding of pipe, placement and cover, backfilling, etc., in conjunction with work under this Division, shall be per requirements of Division 2 and the additional requirements specified herein. B. Trenches: Slope bottoms uniformly to drain. Trench bot toms to be firm, free from large rocks or boulders, or shall have concrete cradles placed to support pip ing. Cradles to bear on undisturbed soil. C. Cast iron: Place on firm trench bottom shaped to accept hubs. Both hubs and pipe shall have uniform firm b earing. Place a minimum of 12 inches of loose rock -free material over pipe. D. Other piping, conduits, culverts: Place on firm trench bottom and backfill per Division 2 , 22, and 23 or embed per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Expansion: Place pipe fittings and thrust blocks per manufacturer's recommendations and/or project specifications. F. Excavation: Provide all excavating and backfilling required by the work in this division, all as required by the rules of the State Department of Labor and Equipment. Al l pipe must be laid on solid earth with bellholes provided for hubs. After pipe is laid in trench, it shall be tested, insulated if specified, and backfilled. G. Compaction 1. Backfill by hand around the pipe and the first 12" over the top of the pipe. Moisten , backfill, and tamp in 8" layers (maximum) with air motor or gasoline driven tamper to consolidate to 90% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content. (Puddling will not be allowed). 2. Trenches under road surfacing shall have the upper 6" layer, forming the subgrade for pavement compacted to at least 95% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content for rigid pavements. 3. Density of backfill shall be determined by the requirements of the A.A.S.H.O. in Pamphlet 57. Standard M ethod T -99 -57. 4. Where requirements of the general conditions are more stringent than the above, the general condition requirements shall be met. H. Pavement 1. Accomplish cutting of flexible pavement so that the remaining exposed edge of the pavement conforms ver tically and horizontally to a straight line. The width of the section of pavement removed shall be of necessary width for the proper laying of pipe, but shall not exceed 36". Waste material resulting from the above operations will be disposed of in suita ble waste areas. Repair pavement to satisfaction of the authorities having jurisdiction. I. Shoring February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Basic Material and Method 15050 - 9 1. Provide all shoring required to perform the excavation and to protect the project, employees, and public. J. Surveying 1. Establish all lines, grades and elevations . Stake out the work and furnish all lines, stakes (1" x 2" x 10"), and all hubs or hardwood pegs (1" x 1" x 6") to stake out the lines and structures to line and grade. K. Maintaining and Protecting Traffic 1. Maintain sufficient barricades, warning signals an d lights to protect pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Provide and maintain such detours as may be necessary to keep traffic moving during construction. L. Surface Drainage and Ground Water 1. Surface drainage shall be diverted away from open excavation and tren ching before commencement of work at the location. Surface water on ground water seepage, which enters or accumulates in the trenches, shall be removed by pumping or subdraining, and the subgrade or pipe bed restored to original bearing value and conditio ns. M. Any settling of backfilled trenches which may occur during the warranty period shall be repaired without expense to the Owner, including the complete restoration of all damaged property. 3.16 FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS A. Furnish and install as indicated on the plans and/or as may be necessary for the proper installation of all equipment furnished under this Division, all foundations, bases and supports. Contractor shall be responsible for their correct location and sizes to fit all equipment. Shim and grout be tween the equipment and its base to align and level. Bolt equipment inertia bases, vibration isolators, and supports to prevent relative movement. B. Furnish all hangers, anchors, sway bracing, guides, etc., for the various piping and duct systems as require d for their proper installation. 3.17 FIRE STOPPING A. Install firestopping materials in accordance with their UL and ASTM tested methods. B. Coordinate required annular space with size of pipe and sleeve. C. Requirements for specific systems: 1. Cold piping: Includes c hilled water, domestic water, storm water and refrigerant: Insulation and vapor barrier shall be continued through wall and firestopping for “insulated piping” shall be provided. 2. Hot piping to 250°F includes domestic hot water, steam to 15 psig and heating hot water: The Contractor has the option of continuing the insulation through the penetration and providing firestopping for “insulated piping”, or stopping the insulation on either side of the penetration and using firestopping for uninsulated piping”. 3. High temperature piping, over 250°F or over 15 psig steam: Contractor shall stop insulation and provide firestopping for “high temperature piping”. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Basic Material and Method 15050 - 10 END OF SECTION March 2, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks 15100 - 1 SECTION 15100 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Listed double-wall vents . B. See Division 23 Section "Draft Control Devices" for induced-draft and mechanical fans and for motorized and barometric dampers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Special gas vents. B. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LISTED SPECIAL GAS VENTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to co mpliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Heat-Fab, Inc. 2. Metal-Fab, Inc. 3. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate. 4. Schebler B. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 1738 and rated for 480 deg F continuously, with positive or negative fl ue pressure complying with NFPA 211. C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1 -inch airspace. D. Inner Shell: ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C stainless steel. E. Outer Jacket: Stainless steel. F. Accessories: Tees, elbows, incr easers, draft-hood connectors, te rminations, adjustable roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thim bles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly. 1. Termination: Exit cone with drai n section incorporated into riser. March 2, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks 15100 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Listed Special Gas Vents: Condensing gas appliances. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent. B. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all accessories, without exceed ing appliance loading. C. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point piped to nearest drain. D. Lap joints in direction of flow. E. Clean breechings internally, during and after inst allation, to remove dust and debris. Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth and apply touchup finish to match factory or shop finish. F. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechi ngs, chimneys, and stacks that are not completed or connected to equipment. END OF SECTION February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Hydronic Piping 15113 -1 SECTION 15 113 HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special -duty valves, an d specialties for the following: 1. Hot -water heating piping. 2. Condensate -drain piping. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature: 1. Hot -Water Heating Piping: 150 psig at 200 deg F . 2. Condensate -Drain Piping: 150 deg F . 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the followin g: 1. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated -orifice balancing valves and automatic flow -control valves. 2. Air control devices. 3. Hydronic specialties. B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints a nd loops. C. Field quality -control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessel s shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Hydronic Piping 15113 -2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TU BE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn -Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L . B. Annealed -Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K . C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV. D. Wrought -Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fo llowing: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. c. Victaulic Company. E. Wrought -Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. 2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. B. Cast -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" A rticle. C. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. D. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. E. Cast -Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. F. Wrought Cast - and Forged -Steel Flange s and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast -iron and cast -bronze flanges. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Hydronic Piping 15113 -3 b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water -flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper -phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg -1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requiremen ts, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. e. Matco -Norca, Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a divis ion of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Ra ting: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F . c. End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. 2.5 VALVES A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Sect ion "General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." B. Automatic Temperature -Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." C. Bronze, Calibrated -Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Hydronic Piping 15113 -4 e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. g. Tour & Andersson ; available through Victaulic Company. 2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Inte gral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig . 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F . D. Cast -Iron or Steel, Calibrated -O rifice, Balancing Valves: 1. M anufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. 2. Body: Cast -iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Stem Seals: EPDM O -rings. 5. Disc: Glass and carbon -filled PTFE. 6. Seat: PTFE. 7. End Connections: Flange d or grooved. 8. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 10. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig . 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F . E. Diaphragm -Operated, Pressure -Reducing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Ind ustries, Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon -filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O -rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Low inlet -pressure check valve. 8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Hydronic Piping 15113 -5 9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. F. Diaphragm -Operate d Safety Valves: 1. Manufactur ers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc . f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon -filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O -rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber. 8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and fie ld adjustable. G. Automatic Flow -Control Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls. 2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper pro of, self cleaning, and removable. 4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass -alloy ball valve. 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. 7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations. 8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig . 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F . 2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide produc ts by one of the following: 1. Amtrol, Inc. 2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 4. Taco. B. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Hydronic Piping 15113 -6 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 . 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 . 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig . 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F . C. Expansion Tanks: 1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125 -psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank fo r gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 2. Air -Control Tank Fitting: Cast -iron body, copper -plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and stainles s -steel ball check, 100 -gal. unit only; sized for compression -tank diameter. Provide tank fittings for 125 -psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. 3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous inte rnal parts; 125 -psig working pressure and 240 deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system. 4. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4 -inch - diameter gage glass, and slotted -metal glass guard. D. In -Line Air Separators: 1. Tank: One -piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to maximize air separation. 2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig . 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F . 2.7 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Y -Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainle ss -steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig . B. Stainless -Steel Bellow, Flexible Connector s: 1. Body: Stainless -steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire -reinforcing protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4 -inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psi g . 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F . C. Expansion fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping." February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Hydronic Piping 15113 -7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Hot -water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 1. Type L , drawn -temper copper tubing, wrought -copper fittings, and soldered brazed pressu re -seal joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable -iron fittings; cast -iron flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints. B. Hot -water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought -steel fitt ings and wrought -cast or forged -steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. C. Hot -Water Heating Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Type K , annealed -temper copper tubing, wrought -copper fittings, and brazed joints. U se the fewest possible joints. D. Condensate -Drain Piping: Type M , drawn -temper copper tubing, wrought -copper fittings, and soldered joints or Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent -welded joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shutoff -duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at sup ply connection to each piece of equipment. B. Install calibrated -orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main. C. Install calibrated -orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal. D. Install check va lves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. E. Install safety valves at hot -water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip -pan elbow on safety -valve outlet and pipe wit hout valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. F. Install pressure -reducing valves at makeup -water connection to regulate system fill pressure. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and ca lculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Hydronic Piping 15113 -8 E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using [mechanically formed] tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up -feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated . S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure -reducing valve, solenoid valve, in -line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Mat ch size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 . T. Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping." U. Identif y piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Slee ve Seals for HVAC Piping." W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Sup ports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Hydronic Piping 15113 -9 supports. B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP -58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 f eet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper -clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe. C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4 : Maximum span, 7 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch . 2. NPS 1 : Maximum span, 7 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch . 3. NPS 1 -1/2 : Maximum span, 9 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 4. NPS 2 : Maximum span, 10 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 5. NPS 2 -1/2 : Maximum span, 11 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 6. NPS 3 : Maximum span, 12 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 7. NPS 4 : Maximum span, 14 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch . D. Install hangers for drawn -temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4 : Maximum span, 5 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch . 2. NPS 1 : Maximum span, 6 feet ; minimum rod si ze, 1/4 inch . 3. NPS 1 -1/2 : Maximum span, 8 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 4. NPS 2 : Maximum span, 8 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 5. NPS 2 -1/2 : Maximum span, 9 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 6. NPS 3 : Maximum span, 10 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . E. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points. F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10 -foot intervals between floors. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assemb ly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water -flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead -free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: C onstruct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper -phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Hydronic Piping 15113 -10 F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full an d clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service applicati on. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. H. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cu t or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved -end fittings and rigid, grooved -end -pipe couplings. I. Mechanically Formed, Copper -Tube -Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer -recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints. 3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat -transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. C. Install in -line air separators in pump suction. Install drain v alve on air separators NPS 2 and larger. D. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Inst all tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. 1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose. 2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry wei ght of tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building components and structural members. 3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipm ent connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pr essure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Hydronic Piping 15113 -11 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary re straints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure s hall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one -third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expa nding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed a t low points for complete draining of test liquid. 3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pr essure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" v alue in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing componen ts, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. C. Perform the following before operating the system: 1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure -reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. END OF SECTION February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Metal Ducts 15113 -1 SECTION 15 113 METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Round ducts and fittings. 2. Sheet metal materials. 3. Sealants and gaskets. 4. Hangers and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers . 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: D uct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMAC NA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static -pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manuf acturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static -pressure class, February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Metal Ducts 15113 -2 applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and othe r provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate accord ing to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3 -6, "Conical Tee s," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements : Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller ma rks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. G alvanized Coating Designation: G60 . 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black - and galvanized -steel shape s and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches . 2.3 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface -burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame -spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke -deve loped index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Two -Part Tape Sealing System: 1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exotherm ically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width:3 inches . 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static -Pressure Class: 10 -inch wg , positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F . 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Metal Ducts 15113 -3 10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambe rs." C. Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Stati c -Pressure Class: 10 -inch wg , positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with AS TM C 920. 1. General: Single -component, acid -curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and produ ct requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer wi th polyisobutylene plasticizer. F. Round Duct Joint O -Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1 -inch wg and shall be rated for 10 -inch wg static -pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O -ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double -lipped, EPDM O -ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory -fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. 2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium -plated steel rods and nuts. B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5 -1 , "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5 -2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." C. Steel Cables for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium -plated steel assemblies wi th brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic -locking and clamping device. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Metal Ducts 15113 -4 E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. F. Trapeze and Riser Suppo rts: 1. Supports for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized -steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless -Steel Ducts: Stainless -steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air -handling equipment sizing and for othe r design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory - or shop -fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicat ed, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a cle arance of 1 inch , plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non -fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls a nd are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1 -1/2 inches . K. Where ducts pass through fire -rat ed interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign ma terials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." 3.2 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static -pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Metal Ducts 15113 -5 B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply -Air Ducts: Seal Class C . 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return -Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2 -Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C . 6. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 7. Unconditioned Space, Return -Air Ducts: Seal Class C . 8. Conditioned Space, Sup ply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2 -Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C. 9. Conditioned Spa ce, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C . 10. Conditioned Space, Return -Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, pow der -actuated fasteners, or structural -steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder -actuated concrete fasteners after conc rete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for standard -weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for l ightweight -aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5 -1 , "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5 -2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inch es of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building m aterials where used. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Constru ction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.5 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new duct system(s) before test ing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static -pressure class if required February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Metal Ducts 15113 -6 for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined d uct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3 -micron -size (or larger) pa rticles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scr olls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air -handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filt ers and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return -air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply -air ducts, dampers, actuators, an d turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contami nants from building. 2. Use vacuum -collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debr is adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous -glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous -glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning mater ials; comb and straighten fins. 6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash -down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA -registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. 3.6 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.7 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Exhaust Ducts: February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Metal Ducts 15113 -7 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. Pressure Class: Negative 1 -inch wg . b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C if negative pressure, and C if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. B. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 2. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum. C. Elbow Configuration: 1. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal an d Flexible," Figure 3 -4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius -to -Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3 -1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90 -degree change of dir ection have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius -to -diameter ratio and three segments for 90 -degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1 500 fpm : 1.0 radius -to -diameter ratio and four segments for 90 -degree elbow. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Dia meter: Standing seam . D. Branch Configuration: 1. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3 -6, "Conical Tees." Sad dle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90 -degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm : Conical tap. END OF SECTION February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Natural -Gas Piping 15123 -1 SECTION 15 123 FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubi ng joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Operating -Pressure Ratings: 1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unl ess otherwise indicated. B. Natural -Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less . C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural -gas piping and equipment, including comprehen sive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Pro duct Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural -gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For natural -gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, includ ing analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Welding certificates. E. Field quality -control reports. F. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Su pport Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Natural -Gas Piping 15123 -2 D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. Electric al Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought -Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Cl ass 150, malleable iron with brass -to -iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. 4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory -applied, three -layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE. a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat -shrink PE sleeves. B. Annealed -Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type K . 1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, and streamlined pattern. 2. Flare Fittings: Comp ly with ASME B16.26 and SAE J513. a. Copper fittings with long nuts. b. Metal -to -metal compression seal without gasket. c. Dryseal threads complying with ASME B1.20.3. 3. Protective Coating for Underground Tubing: Fact ory -applied, extruded PE a minimum of 0.022 inch thick. 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. Indoor, Fixed -Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable -Appliance Fle xible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Operating -Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig . 5. End Fittings: Zinc -coated steel. 6. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 7. Maximu m Length: 72 inches . B. Quick -Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41. 1. Copper -alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operat ed with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Natural -Gas Piping 15123 -3 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable. C. Y -Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connect ions: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless -steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig . D. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast - or malleable -iron inc reaser fitting with corrosion -resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross -sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded -end connection. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. B. Welding Filler Metals : Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited. 2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shuto ff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services. B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig . 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1 -1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body. C. One -Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP -110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome -plated brass. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Natural -Gas Piping 15123 -4 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable -stem packing threaded ends. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig . 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be lis ted and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. D. Two -Piece, Full -Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP -110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apo llo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome -plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded -body packnut design with adjustable -stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule " Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig . 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG" indicated on valv e body. E. Two -Piece, Regular -Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP -110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrom e -plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE. 6. Packing: Threaded -body packnut design with adjustable -stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig . 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP -78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requir ements, provide products by one of the February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Natural -Gas Piping 15123 -5 following: a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" a nd "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig . 7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed a nd labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. 2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion -resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: T hreaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller. B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Fisher Control Valves an d Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. e. Invensys. f. Maxitrol Company. g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die -cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc -plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Pla te: Zinc -plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet -stabilized, mineral -filled nylon. 8. Single -port, self -contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 p ercent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory - or field -installed, stainless -steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig . C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Natural -Gas Piping 15123 -6 following: a. Canadian Meter Company Inc. b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div. c. Harper Wyman Co. d. Maxitrol Company. e. SCP, Inc. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die -cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc -plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc -plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet -stabilized, mineral -filled nylon. 7. Factory -Applied Finish: Minimum three -layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities havin g jurisdiction. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig . 2.6 DIELECTRIC UNIONS A. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. e. Matco -Norca, Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F . c. End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and th readed ferrous. 2.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid - and alkali -resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, contin uously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural -gas piping. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Natural -Gas Piping 15123 -7 B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated u nless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unl ess specifically indicated otherwise. F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. G. Locate valves for easy access. H. Install natural -gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps. I. Install piping free of sags and bends. J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in . L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas -fired appliances and equipment for roughing -in requirements. M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service -meter outlets. Locate where accessi ble to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap. N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view. P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pi pe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. S. Do not use natural -gas piping as grounding electrode. T. Install strainer on inlet of each line -pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve. U. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Natural -Gas Piping 15123 -8 V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping ." W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. I nstall manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless -steel tubing or copper connector. B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing. 3.3 PIPING JO INT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. D. Welded Joints: 1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators. 2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory -applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. F. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten. G. PE Piping Heat -Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain -End Pipe and Socke t Fittings: Use socket fusion. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Natural -Gas Piping 15123 -9 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 2. NPS 1 -1/4 : Maximum span, 108 inches ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 3. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2 : Maximum span, 108 inches ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements. B. Install natural -gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit pow ering the appliance according to NFPA 70. C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances. D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas -fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment. E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance. 3.6 LABELING AND IDENT IFYING A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification. B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inc hes below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Natural -gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. Annealed -temper copper tube with wrought -copper fittings and brazed flared joints. 2. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints. B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following: February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Natural -Gas Piping 15123 -10 1. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints. 3.9 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and sm aller at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. One -piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two -piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. One -piece, bronze ball valve with br onze trim. 2. Two -piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance sh all be one of the following: 1. One -piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two -piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. END OF SECTION February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Radiant -Heating Hydronic Piping 15316 - 1 SECTION 15 316 RADIANT -HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes radiant heating piping, includin g pipes, fittings, and piping specialties. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of radiant heating pipe, fitting, manifold, specialty, and control. B. Shop Drawings: Show piping layout and details drawn to scale, including valves, manifolds, con trols, and support assemblies, and their attachments to building structure. C. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEX PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. REHAU. 2. Uponor Wirsbo Co. B. Pipe Material: PEX plastic according to ASTM F 876. C. Oxygen Barrier: Limit oxygen diffusion through the tube to maximum 0.10 mg per cu. m/da y at 104 deg F according to DIN 4726. D. Fittings: ASTM F 1807, metal insert and copper crimp rings. E. Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 100 psig and 180 deg F . 2.2 DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLDS A. Manifold: Minimum NPS 1 , copper. B. Main Shutoff Valves: 1. Factory installed on supply and return connections. 2. Two -piece body. 3. Body: Brass or bronze. 4. Ball: Chrome -plated bronze. 5. Seals: PTFE. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Radiant -Heating Hydronic Piping 15316 - 2 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig . 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F . C. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Key furnished with valve, or screwdriver bit. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 . 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1 /8 . 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig . 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F . D. Balancing Valves: 1. Body: Plastic or bronze, ball or plug, or globe cartridge type. 2. Ball or Plug: Brass or stainless steel. 3. Globe Cartridg e and Washer: Brass with EPDM composition washer. 4. Seat: PTFE. 5. Visual Flow Indicator: Flowmeter with visible indication in a clear plastic cap at top of valve. 6. Differential Pressure Gage Con nections: Integral seals for portable meter to measure loss across calibrated orifice. 7. Handle Style: Lever or knob, with memory stop to retain set position if used for shutoff. 8. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig . 9. Maximum Operating Temperatu re: 250 deg F . E. Zone Control Valves: 1. Body: Plastic or bronze, ball or plug, or globe cartridge type. 2. Ball or Plug: Brass or stainless steel. 3. Globe Cartridge and Washer: Brass with EPDM composition washer. 4. Seat: PTFE. 5. Actuator: Replaceable electric motor. 6. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig . 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F . F. Thermometers: 1. Mount on supply and return connections. 2. Case: Dry type, metal or plastic, 2 -inch di ameter. 3. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element. 4. Movement: Mechanical, connecting element and pointer. 5. Dial: Satin -faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer: Black metal. 7. Window: Plast ic. 8. Connector: Rigid, back type. 9. Thermal System: Liquid - or mercury -filled bulb in copper -plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. G. Mounting Brackets: Copper, or plastic or copper -clad steel, where in contact with manifold. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Radiant -Heating Hydronic Piping 15316 - 3 2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Cable Ties: 1. Fungus -inert, self -extinguishing, 1 -pi ece, self -locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 2. Minimum Width: 1/8 inch . 3. Tensile Strength: 20 lb , minimum. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Install the following types of radiant heating piping for the applications described: 1. Piping in Exterior Pavement: PEX . 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangem ent of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop or Coordination Drawings. B. Install radiant heating piping continuous from the manifold through the heated panel and back to the manifold without piping joints in heated panels. C. Connect radiant piping to manifold in a reverse -return arrangement. D. Do not bend pipes in radii smaller than manufacturer's minimum bend radius dimensions. E. Install manifolds in accessible locations, or install access panels to provide maintenance access as required in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." F. Refer to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" for pipes and connections to hydronic systems and for glycol -solution fill requirements. G. Fire - and Smoke -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at p ipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." H. Piping in Exterior Pavement: 1. Secure piping in concrete floors by attaching pipes to reinforcement using cable ties. 2. Space cable ties a maximum of 18 inches o.c., and at center of turns or bends. 3. Maintain 3 -inch minimum cover. 4. Install a sleeve of 3/8 -inch - thick, foam -type insulation or PE pipe around tubing and extending for a minimum of 10 inches on each side of slab joints to protect the tubing passing through expansion or control joints. Anchor sleeve to slab form at control joints to pr ovide maximum clearance for saw cut. 5. Maintain minimum 40 -psig pressure in piping during concrete placement and continue for 24 hours after placement. I. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and ensure integrity of p iping and as approved by Architect. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Radiant -Heating Hydronic Piping 15316 - 4 J. After system balancing has been completed, mark balancing valves to permanently indicate final position. K. Perform the following adjustments before operating the system: 1. Open valves to fully open position. 2. Chec k operation of zone control valves. 3. Set temperature controls so all zones call for full flow. 4. Purge air from piping. L. After the concrete or plaster heating panel has cured as recommended by concrete supplier, operate radiant heating system as follo ws: 1. Start system heating at a maximum of 10 deg F above the ambient radiant panel temperature, and increase 10 deg F each following day until design temperature is achieved. 2. For freeze protection, operate at a maximum of 60 deg F supply -water temperature. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare radiant heating piping for testing as follows: 1. Open all isolation valves and close bypass valves. 2. Open and verify operation of zone control valves. 3. Flush with clean water, a nd clean strainers. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Subject piping to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure but not more than 100 psig . Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning radiant heating piping components that do not pass tests, and retest as specified above. D. Prepare a written report of testing. END OF SECTION Febraury 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Storm Drainage Piping 15413 - 1 SECTION 15 413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. B. Related Section: 1. Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage Piping" for storm drainage piping outside the building. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF -drain" for plastic dra in piping and "NSF -sewer" for plastic sewer piping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locati ons, and pipe sizes. 2.2 HUBLESS, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. CISPI, Hubless -Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ANACO -Husky. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. F ernco Inc. d. Matco -Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. Febraury 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Storm Drainage Piping 15413 - 2 g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless -steel corrugated shield with stainless -steel bands an d tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. B. Heavy -Duty, Hubless -Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ANACO -Husky. b. Clamp -All Corp. c. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. d. MIFAB, Inc. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Stant. g. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. 3. Description: Stainless -steel shield with stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. B. Copper Drai nage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast -copper fittings or ASME B16.29, wrought -copper, solder -joint fittings. C. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder -joint end. 1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full -face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. 2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water -flushable flux. 2.4 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40. B. Cellular -Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40. C. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. Febraury 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Storm Drainage Piping 15413 - 3 2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. B. Cellular -Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40. C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 p ipe. D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 2.6 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: 1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include en d connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. 2. Fitting -Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified -piping -system fitting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in c oncealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohi bited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Febraury 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Storm Drainage Piping 15413 - 4 H. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducer s if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. I. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unb roken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each join t as completed. J. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Storm -Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow. K. Install cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. L. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." M. Install underground ABS and PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. N. Pl umbing Specialties: 1. Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where bu ilding storm drains connect to building storm sewers in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force -main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 2 2 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 3. Install drains in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." R. Install escutcheons for piping pe netrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." Febraury 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Storm Drainage Piping 15413 - 5 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join hub -and -spigot, cast -iron soil piping with gasketed joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. B. Join hubless, cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless -piping coupling joints. C. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828 procedure. Use ASTM B 813, water -flushable, lead -free flux and ASTM B 32, lead -free -alloy solder. D. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, t ype, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow. 1. Horizontal Pipi ng: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialtie s." 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Install carbon -steel pipe hangers for hor izontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install carbon -steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 3. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis h angers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet : MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. B. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch minimum rods. E. Install hangers for cast -iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2 : 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3 : 60 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 : 60 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8 : 60 inches with 3/4 -inch rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12 : 60 inches with 7/8 -inch rod. 6. Spacing for 10 -foot pipe lengths may be increased to 10 feet . Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches . Febraury 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Storm Drainage Piping 15413 - 6 F. Install supports for vertical cast -iron soil piping every 15 feet . G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 -1/4 : 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2 : 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 2 -1/2 : 108 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 4. NPS 3 to NPS 5 : 10 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. 5. NPS 6 : 10 feet with 5/8 -inch rod. 6. NPS 8 : 10 feet with 3/4 -inch rod. H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet . I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and man ufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties. 1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 2. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests s pecified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdic tion to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. Febraury 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Facility Storm Drainage Piping 15413 - 7 C. Reports: P repare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, a ltered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping[, except outside leaders,] on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 -foot head of water . From 15 minutes before inspection starts until completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncom pleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following : 1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy -duty, hubless -piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid -wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent -cemented jo ints. 4. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 5. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. END OF SECTION February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 15423 - 1 SECTION 15 423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cleanouts. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANOUT S A. Floor Cleanouts : 1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cast -iron soil pipe with cast -iron ferrule cleanouts. 2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Type: Cast -iron soil pipe with cast -iron ferrule. 4. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron . 5. Clamping Device: Not required. 6. Outlet Connection: Threaded. 7. Closure: Cast -iron plug. 8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set -screws or other device. 9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Polished bronze. 10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 11. Top -Loading Classification: Heavy Duty . 12. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast -iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. B. Test Tees : 1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M and ASTM A 74, ASTM A 888, or CISPI 301, for cleanout test tees. 2. Size : Same as connected drainage piping. 3. Body Material: Hub -and -spigot, cast -iron soil -pipe T -branch or hubless, cast -iron soil -pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 4. Closure Plug: Counte rsunk, brass . 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or no t more than one size smaller than cleanout size. C. Wall Cleanouts : February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 15423 - 2 1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 3. Body Material: Hubless, cast -iron soil -pipe test tee as required to ma tch connected piping. 4. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome -plated brass or stainless -steel cover plate with screw. 7. Wall Access: Round, nickel -bronze, copper -alloy, or stainless -steel wall -installation frame and cover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following instructions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4 . Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degre es. 3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet <Insert dimension> for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. B. For floor cleanouts for pip ing below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. D. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor. E. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangeme nt of piping, fittings, and specialties. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 1 SECTION 15 700 PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for boiler breeching, duct, equipment, and pipe, including the following: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Calcium silicate. b. Cellular glass. c. Flexible elastomeric. d. Mineral fi ber. 2. Adhesives. 3. Mastics. 4. Lagging adhesives. 5. Sealants. 6. Factory -applied jackets. 7. Field -applied jackets. 8. Tapes. 9. Securements. 10. Corner angles. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Section "Hydronic Distribution" for loose -fill pipe insulation in underground piping outsi de the building. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ASJ: All -service jacket. B. FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper. C. FSP: Foil, scrim, polyethylene. D. PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride. E. SSL: Self -sealing lap. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal c onductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), and flame spread and smoke developed indices. B. Shop Drawings: Show details for the following: February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 2 1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of ins ulation. 5. Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Application of field -applied jackets. 7. Application at linkages of control devices. 8. Field application for each equipment type. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualific ations: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire -test -response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials a nd adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdo ors: Flame -spread index of 75 or less, and smoke -developed index of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and max imum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field -appli ed jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles b elow introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Calcium Silicate: 1. Products: a. Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo -12 Gold. 2. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat -, curved -, and grooved -block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrou s calcium silicate with a non -asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. 3. Flat -, curved -, and grooved -block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non -asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. 4. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. Cell -U -Foam Corporation; Ultra -CUF. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K. 2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special -Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory -Applied ASJ -SSL: Comply with AST M C 552, Type II, Class 2. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 4 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. H. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge - or expanded -rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Pro ducts: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul -Sheet 1800 and Insul -Tube 180. I. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 12 90. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All -Servi ce Duct Wrap. J. Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory -applied FSK jacket. For equipment app lications, provide insulation without factory -applied jacket. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. c. Johns Manville; 800 S eries Spin -Glas. d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series. K. High -Temperature, Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 61 2, Type III, without factory -applied jacket. 1. Products: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. b. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin -Glas. c. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations. d. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board. e. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW. f. Th ermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt. L. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro -Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 5 d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley -K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. 2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory -applied ASJ -SSL. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. M. Mineral -Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory -applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties simil ar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft . or more. Thermal conductivity (k -value) at 75 deg F is 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article . 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation mat erials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium -silicate -based adhesive with a service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F . 1. Produ cts: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -97. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81 -27/81 -93. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 290. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 760. C. Cellular -Glass Adhesive: Solvent -based resin adhesive , with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F . 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81 -33. D. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Pro ducts: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. E. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2, Grade A. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 6 1. Products: a. Childers Prod ucts, Division of ITW; CP -82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S -90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. F. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25.ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Com ply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S -90/80. d. Ma rathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25. G. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns -Manville; Zeston Perma -Weld, CEEL -TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. c. P.I.C. Plastics , Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear. e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive. 2.4 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL -C -19565C, Type II. B. Vapor -Barrier Mast ic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -50. d. Marathon Indus tries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -40. f. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43 -mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F . 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 p ercent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. C. Vapor -Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -30. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -35 . February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 7 c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -25. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 501. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -10. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35 -mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F . 4. Solids Content: A STM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. D. Vapor -Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Encacel. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fu ller Company; 60 -95/60 -96. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 570. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -70. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30 -mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F . 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 3 3 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -10. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Compan y; 35 -00. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -05/15. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -50. f. Vimasco Corporation; WC -1/WC -5. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625 -inch dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperat ure Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F . 4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Description: Comply with MIL -A -3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81 -42. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 11 -30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 136. 2. Fire -resistant, water -based lagging adhesi ve and coating for use indoors to adhere fire -resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F . February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 8 4. Color: White. 2.6 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Joint Sealants for Cellular -Glass, Phenolic -Fo am, and Polyisocyanurate Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -45. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 44 -05. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. f. Vimasco C orporation; 750. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F . 5. Color: White or gray. B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Seal ants: 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76 -8. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95 -44. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 44 -05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire - and water -resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F . 5. Color: Aluminum. C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: a. Chil ders Products, Division of ITW; CP -76. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire - and water -resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F . 5. Color: White. 2.7 FACTOR Y -APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory -applied jackets on various applications. When factory -applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft -paper, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing ; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 9 2. ASJ -SSL: ASJ with self -sealing, pressure -sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraf t -paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4 -mil -thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented b arrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -spread index of 5 and a smoke -developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 6. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6 -mil -thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -spread index of 5 and a smoke -developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 7. PVDC -SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self -sealing, pressure -sen sitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. a. Products: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 8. Vinyl Jacket: UL -rated white vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested acc ording to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 2.8 FIELD -APPLIED JACKETS A. Field -applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil -face, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraf t -paper backing. C. PVC Jacket: High -impact -resistant, UV -resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354 -C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field -applied jacket schedules. 1. Prod ucts: a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory -fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45 - and 90 -degree, short - and long -radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil -pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P -trap and supply covers for lavatories. 5. Factory -fabricated tank heads and tank side panels. D. Metal Jacket: 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 10 b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul -Mate. 2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 500 5, Temper H -14. a. Factory cut and rolled to size. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field -applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1 -mil -thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Application s: 3 -mil -thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. e. Factory -Fabricated Fitting Covers: 1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2 -piece or gore, 45 - and 90 -degree, short - and long -radius elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory -fabricated fitting covers are not available. E. Underground Direct -Buried Jacket: 125 -mil - thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane consisting of a rubberized bitum inous resin reinforced with a woven -glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil. 1. Products: a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittwrap. b. Polyguard; Insulrap No Torch 125. F. Self -Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60 -mil -thick, laminated vapor barrier and w aterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum -foil facing. 1. Products: a. Polyguard; Alumaguard 60. G. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4 -mil -thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -spread index of 5 and a smoke -developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Pro ducts: a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film. H. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6 -mil -thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -spread index of 5 and a smoke -developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 11 I. PVDC -SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self -sealing, pressure -sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a remo vable protective strip. 2.9 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 1 04 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches . 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils . 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile S trength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil -face, vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1. Products: a. Avery Den nison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches . 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils . 4. Adhesion: 90 ounc es force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor -retarder tape matching field -applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitab le for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. b. Compac Corp.; 130. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. 2. Width: 2 inches . 3. Thic kness: 6 mils . 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 12 D. Aluminum -Foil Tape: Vapor -retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. 2. Width: 2 inches . 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils . 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inc in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 l bf/inch in width. E. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor -retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches . 3. Film Thickness: 4 mils . 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils . 5. Elong ation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width. F. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor -retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches . 3. Film Th ickness: 6 mils . 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils . 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width. 2.10 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Products: a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 13 1. Capacitor -Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper - or zinc -coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor -discharge welding, 0.106 -in ch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP -1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS. 2. Cupped -Head, Capacitor -Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper - or zinc -coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor -discharge welding, 0.106 -inch -diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1 -1/2 -inch galvanized carbon -steel washer. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP -1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwe st Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP. 3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self -locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul -Hangers, Series T. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square . c. Spindle: Copper - or zinc -coated, low carbon steel], fully annealed, 0.106 -inch -diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated ca pability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holdin g insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self -locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: 1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers. b. Baseplate: Perforated, n ylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106 -inch -diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2 -1/2 inches . d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 14 5. Self -Sticking -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, secu rely in position indicated when self -locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul -Hangers, Series TSA. 2) GEMCO; Press and Peel. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick. b. Baseplate: Galvanized c arbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper - or zinc -coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 -inch -diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive -backed base with a peel -off protective cover. 6. Insu lation -Retaining Washers: Self -locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch -thick, galvanized -steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC -15 0. 2) GEMCO; R -150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA -150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. b. Protect ends with capped self -locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. 7. Nonmetal Insulation -Retaining W ashers: Self -locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch -thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. a. Manufacturers: 1) GEMCO. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. C. Staples: Outward -cli nching insulation staples, nominal 3/4 -inch -wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.062 -inch soft -annealed, stainless steel. 1. Manufacturers: a. ACS Industries, Inc. b. C & F Wire. c. Childers Products. d. PABCO Metals Corporation. e. RPR Products, Inc. 2.11 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch , PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354 -C. White or color -coded to match adjacent surface. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 15 B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch , aluminum according to ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H -14. C. Stainless -Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch , stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240, Type 304 or 316. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive in sulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 seri es stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F . Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating tempe rature range. 2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coord inate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that applies to insulation. 3.2 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. In stall insulation with least number of joints practical. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 16 J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously thr ough hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment t o structure with vapor -barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory -applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3 -inch -wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1 -1/2 inches . Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self -sealing lap. Staple laps with outward c linching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor -barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated , apply vapor -barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at opera ting conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patche s similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration -control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.3 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 17 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applicat ions requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roo f flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Below -Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Abovegroun d Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches . 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire -rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches . 2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section "Through -Pen etration Firestop Systems." 3.4 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverag e of tank and vessel surfaces. 2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints. 3. Protect exposed corners with secure d corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self -sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels as follows: a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME -labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that is compatible with service temperature and with substrate. c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor -pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segme nts to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 18 g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers w ith tape matching insulation facing. 5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless -steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials. 6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and wh ere insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdl e around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable ra dially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands. 7. Stagger jo ints between insulation layers at least 3 inches 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around man holes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates. 10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation. B. Insulation Installation on Pumps: 1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulati on. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6 -inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8 -inch -diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secur e the box sections together using a latching mechanism. 2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least .040 inch thick. 3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket m aterial to form a vapor barrier. 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor -retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insul ate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and ir regular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as u sed for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same materi al, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve s tuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 19 than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of o versized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and c oat with a mastic. Install vapor -barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric -reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well -shaped contour. For services no t specified to receive a field -applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC t ape. Label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removab le insulation covers as necessary. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insula tion. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in plac e with stainless -steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two -part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. W hen covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless -steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjace nt pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field -applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Boiler Breechings and Ducts: 1. Secure single -layer insulation with stainless -steel bands at 12 -inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation material. 2. Install 2 -layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches . Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12 -inch intervals. Secu re outer layer with stainless -steel bands at 12 -inch intervals. 3. On exposed applications without metal jacket, finish insulation surface with a skim coat of mineral -fiber, hydraulic -setting cement. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive a nd press on one layer of glass cloth. Overlap edges at least 1 inch . Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 20 B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure single -layer ins ulation with stainless -steel bands at 12 -inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Install 2 -layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches . Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12 -inch interva ls. Secure outer layer with stainless -steel bands at 12 -inch intervals. 3. Apply a skim coat of mineral -fiber, hydraulic -setting cement to insulation surface. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch . Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cu t sections of block insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Finish flange insulation same as pipe insulation. D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pip e insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or ba nds. 3. Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation. E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve opera tion without disturbing insulation. 2. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3. Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation. 3.7 CELLULAR -GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipe s and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor -barrier mastic and joint s ealant. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c . 4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 21 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular -glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch , and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Insta ll preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular -glass ins ulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular -glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve opera tion without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.8 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate open ings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twi ce the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to fla nges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers ma nufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation with out disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow pass age of air to surface being insulated. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 22 3.9 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation mater ials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor -barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids betwe en inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch , and seal joints w ith flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pip e insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 perce nt coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor -discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sid es with dimensions larger than 18 inches , place pins 16 inches o.c. each way and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizont al, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 23 f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inch es (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) outward -clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory - or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18 -foot (5.5 -m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z -shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulatio n thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows an d transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surfa ce with 6 -inch -wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. A pply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capac itor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor -discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal cent erline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches , space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold in sulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend para llel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) outward -clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of facto ry - or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18 -foot (5.5 -m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z -shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 24 Cover insulation face and surface to be ins ulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as po ssible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6 -inch -w ide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.10 FIELD -APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where glass -cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory -applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2 -inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062 -inch -thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacke t with 1 -1/2 -inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3 -inch -wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor -retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor -barrier mastic. C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1 -inch o verlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2 -inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof s ealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless -steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pi pe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket. 2. Wrap factory -presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1 -1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint. 3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply ad hesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond. 4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33 -1/2 inches or less. The 33 -1/2 -inch -circumference limit allows for 2 -inch - February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 25 overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Us e adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint. 5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1 -1/4 circumferences to a void damage to tape edges. 3.11 FINISHES A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass -Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting Sections. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex -emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhes ive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or st ainless -steel jackets. 3.12 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Insulate indoor and outdoo r equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated. C. Heat -exchanger (water -to -water for heating service) insulation shall be the following: 1. Calcium Silicate: 3 inches thick. 2. Mineral -Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 2 -lb/cu. ft. nominal density. D. H eating -hot -water expansion/compression tank insulation shall be the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. E. Heating -hot -water air -separator insulation shall be the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick. 3.13 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Ac ceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Fire -suppression piping. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 26 2. Below -grade piping. 3. Chrome -plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic C old Water: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick. c. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. 2. NPS 1 -1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. B. Heating -Hot -Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below: 1. NPS 1 -1/2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cell ular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 -1/2 inch thick. 2. NPS 2 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. b. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I Pipe and Tank Insulation: 2 inc hes thick. 3.15 OUTDOOR, UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Loose -fill insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution Sections. B. Sanitary Waste Piping, All Sizes, Where Heat Tracing Is Installed: Cellular glass, 2 inches thick. C. Heating -Hot -Water Supply and Return, All Sizes, 200 Deg F and below: Cellular glass, 3 inches thick. 3.16 INDOOR, FIELD -APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory -applied jacket, install the field -appli ed jacket over the factory -applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches : 1. PVC: 20 mils thick. D. Equipment, E xposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches : 1. Aluminum, Smooth with 1 -1/4 -Inch Deep Corrugations: 0.032 inch thick. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 27 E. Piping, Concealed: 1. None. F. Piping, Exposed: 1. PVC: 20 mils thick. 3.17 OUTDOOR, FIELD -APPLIED JACKET SCHED ULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory -applied jacket, install the field -applied jacket over the factory -applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Equipme nt, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches : 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with Z -Shaped Locking Seam: 0.016 inch thick. D. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches : 1. Alum inum, Stucco Embossed with 1 -1/4 -Inch -Deep Corrugations: 0.032 inch thick. E. Piping, Exposed: 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with Z -Shaped Locking Seam: 0.016 inch thick. 3.18 UNDERGROUND, FIELD -INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET A. For underground direct -buried piping applic ations, install water proof, continuous jacket for underground direct -buried piping applications . END OF SECTION February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Plumbing Insul a tion 15700 - 28 February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 15900 -1 SECTION 15 900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory -wired controls. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each control device indicated. B. Sh op Drawings: 1. Schematic flow diagrams. 2. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. 3. Details of control panel faces. 4. Damper schedule. 5. Valve schedule. 6. DDC System Hardware: Wiring diagrams, schematic floor plans, and schematic control diagram s. 7. Control System Software: Schematic diagrams, written descriptions, and points list. C. Software and firmware operational documentation. D. Field quality -control test reports. E. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Com ponents, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCOPE A. The system shall be built as an expans ion of the existing Village snowmelt control system with no noticeable difference in quality, operation or function. The control system shall be integrated into the existing system software to allow the Owner to maintain system and manipulate set points s ame as the existing system. A r emote system interface panel will be provided in the FRTB mechanical room. Provide any necessary reprogramming of the existing controls system to accommodate this expansion February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 15900 -2 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles w here titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.3 CONTROL SYSTEM A. The original system designer and installer was Long Building Solutions. A differing designer/installer must submit a n equivalent or compatible system that is approved by the Owner in writing. Controls contractor is responsible for confirming compatibility of their system with exist ing. B. Manufacturers Allowed to bid without prior approval required: 1. Alerton 2. Automated Logic 3. Delta 4. Honeywell 5. Invensys 6. Johnson Controls 7. Reliable 8. Siemens 9. Trane C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems. D. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final c ontrol elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token -passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator works tation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point -and -click graphics. 2.4 DDC EQUIPMENT A. Contractor option to utilize existing, and/or provide addit ional, front end interface. All controls, both new and existing, shall be controllable via a single operator interface/workstation. B. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random -access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to ope rator workstation. 2. Stand -alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing. e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and controlled February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 15900 -3 environment. C. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmab le, nonvolatile, read -only memory; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 2. Stand -alone mode control functions operate rega rdless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. 3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation. D. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers. 1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on -off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low -voltage (0 - to 10 -V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on -off or pulsed low -voltage signal, selectable for normally open or normally closed operation[ with three -position (on -off -auto) override switches and status lights]. 5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0 - to 10 -V dc) or current (4 to 20 mA). 6. Tri -State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three -point, floating -type electronic actuators. 7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs. E. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current -limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full -wave rectifier type with the following: 1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100 -mic.sec. response time for 50 percent load changes. 3. Built -in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent overload for a t least 3 seconds without failure. F. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following: 1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanosecon ds. 3. Minimum transverse -mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common -mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz. 2.5 UNITARY CONTROLLERS A. Unitized, capable of stand -alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, dat abase, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application. 1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 15900 -4 processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with rib bon cable; memory with bios; and 72 -hour battery backup. 2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform scheduling with real -ti me clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. 3. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F . 2.6 ANALOG CONTROLLERS A. Step Controllers: 6 - or 10 -stage type, with heavy -duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor. B. Electric, Outdoor -Reset Controllers: Remote -bulb or bimetal rod -and -tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg F , and single - or double -pole contacts. C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone -bridge -amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote -resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportiona l band and authority. 1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer. D. Fan -Speed Controllers: Solid -state model providing field -adjustable proportional control of motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on -off action below minimum fan speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference. 2.7 T IME CLOCKS A. Manufacturers: 1. ATC -Diversified Electronics. 2. Grasslin Controls Corporation. 3. Paragon Electric Co., Inc. 4. Precision Multiple Controls, Inc. 5. SSAC Inc.; ABB USA. 6. TCS/Basys Controls. 7. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc. 8. Time Mark Corporation. B. Seven -day, programming -switch timer with synchronous -timing motor and seven -day dial; continuously charged, nickel -cadmium -battery -driven, eight -hour, power -failure carryover; multiple -switch trippers; minimum of two and maxim um of eight signals per day with two normally open and two normally closed output contacts. C. Solid -state, programmable time control with 8 separate programs each with up to 100 on -off operations; 1 -second resolution; lithium battery backup; keyboard inte rface and manual override; individual on -off -auto switches for each program; 365 -day calendar with 20 programmable holidays; choice of fail -safe operation for each program; system fault alarm; and communications package allowing networking of time controls and programming from PC. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 15900 -5 2.8 ELECTRONIC SENSORS A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required. B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters: 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. Eb tron, Inc. c. Heat -Timer Corporation. d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. e. MAMAC Systems, Inc. f. RDF Corporation. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded -pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where p rone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.. 6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless -steel socket with minimum insertion length of 2 -1/2 inches . 7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. a. Set -Point Adjustment: Concealed. b. Set -Point Indication: Concealed. c. Thermometer: Concealed. d. Orientation: Horizontal. 8. Outside -Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless -steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws. C. RTDs and Transmitters: 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. MAMAC Systems, Inc. c. RDF Corporation. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minu s 0.2 percent at calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded -pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 18 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required. 6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertio n length of 2 -1/2 inches . 7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. a. Set -Point Adjustment: Concealed. b. Set -Point Indication: Concealed. c. Thermometer: Concealed. d. Orientation: Horizontal. 8. Outside -Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 15900 -6 9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless -steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws. D. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers: 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. General Eastern Instruments. c. MAMAC Systems, Inc. d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp. e. TCS/Basys Controls. f. Vaisala. 2. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless -steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150 -psig operating pressure ; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 3. Water Differential -Pressure Transducers: Stainless -steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150 -psig operating pressure and tested to 300 -psig ; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 4. Differenti al -Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot -duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential. 5. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas or liquid service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA. E. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 1. Set -Point Adjustment: Concealed. 2. Set -Point Indication: Concealed. 3. Thermometer: Concealed. 4. Orientation: Horizontal. 2.9 STATUS SENSORS A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential -pres sure switch with pilot -duty rating and with adjustable range of 0 - to 5 -inch wg . B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential -pressure switch with pilot -duty rating and with adjustable pressure -differential range of 8 to 60 psig , piped across pump. C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current -sensing fixed - or split -core transformers with self -powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current. D. Current Switches: Sel f -powered, solid -state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements. E. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2 - to 10 -V dc, feedback signal. F. Water -Flow Switc hes: Bellows -actuated mercury or snap -acting type with pilot -duty rating, stainless -steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. I.T.M. Instrum ents Inc. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 15900 -7 2.10 THERMOSTATS A. Manufacturers: 1. Erie Controls. 2. Danfoss Inc.; Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Div. 3. Heat -Timer Corporation. 4. Sauter Controls Corporation. 5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc. 6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc. B. Electric, solid -state, microcomputer -based room thermostat with remote sensor. 1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. 3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day. 4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days. 5. Short -cycle protection. 6. Programming based on every day of week. 7. Selection features include degree F or degre e C display, 12 - or 24 -hour clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, and fan on -auto. 8. Battery replacement without program loss. 9. Thermostat display features include the following: a. Time of day. b. Actual room temperature. c. Programmed temperature. d. Programmed time. e. Duration of timed override. f. Day of week. g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on." C. Low -Voltage, On -Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24 -V, bimetal -operated, mercury -switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set -point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set -point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential. D. Line -Voltage, On -Off Thermostats: Bimetal -actuated, open contact or bellows -actuated, enclosed, sna p -switch or equivalent solid -state type, with heat anticipator; listed for electrical rating; with concealed set -point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set -point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential. 1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors. 2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on -off -auto. E. Remote -Bulb Thermostats: On -off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in ambient temperature; with copper c apillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb. 2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields. 3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single - or multiple -unit elements, extend ed to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported. 4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of instrument. 5. On -Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by application. 6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 15900 -8 F. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 1. Set -Point Adjustment: Concealed. 2. Set -Point Indication: Concealed. 3. Thermometer: Concealed. 4. Orientation: Horizontal. G. Room thermostat accessories include the following: 1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exter ior walls. 2. Thermostat Guards: Locking; heavy -duty, transparent plastic; mounted on separate base. 3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws. 4. Set -Point Adjustment: 1/2 -inch - diameter, adjustment knob. H. Immersion Thermostat: Remote -bulb or bimetal rod -and -tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point. I. Heating/Cooling Valve -Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow, with molded -rubber diaphr agm, remote -bulb liquid -filled element, direct and reverse acting at minimum shutoff pressure of 25 psig , and cast housing with position indicator and adjusting knob. 2.11 ACTUATORS A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve pow er to provide smooth modulating action or two -position action. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2. Permanent Split -Capacitor or Shaded -Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sea led. Equip spring -return motors with integral spiral -spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer. 3. Nonspring -Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2 -1/2 : Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf . 4. Spring -Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2 -1/2 : Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf . 5. Nonspring -Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf . 6. Spring -Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf . B. Electronic Actuators: Direct -coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full -stroke cycles at rated torque. 1. Manufacturers: a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. 2. Valves: Size for t orque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. 3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows: a. Parallel -Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch -lb/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed -Blade Damper with Ed ge Seals: 5 inch -lb/sq. ft. of damper. c. Parallel -Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch -lb/sq. ft of damper. d. Opposed -Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch -lb/sq. ft. of damper. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 15900 -9 e. Dampers with 2 - to 3 -Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm : Increase running torque by 1.5. f. Dampers with 3 - to 4 -Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm : Increase running torque by 2.0. 4. Coupling: V -bolt and V -shaped, toothed cradle. 5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation -sensing circuitry. 6. Fail -Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring -return mechanism. Provide ext ernal, manual gear release on nonspring -return actuators. 7. Power Requirements (Two -Position Spring Return): 24 -V ac. 8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24 -V ac or 8 W at 24 -V dc. 9. Proportional Signal: 2 - to 10 -V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2 - to 10 -V dc position feedback signal. 10. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F . 11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F . 12. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed. 2.12 CONTROL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div. 2. Erie Controls. 3. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. 4. Magnatrol Valve Corporation. 5. Neles -Jamesbury. 6. Parke r Hannifin Corporation; Skinner Valve Division. 7. Pneuline Controls. 8. Sauter Controls Corporation. B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unle ss otherwise indicated. C. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repacka ble under pressure. 2. NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug -type disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc. 3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless -steel or brass seats. a. Single -Seate d Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom. b. Double -Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plugs on top and bottom. 4. Sizing: 3 -psig maximum pressure drop a t design flow rate or the following: a. Two Position: Line size. b. Two -Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure drop, whichever is more. c. Three -Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value s pecified above. 5. Flow Characteristics: Two -way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three -way valves shall have linear characteristics. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 15900 -10 6. Close -Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum c lose -off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two -way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total system (pump) head. D. Butterfly Valves: 200 -psig , 150 -psig maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast -iron or ASTM A 536 ductile -iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless -steel stem, field -replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 1. Body Style: Wafer. 2. Disc Type: Nickel -plated ductile iron. 3. Sizing : 1 -psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. E. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends. 1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psi g and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Sizing: 3 -psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff head. 3. Flow Characteri stics: Two -way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three -way valves shall have linear characteristics. F. Self -Contained Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends. 1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Thermostatic Operator: Wax -filled integral sensor with integral adjustable dial. 2.13 DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div. 3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.). 4. United Enertech Corp. 5. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Dampers: AMCA -rated, parallel -blade design; 0.108 -inch - minimum thick, galvanized -steel or 0.125 -inch - m inimum thick, extruded -aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064 -inch - thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches . 1. Secure blades to 1/2 -inch - diameter, zinc -plated axles using zinc -plated hardware, with oil -impregnated sintered bronze blade bearings, blade -linkage hardware of zinc -plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring -stainless -steel blade bearings, and thrust bearing s at each end of every blade. 2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F . 3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed -cell neoprene. 4. Edge Seals, Low -Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals and spring -loaded stainless -steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 -inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf ; when tested according to AMCA 500D. February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 15900 -11 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor. 1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. B. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations: 1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated. C. Install automatic dampers accor ding to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures. E. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Sectio n "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." F. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." G. Install duct volume -control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying ai r ducts. H. Install electronic and fiber -optic cables according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. 2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway. 4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 6. Number -code or color -code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables. 7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. D. Connect manual -reset limit controls independent of manual -control switch positions. Automatic duct February 15 , 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 15900 -12 heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers. E. Connect hand -off -auto selector switches t o override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field -assembled components and equipment in stallation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units t o confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test e ach system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks. C. DDC Verification: 1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, and other applicable considerations. 4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 5. Check pressure instrument s, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self -contained pressure regulators. 6. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 7. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 8. Check air -operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided. 9. Check DDC system as follows: a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable. b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system. c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges. D. Repl ace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and con trols. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Electrical General Provisions 016010 - 1 SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Contract Documents are part of these specifications. Consult them further for inst ructions and be governed by the requirements contained there under. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. Work shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and materials, unless otherwise specified, necessary for the insta llation of complete electrical systems as required by the specifications and as shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work shall also include the completion of those details of electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems. B. Work Not Included 1. Certain labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished under other sections of these specifications, by Utility Companies or by the Owner; when this is the case, the extent, source, and description of these items will be as indicated on the drawings or as described in the specification. 1.03 PROVISIONS A. Work performed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 1, the electrical drawings, and all items hereinafter specified. 1. Prior to any work being performed under this division, examine landscape, structural, civil, mechanical, and specialty system s drawings and specifications. If any discrepancies occur between them and the el ectrical drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Owner’s Representative in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. 2. Electrical drawings are diag rammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building will permit. A ll changes from drawings necessary to make the electrical work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 3. Coordinate the electrical work with the General Contractor and be responsible to him for satisfactory progress of the same. Coordinate electrical work with all other trades on the project without additiona l cost to the Owner. 4. All work and materials covered by drawings a nd specifications shall be subject to review at any time by representatives of the pr ime consultant and Owner. If the prime consultant or Owner’s agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifica tions, Contractor shall remove the material from the premises and correct the installation to the satisfaction of the agent. 5. In acceptance or rejection of installed electri cal systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Electrical General Provisions 016010 - 2 A. The latest editions of the following standards (including supplements and official interpretations) are minimum requirements: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code. 3. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code. 4. NFPA 110 – Emergency Power Systems 5. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 7. National Electrical Sa fety Code (NESC). 8. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) a nd American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. 9. National Electrical Manufactur er’s Association (NEMA). 10. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL). 11. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 12. Uniform Building Code. 13. Uniform Mechanical Code. 14. Uniform Fire Code. 15. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 16. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). B. The complete installation shall comply with requirements of th e utility and telephone companies furnishing service to this insta llation. The drawings and specifi cations take precedence when they are more stringent than codes, statutes, or ordina nces in effect. Applicable codes, ordinances, standards and statutes take preced ence when they are more stringent or conflict with the drawings and specifications. 1.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions: “Provide” shall mean “furnish and install”. “Furnish” means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatu s, controls, tests, accessories and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application. “Install” means to join, unit, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect together before tes ting and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation. The words “accept” or “acceptable” denote only that the equipment items are in general conformance with the design concept of the project. B. Drawings: 1. The drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, locations of switches, panelboards and other work. Info rmation shown on the drawings is schematic, however, re-circuiting will not be permitted without specific acceptance. Drawings and specifications are complementary to each other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Data presented on these draw ings is accurate as planning can be determined, but accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, locations, levels, etc., to suit field conditions is directed. Review all Owner’s Representativeural, Structural a nd Mechanical Drawings and Specifications; adjust all work to conform to all conditions shown therein. The Owner’s Representativeural drawings shall take precedence over all other drawings. 2. Discrepancies between different plans, between plans and specifications, between specifications or regulations and codes governi ng this installation shall be brought to the attention of the Owner’s Representative in writing before the date of bid opening. In the event such discrepancies exist, and the Owner’s Representative is not so notified, the adjudication of responsibility shall be so lely at the discretion of the Owner’s Representative. 1.06 RECORD DRAWINGS February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Electrical General Provisions 016010 - 3 A. Maintain a current set of electrical drawings at th e site. Neatly mark all changes and deviations from the original drawings. Use a color which contrasts with the prints. This shall be a separate set of drawings, not used for construction purpos es, and shall be kept up to date as the job progresses and shall be made available for inspec tion by the Owner’s Representative at all times. These updated progress drawings shall be used to produce the final record drawings that shall be in AutoCAD electronic format media upon project completion. B. Upon completion of the contract, both sets (electronic and hard copy drawings) of record drawings shall be delivered to the Owner’s Representative. C. The Contractor shall mark all record drawings on the front lower right hand corner with a stamp impression that reads ‘RECORD DRAWINGS’ or similar. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of job and ascertain all conditions affecting the proposed installation and adjust all work accordingl y. Make provisions for these costs. C. Coordinate the work with that of all other trades. Where conflicts of work occur and departure from the indicated arrangements are necessary, consult with other Contractors involved; come to agreement as to changed locations and eleva tions, etc., and obtain written acceptance from the Owner’s Representative of proposed ch anges before proceeding with work. D. All outages of electrical service shall be scheduled with the Owner and Utility Company five (5) days in advance of proposed outage. Include an overtime allowance in the bid for the performance of all work requiring outages at such time as it is approved by the Owner. Outages shall be at a time and of such duration as accepted by the Owner. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. 1.09 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Engineer for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsis tency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or correction w ill be issued as an addendum by the Owner’s Representative. Only a written interpretation or correction by a ddendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by an y other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written dir ective, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. Failure to request clarification during the bid period of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of their responsibilities. The signing of the contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of the full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. 1.10 SUBMITTALS February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Electrical General Provisions 016010 - 4 A. Submit under provision of Division 1. B. Listing of Equipment: The Contractor shall subm it, within thirty days after the award of the contract, a complete typewritten list of those ite ms of equipment which will be furnished under this contract. Include the name or description of the item, name of manufacturer, model, type, and catalog number. C. Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings, layouts, manufacturer's data, wiring diagrams and material schedules that may be requested by the Owner’s Representative for his review. The review by the Owner’s Representative will not constitute concurrence with any deviation from the plans and specifications unless such deviations ar e specifically identified by the method described below, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of res ponsibility for errors or omissions in the submitted data. D. Processed shop drawings shall not be construed as change orders. The shop drawings shall demonstrate that the Contractor understands the design concept, indicate which equipment and materials he intends to provide, and detail the fa brication and installation methods he intends to use. If deviations, di screpancies or conflicts between s hop drawing submittals and the design drawings and specifications are discovered, the design drawings and specifications shall govern. E. Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions (w hich he shall confirm and correlate at the job site), fabrication processes and techniques of cons truction and coordination of his work with that of other trades. The Contractor shall check and verify all measurements and review shop drawings before submitting them and sign a statement on the shop dr awings which signifies that they comply with plans and specifications and that equipment is dimensionally suitable for the application. If any deviations from the specified requirements for any item of material or equipment exist, such deviation shall be expressly stated in writing and incorporated with the submittal. The Owner's copies (two of each) of th e reviewed submittals shall be retained by the Contractor until completion of the project and presented in bound form to the Owner. F. Shop drawings and manufacturer's publis hed data shall be submitted for: 1. All panelboards 2. Lighting control contactors 3. Lighting fixtures (catalog cuts) and samples 1.11 USE OF THE LANDSCAPE AND/OR ENGINEER’S DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall obtain, at the Contractor’s expense, fro m the Owner’s Representative or Engineer a set of AutoCad or compatible format landscape and engineering drawings on electronic media where desired by the Contractor and/or required by the Specifications for use in preparing the shop drawings, coordination drawings, and record drawings. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner’s Representative and Engin eer a written release of liability acceptable to the Owner’s Representative and Engineer pr ior to receiving the electronic media. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARD FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electri cal and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired , prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Owner’s Representative at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All electrical materials shall be acceptable for inst allation only if labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and if accepted by local authorities. February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Electrical General Provisions 016010 - 5 2.02 SUBSTITUTION AND APPROVALS (Prior Approvals) A. Prior to Bidding: Where items of equipment or ma terials are specified by a manufacturer's name, type, model, or catalog number, only those items may be used in the base bid unless prior written acceptance of other material ha s been published by addendum. 1. Submit applications for this review in triplicate at least ten (10) calendar days prior to bid opening. 2. Applications for review shall be accompan ied by a typewritten list of the specified manufacturer and catalog number and shall st ate all significant details in which each items differs from the item specified. Failure to list this information shall not relieve the Contractor from providing properly functioning or fitting materials regardless of the review action taken by the Owner’s Representative. The Contractor will provide only materials which have been specified or accepte d prior to bid opening, under his base bid. 3. Equipment and materials not listed as equivalents may be proposed as deductive alternates to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder’s letterhead. 4. Such substitution proposals shall not be subs tituted or included in the base bid. Substitution proposal must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of th e cost to be deducted for each item. If any such substitutions are considered, the Cont ractor shall submit a list of the proposed substitution items within 14 days of award of contract. The request for proposed substitutions shall not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concerns. B. Substitutions of Material after Award of Contract 1. Other items of material and equipment may be offered (at the Contractor's option) as alternates to specified items, either as provided for in the Proposal Forms or, if no provisions are made, by submitting it with his bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such alternate proposal shall not be in cluded under the base bid and must be accompanied by full descriptive data on th e proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducte d for each item. If any such alternate material proposals are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items in accordan ce with the requirements of "Review of Proposed Substitutions". 2.03 BID ALTERNATE(S) A. Refer to Division 1 and all contract documents for additional information. B. Alternate(s) for Material and Equipment 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive alternate(s) to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not be subs tituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all material s, equipment, labor, electrical connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid altern ates at the time the base bids are due. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Electrical General Provisions 016010 - 6 A. Contractor's personnel and subcontractors selected to perform the work shall be well versed and skilled in the trades involved. B. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components. C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. D. Any changes or deviations from the drawings a nd specifications must be accepted in writing by the Owner’s Representative/Engineer . All errors in installation shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. All specialties shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. Where detail or specific installation requirements are not provided, manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed. E. Upon completion of work, all equipment and materials shall be installed complete, thoroughly checked, correctly adjusted, and left ready for intended use or operation. All work shall be thoroughly cleaned and all residue shall be rem oved from surfaces. Exterior surfaces of all material and equipment shall be delivered in a perfect, unblemished condition. F. Contractor shall provide a complete installation, including all required labor, material, cartage, insurance, permits, and taxes. 3.02 CHASES, OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING A. Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to eliminate where possible, cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of streetscape floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roofs. Any damage to the building, structure, piping, ducts , equipment or any defaced finish shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional co st to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. Any necessary cutting, channeling, drilling or anchoring of raceways, outlets, or other electrical equipment shall be performed in a careful manner, and as accepted by the Owner’s Representative. B. All penetrations required through existing concrete construction sh all be core drilled at minimum size required. Precautions shall be taken when drilli ng to prevent damage to structural concrete. Contractor shall obtain permi ssion from the Owner’s Representa tive before proceeding with drilling. 3.03 PROGRESS OF WORK A. Order the progress of electrical work to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as th e condition will permit. Any cost resulting from defective or ill timed work performed under this Section shall be borne by this Contractor. 3.04 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Obtain and pay for all permits and licenses requi red and furnish the Owner’s Representative (for the Owner), a certificate of final inspection and approval from the authorities having jurisdiction over the electrical installation. 3.05 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Perform all trenching and backfilling required by work performed under this Section in accordance with the excavating and grading specifications as herein specified. This work shall comply with the requirements of Table 300-5 of the National Electrical Code. February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Electrical General Provisions 016010 - 7 B. Excavate trenches to the depth required for the utilities involved. The tr ench bottom shall be graded true and free from stones or soft spots. Trenches through specia lly treated or surfaced areas, such as paving or blacktop, shall have th e width of the surface cutting extended for a width of eight inches (8") on each side of the open trench. Unless otherwise noted, the disturbed surfaces shall be replaced equal to the original construction, to th e original grade with the same type of material, and to the same depths and lim its as the materials removed. After acceptance by the Owner’s Representative, backfill, tamp, and compact to insure against the possibility of differential settling, in conformity with Division 2 Specifications. Verify location of existing or new utilities and, if damaged by this Contractor, replace or repair. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide all cutting, trenching, backfilling, patching and refinishing or resurf acing required for electrical work in a manner meeting the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Arrange and be held responsible fo r delivery and safe storage of materials and equipment for electrical installation. B. Store materials and equipment fo r easy inspection and checking. C. Carefully mark and store all materials. D. Deliver materials to the job site in stages of the work that will expedite the work as a whole. E. Carefully check materials furnished to this Contractor for installati on, and provide r eceipt acknowledging acceptance of delivery and condition of the materials r eceived. Thereafter, assume full responsibility for its safekeeping until the final installa tion has been reviewed and accepted. 3.08 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for th e protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner’s operation. B. Close all conduit openings with caps or plugs during in stallation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the fina l completion, clean all work and deliv er in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Owner’s Representative. C. Any equipment or conduit systems found to have b een damaged or contaminated above “MILL” or “SHOP” conditions shall be replaced or cl eaned to the Engineer’s satisfaction. 3.09 GUARANTEE A. The entire electrical system installed under this Contract shall be left in proper working order. Replace, without additional cost, any work, material or equipment, which develops defects in design or workmanship within one (1) year from date of final acceptance. 3.10 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instru ctions are received and Owner's personnel have been thoroughly indoctrinated in th e maintenance and operation of all equipment. B. Operating manual, parts lists, and indoctrination of operating and maintenance personnel: Furnish the February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Electrical General Provisions 016010 - 8 services of a qualified representa tive of the supplier for each item or system itemized below who shall instruct specific personnel, as designated by the Owner, in the operation and maintenance of that item or system. C. Instruction shall be made when the particular system is complete and shall be of the number of hours indicated and at the time requested by the Owner. A representative of the Electrical Contractor shall be present for all demonstrations. SYSTEM HRS. OF INSTRUCTION 1. Lighting control systems 4 2. Electrical distribution equipment (under 600 volts) including motor control centers 2 D. Deliver three (3) complete operating manuals and parts lists to the Owner (or his designated representative) at the time of the above required indoctrination. Fully explain the contents of the manuals as part of required indoctrination and instruct the Owner's pers onnel in the correct procedure in obtaining service, both during and after the guarantee period. The opera ting manual and parts lists shall give complete information as to whom the Owner shall contact fo r service and parts, including the address and phone number. Furnish evidence that an authorized service organization regularly carries a complete stock of repair parts for these items (or systems), and that the or ganization is available for se rvice. Service shall be furnished within twenty four (24) hours after requested. E. Clean-up: Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to the electrical installation and leave the premises and all equipment, lamps, fixtures, etc. in a clean, orde rly condition. Any costs to the Owner for clean-up of the site will be charged against the Contractor. F. Acceptance Demonstration: Upon completion of the work, at a time to be designated by the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor shall demonstrate for the Owner the operation of the entire installation, including all systems provided under this contract. G. Operating and Acceptance Tests: Provide all labor, instruments, and equipment for the performance of tests as specified. Submit three (3) copies of a typewritten test report for the Owner’s Representative for his approval. 1. Record the full load current in each phase or line at the main service entrance and for each feeder leaving the main di stribution panelboard . Readings shall be taken with the maximum installed load connected and in operation. 2. Perform a careful inspection of the main switchboard bus structure and cable connections to verify that all connections are mechan ically and electrically tight. 3. Measure the resistance to ground for the servi ce ground, which shall not exceed ten (10) ohms under normal soil moisture conditions. If require d, install additional ground provisions in a manner accepted by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.11 IDENTIFICATION A. General: Provide the following services and ma terials to assist the Owner in operation and maintenance. B. Directory Cards, Nameplates and Labels: No temporary markings, which are visible on equipment, shall remain after the project is complete. Repaint trims, housing, etc., where such markings cannot be readily removed. Defaced finishes must be refi nished. All engraved metal or plastic nameplates shall be white letters on a black or gray background. Raised letter type tape shall not be used. No abbreviations in labeli ng will be permitted without special approval. All panelboards shall be labeled as designated on the electrical draw ings. Thoroughly clean surface to which pressure sensitive type labels are applied to assure adherence of label. Directory cards, February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Electrical General Provisions 016010 - 9 nameplates, and labels shall indicate the general area and type of electrical load served by each circuit. Provide the following types of labels at these locations. 1. On each feeder switch, combina tion starter, or circuit break er located in motor control centers, main service equipment, the main switchboard or panelboard, subdistribution panelboards, and all special equipment housed in cabinets, the labeling shall be one fourth inch (1/4”) minimum height letters. 2. On each separate mounted disc onnect and starter for a motor or fixed appliance, indicate motor or appliance designation, voltage, and phase. (Motor or appliance designations shall be as given on the Mechanical or Own er’s Representativeural plans.) Use three-sixteenth inch (3/16”) minimum height letters. 3. On all branch circuit panelboards indicate panel designation, voltage and phase. Use three-fourths inch (3/4”) minimum height stenciled letters in metal tape or one-half inch (1/2”) engraved letters on laminated nameplat e. Apply to the inside of each door. All emergency panels and disconnects shall be painted with red enamel. 4. For all branch circuit panelboard directories, provide neatly typed, removable cards and protective plastic faces. Spare circuit breakers shall be id entified as such. 5. For all device plates for switches used to control exhaust fans or other equipment, provide one-eighth inch (1/8”) minimum height black filled, engraved letters on stainless steel device plates. 6. For all receptacle device plates , provide one-eighth inch (1/8 ”) minimum height letters on white (normal power) and red (emergency power) nameplates indicating panel and circuit number. 7. For all exposed conduits, junction boxes, wiring gutters, etc., provide three-fourths inch (3/4”) minimum height stenciled letters, or one-half inch (1/2”) minimum height pressure sensitive labels equal to Brady self-sticking vinyl cloth. Labels shall be provided at the following locations: a. Entering or leaving panels or switchgear or enclosures. b. All junction boxes shall be identified as to circuits contained within. 8. Underground Utility Identification: Provide a si x-inch (6”) wide, yellow colored plastic tape. Install the tape for the continuous length of all underground primary raceways provided under this contract. Tape shall be buried not less than twelve inches (12”) below finished grade. Tape shall be Brad y “Identoline” or acceptable and imprinted in large, legible, black letters “Caution – Electrical Utilities Below”. 3.12 CONSTRUCTION LIGHTING AND POWER A. Provide all temporary facilities required to supply c onstruction power and light. Install and maintain facilities in a manner that will protect the public and workmen. Comply with all applicable laws and regulations. B. Provide covered walkway lights and obstruction lights which shall be kept burning continuously between sunset and sunrise where required. C. Upon completion of the work, remove all temporary facilities from the site. D. The General Contractor shall pay for all power a nd light used by him and his subcontractors where construction power is separately metered, or is take n from the permanent project metered service solely for construction use. E. The cutoff date for power cost alloca tion where permanent meters are used shall be either the agreed date of occupancy by the Owner or the date of final accep tance of the project, whic hever shall be the earlier date. 3.14 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING AND CONNECTIONS February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Electrical General Provisions 016010 - 10 A. Furnish, set in place, and wire, except as indicated, a ll heating, ventilating, air conditioning, pl umbing, fire protection, motors and controls in accordance with the following schedule. Carefully coordinate with work performed under the Mechanical Division of these specifications. ITEM FURNISHED UNDER SET IN PLACE OR MTD. UNDER WIRED CONNECTED UNDER 1. Equipment motors and thermal overload, resistance heaters. (3) MD MD ED 2. Motor controllers, magnetic starters, reduced voltage starters and overload relays. MD ED(1) ED 3. Disconnect switches, fused or unfused, h.p. rated switches, thermal overload switches and fuses, manual operating switches. ED(1) ED(1) ED 4. Pushbutton stations, pilot lights, multi-speed switches, float switches, thermostats, control relays, time clocks, control transformers, control panels, motor valves, damper motors, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches and interlocks. MD MD(2) MD(2) 5. Contactors, 120V control circuit outlets for control panels and for boiler controls and for fire protection controls and smoke detectors. ED ED ED 6. Duct Detectors, Fire/Smoke Dampers, and Elevator Vent Dampers. ED MD ED(3) MD=Mechanical, Division 15. ED=Electrical, Division 16. a. If furnished as part of factory wired equipm ent, then wiring and connections only by ED. b. If float switches, line thermostats, p.e. sw itches, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, the Mechanical Division shall furnish them. They shall be set in place and connected under the Elect rical Division, excep t there where such items are an integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc., they shall be set in place unde r the Mechanical Divi sion and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry the full load current to any motor, they shall be furnished, set in place and wi red under the Mechan ical Division. c. Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system by ED; all control function wiring by MD. B. Provide electrical connections to mech anical equipment. Refer to the Mechanical specifi cations and plans covering sprinkler systems, motor interlocks, switching, etc. Provide wiring, conduit, outlets and final February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Electrical General Provisions 016010 - 11 electrical connections to all equipment. C. Where motor controllers are furnished by others, insta ll controller and provide connections at line and load side of controllers. D. Where reduced voltage, multiple speed , duplex, triplex, lead-lag, pony motor and other unusual controller types are utilized, coordinate specific requirements of motor(s) and controller and provide required wiring between motor(s) and controller. E. Provide branch circuits and connections to sump a nd sewage ejector pump alarm bell system. Connect to emergency power distribution system. F. Where electric duct heaters are provided with remote power panels, provide branch circuits between remote panel and duct heater elements in accordan ce with the equpment manufacturer’s recommendations. G. For electric water coolers verify whether the equipment is hard wired, cord and plug connected and whether a remote chiller is provided. Provi de circuiting and connections to match. 3.15 OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT A. Provide electrical connections to owner furnished equipment. B. Inspect owner furnished equipment for damage, defects, missing components, etc. Report deficiencies to the Owner immediately. Do not inst all or connect deficient equipment. C. Provide supports, fastenings, and a uxiliary hardware necessary for a complete installation in accordance with the finished building conditions. 3.16 REMODELING PROVISIONS A. Existing systems and conditions shown on the drawings are provided for guidance only. The Electrical Contractor shall field check all existing conditions prior to bidding and shall include in his bid an allowance for the removal and relocation of existing c onduits, wires, devices, fixtures, or other equipment as indicated on the plans or as required to coordinate and adapt new and existing electrical systems to all other work required for this project. B. Where the reuse of existing conduits, outlets, junction boxes, etc., is permissible, make certain that the wiring form them is continuous from outlet to outlet. Provide modifications to assure that circuits, or system, shall not pass through outlets or junction boxes which may be re ndered inaccessible by changes to be made to the building. Existing conduits, wire, de vices, fixtures, etc., which shall be removed shall become the property of this Contractor unless otherwise noted. C. Connect new work to existing in a manner that will assure proper raceway grounding throughout in conformance with the National Electrical Code. D. Remodel Work Cutting and Patching: The Contractor shall perform cutting, channeling, chasing, drilling, etc., as required to install or rem ove electrical equipment in areas of remodeling. This work shall be performed so as to minimize damage to portions of wall finishes, surfaces, plas tering, or the structure which are to be reused, resurfaced, plastered or pa inted under another division of these specifications. E. Carefully coordinate with the required remodeling wo rk, cutting and patching etc., performed by the other trades. Remove or relocate existing electrical conduits , wires, devices, fixtures and other equipment as necessary. F. All outages on portions of existing electrical systems shall be minimized and shall be at a time and of February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Electrical General Provisions 016010 - 12 duration as accepted by the Owner. 3.17 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION A. Examination 1. Verity field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on drawings. 2. Verify that abandoned wi ring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. 3. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Owner’s Representative before disturbing existing installation. 4. Beginning of demolition means inst aller accepts existing conditions. B. Preparation 1. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. 2. Coordination outages with Owner’s Representative/Owner. 3. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. 4. Existing telephone system: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner/Owne r’s Representative in writing at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. C. Demolition and Extension of Existing Electrical Work 1. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Division 1, Division 2, and this section. 2. Remove, relocate, and extend existing insta llations to accommodate new construction. 3. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. 4. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, includi ng abandoned conduit a bove accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with wa lls and floors, and patch surfaces. 5. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devi ces. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provi de blank cover for abandoned outlets, which are not removed. 6. Disconnect and remove abandoned panel boards and distribution equipment. 7. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. 8. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. 9. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. 10. Maintain access to existing electrical installations, which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. 11. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installation, or as specified in individual section. D. Cleaning and Repair 1. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment, which remain or are to be reused. 2. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provi de closure plates for vacant pos itions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. 3. Luminaries: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps, non-operational ballasts, and broken electrical parts. E. Installation 1. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Division 1. February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Electrical General Provisions 016010 - 13 END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Basic Materials and Methods 16100- 1 SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electri cal and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired , prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Owner’s Representative at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All electrical materials shall be acceptable for inst allation only if labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and if accepted by local authorities. C. All electrical equipment shall have a NEMA rated housing suitable for the location installed. D. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of damage and corrosion, unless specifica lly directed to reuse any existing materials. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAYS A. Provide raceways as required for all electrical systems. B. Rigid conduit shall be hot-dipped, galvanized steel with zinc coating or corrosion resistant lacquer on the inside, and shall comply with Underwr iter’s Laboratories Standard UL6 and American National Standards Institute C80-1. Fittings shall be threaded. C. Plastic coated conduit shall be rigid steel conduit having a 0.030 inch minimum thickness; factory bonded PVC jacket. D. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be galvanized on the outside and coated on the inside with a smooth hard finish of lacquer, varnish or enamel. EMT shall comply with UL Standard UL797 and ANSI C80-3. EMT fittings shall be steel compression gland type. Two and one half inch (2-1/2”) and larger may be steel setscrew type. Where a grounding conductor is pulled, set screw type fittings of any size are allowed. E. Flexible conduit shall be galvani zed steel with steel fittings as manufactured by Triangle. Liquid tight flexible conduit shall be Acaconda, Carol or Gould, with Appleton “ST” connectors, or equivalent. One-half inch (1/2”) minimum trad e size; except that three eighths (3/8”) minimum trade size will be acceptable for recessed fixtures only. F. Wireways, where indicated on the drawings, shall be hinged cover type, sized as indicated; complete with elbows, tees, connect ors, adapters, etc. All parts sh all be factory fabricated and of the same manufacturer, and designed for use together. G. Rigid, heavywall, Schedule-40, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic conduit, for direct burial shall meet requirements of Underwriters’ Laboratories. All offsets and ells shall be rigid, galvanized steel conduit having a 0.030 inch minimum thickness, factory bonded PVC jacket, using a prejacketed couplings to provide substantially watertight jacketing system. 2.02 OUTLET BOXES February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Basic Materials and Methods 16100- 2 A. Outlet boxes shall be constructed of zinc-coated or cadmium plated sheet steel. B. Tile boxes shall be Steel City GW or equivalent. C. All boxes provided shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the number of conductors entering the box in addition to the devices installed in the box, per the Na tional Electrical Code. D. Equip fixture outlet boxes with three-eighths inch (3/8") fixture studs. 2.03 JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES, AND CABINETS A. Junction and Pull Boxes 1. Construct junction or pull boxes not over 150 c ubic inches as standard outlet boxes, and those over 150 cubic inches the same as “cabinet s”, with screw covers of the same gauge metal. Removable covers must be accessible at all times. Mount per “Outlets” Section. 2. Provide a standard access pane l having a hinged metal door neatly fitted into a flush metal trim, where a junction box or equipmen t is located above furred ceilings or in finished walls. Coordinate location and type with the Owner’s Representative. B. Cabinets 1. Cabinets shall meet National Electrical Code requirements, be of standard make, UL labeled, of sheet steel with corrosion resistant finish, and w ith ample space for all wires, connections and equipment. Provide each cabin et with a door and flush catch and lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. Furnish the Owner with two (2) keys per panel. 2. Cabinet fronts shall consist of sheet steel panels with hinged doors. Fronts for flush cabinets shall be approximately three-fourths (3/4”) larger on all sided than cabinet and set so the front will rest firmly against the finished wall surface. 3. Provide suitable devices for securing, supporti ng and adjusting panelboard interiors and fronts. Cabinets shall be arranged to provide a wiring gutter not less than three inches (3”) (larger where specified by the National Electric Code). C. Boxes and cabinets shall be weatherproof construction wherever applicable. 2.04 WIRE AND CABLE A. Conductors shall be in accordance with the applicable sections of UL and IPCEA Standards. Minimum conductor size shall be No. 12 AWG for light and power, and No. 14 AWG for control, unless noted otherwise on the drawings or in the specifications. No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid, and No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. B. Voltage range 0 – 24: High conductivity copper, thermo-plastic insulation, 300 volt rating. C. Voltage range 24 – 600: High conduc tivity copper, moisture-resistant thermo-plastic insulation, 600 volt 75 C rating for general use. For HID fixtures and wiring within 3 inches of fluorescent ballasts wire shall be copper, minimum 90 C rated. Sizes indicated are for installation in a maximum 30 C ambient. Conductor ampacity shall be derated for higher ambient installations. 600 volt aluminum wire and cable in sizes 1/0 and larger may be substituted for copper on services and feeders, if ampacity is equal to or greater than copper and voltage drop is equal to or less than copper. Aluminum wire and cable shall be terminated at switches, lugs, circuit breakers, etc. with Mac-adapt series “MPT” mach ine compression adapters or equivalent. D. Terminating fittings or connectors shall be a ty pe suitable for the specific cable furnished. February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Basic Materials and Methods 16100- 3 E. Insulation: Conductor insulation types shall be ra ted for wet and dry locations (unless specifically noted otherwise) and shall be accepted by the National Electrical Code for the particular application. Wire and cable shall have the following (or better) insulation classes: 1. Wiring in high temperature areas, wh ere the temperature will exceed 165 F, shall be rated 105 C (221 F) minimum, and a type accepted by lo cal code. This shall include any wiring within three feet (3’-0”) horizontally or ten feet (10’-0”) above any boiler or heating appliance. 2. Wiring installed in floor slabs on earth fill, in conduit in fill under floor slabs, and wiring to exterior fixtures, devices, outlets, etc., subject to weather, Type THW. 3. Feeders and other wiring No. 4 AWG and larger, Type THW. 4. Other wiring No. 6 AWG and smaller, Type TW. F. Color Coding: 1. Wiring for control systems to be installed in conjunction with mechanical and miscellaneous equipment shall be color c oded in accordance with the wiring diagrams furnished with the equipment. Branch circuit wiring, including circuits to motors, and all feeders shall be coded by line or phase as follows: 2. Wire No. 2 AWG and smaller shall be factory color coded. Wire No. 1 AWG and larger may be color coded by field painting or color taping of six inch (6”) length of exposed ends. 120/208 Volts A = Black B = Red C = Blue Neutral = White Ground = Green Switch Travelers = Pink G. Wire pulling lubricant shall be equal to Ideal “Yellow” or Dow-Corning “Compound #4”. 2.05 WIRE CONNECTIONS A. No. 6 AWG and larger wire: Connectors and lugs shall be solderless or compression type, Blackburn, Burndy, Penn-Union, T&B, or equivale nt. No. 8 AWG and smaller wire: Twist tight and apply insulated pressure connectors. C onnectors shall be pressure, copper (steel not acceptable), splice caps with nylon insulator as manufactured by Bu chanan, Ideal, T&B, or 3-M. 2.06 SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide enclosed, fusible or nonfusible safety switches where indicated and herein specified. Safety switches shall bear UL label and each encl osure shall be the NEMA type suitable for the surrounding area and conditions. Switches shall be heavy duty, horsepower rated, and shall have quick-break mechanisms. Switches used on motor ci rcuits shall have adequate horsepower ratings for the motors served. B. Safety switches employed as motor disconnect devices for two (2) or more loads shall be of the fusible type for rejection type fuses. C. Heavy-duty industrial type safety switches shall be used for 480 volt application and shall be horsepower rated with quick-make, quick-break mechanisms and interlocked covers. D. Switches shall be as manufactured by Cutler-Hamme r, General Electric, Siemens, Square-D, or equivalent, and all switches provided shall be by the same manufacturer. February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Basic Materials and Methods 16100- 4 2.07 FUSES A. Fuses shall be as manufactured by Bussmann or Gould-Shawmut. B. Fuses for application under 600 volts and rated at 600 amps or less shall be as follows: 1. For all fuses in the main service equipment, except for motor circuits, provide current limiting, 200,000 rms amperes symmetrical interrupting capacity, Bussmann “Fusetron” or equivalent unless noted otherwise on the drawings. 2. For all other fuses, provide rejection type with 200,000 rms amperes symmetrical interrupting capacity, Bussmann “Fusetron” or equivalent unless noted otherwise on the drawings. C. Fuses for application under 600 volts and rated la rger than 600 amperes shall be as follows: 1. For fuses in the main service equipment, except for motor circuits, provide current limiting, 200,000 rms amperes symmetrical interrupting capacity, Bussmann “Limitron” or equivalent unless noted otherwise on the drawings. 2. For all other fuses, provide current limiting, 200,00- rms amperes symmetrical interrupting capacity, Bussmann “Limitron” or equivalent unless noted otherwise on the drawings. D. Control Fuses shall be Bussmann one-time nonrenewable fuses. 2.08 WIRING DEVICES AND DEVICE PLATES A. Provide the following devices where indicated on the drawings. Devices shall be ivory color. Types or devices other than those listed below shall be of the same standard or quality. The catalog numbers and manufacturers listed are intended to indicate the type and quality. Specification grade devices and plates shall be as manufactured by Arrow-Hart, Bryant, Hubbell, Leviton, Pass and Seymour, or as equivalent. Devices shall have screw type terminals. 1. Receptacles: Where special receptacles are re quired, verify the ex act type required to mate with equipment cord-caps before orde ring. Receptacles a nd plug configurations shall conform with NEMA Standards for ampe rage and voltage classification and shall comply with NEMA WD-1 and UL 20 tests. a. Grounding type duplex throughout: Hubbell “Styleline”. b. Duplex weatherproof receptacle shall have integral ground-fault protection Hubbell GF5262 with 5210 cover. c. Special outlets: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Switches: Switches, unless noted, shall be the a-c, tumbler, quiet type; 20A Hubbell Styleline series. Switches shall be fully rated for either inductive or incandescent loads. Key switches shall be Leviton 1121L series. 3. Device Plates: Provide a device plate for each outlet to suit the device installed and blank plates or covers for junction boxes or empty outlets. Flush device plates shall be satin brush finish stainless steel, 0.030 inch thick and provided in garages, mechanical and electrical rooms and utility areas. a. Device plates shall be as manufactured by any of the manufacturers listed above for devices. b. Device plates shall be one-piece type a nd a shape suitable for the devices and outlets installed. Sectional device plat es will not be permitted. Where exposed wiring is permitted, device plates shall be galvanized. c. Provide blank plates for all unused telephone outlets. Finish shall match other plates in area. d. Where the device plate does not cover the outlet opening, the Contractor shall patch the opening to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. e. Telephone plates shall have bushed center or telephone jack opening. February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Basic Materials and Methods 16100- 5 2.09 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS A. Brackets or hangers shall be Binkley, Elcen , Super-Strut, Unistrut, or as accepted. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 MOTOR CONTROL A. Thermal overload relays shall be set at one-hundr ed fifteen percent (115%) of the nameplate full load motor current for 40°C rise motors. B. Dual element fuses shall be sized at one-hundred fifty percent (150%) of nameplate full load motor current. 3.02 CONDUIT SYSTEMS A. General: 1. Provide conduits as required below for all sy stems, unless noted. The cut ends of all conduits shall be reamed properly to prevent damage to conductor insulation. 2. Conduit sizes not noted on the drawings shall be in accordance with requirements of the National Electrical Code, Table 3C, (except flexible connections for lighting fixtures, use Table 350-12) for the quantities and sizes of wire installed. Where nonmetallic conduit is utilized, the Contractor shall provide sizes as required to conform with the fill requirements calculating the grounding wire as an additi onal insulated conductor. 3. Securely fasten all conduits. Embedded condu it shall be securely tied in place to rebar and/or wire mesh. 4. Lay out work in advance to avoid excessive concentrations of multiple conduit runs. 5. Locate conduits so that the strength of structural members is unaffected and the conduits do not conflict with the services of the other trades. Install one-inch (1”) or larger, conduit in or through structural members (beams, slabs, etc.) only when and in a manner accepted by the Owner’s Representative. B. Above Grade Conduit Installation 1. Above-Grade: Defined as the area above finished grade for a building exterior and above the bottom floor slab for a building interior. Installation of all materials for above-grade conduits shall conform with the following: a. Install conduits concealed except at surface cabinets, motor and equipment connections, and in mechanical equipment rooms. Install a minimum of six inches (6”) from flues, steam pi pes or other heated lines. b. Provide flashing and counter-flashing for waterproofing conduits, outlets, fittings, etc., that penetrate the roof. Route all (exposed or concealed) conduit as high as possible, parallel or perpendicular to building lines using right-angle turns and symmetrical, concentric bends. c. Support all horizontal and vertical runs of conduit a minimum five feet (5’-0”) on center from structural members by using Unistrut and/or Brady clips manufactured for securing conduit. d. Provide sleeves in forms for new concrete walls, floor slabs and partitions for passage of empty three-fourths inch (3/4”) conduit for every four (4) spares, spaces or unused poles of each flush m ounted branch circuit panelboard. Terminate these empty three-fourths inch (3/4”) conduits in a junction box which, after construction is complete, is accessible and will enable future branch circuit extensions from the panel. e. Provide conduit expansion joints with necessary bonding c onductor at building expansion joints where required to compensate for conduit or building thermal expansion and contraction. February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Basic Materials and Methods 16100- 6 f. Terminate conduits one and one-fourth inch (1/4”) and larger with insulated bushings or raintight connectors with insulated throats. 2. Rigid Conduit: Hot-dipped, galv anized rigid steel conduit (GRC) shall be installed in the following above-grade areas: a. Embedded in above-grade concre te walls and floor slabs. b. Where exposed to weather. c. Where exposed to mechanical injury. d. Where specifically required by the National Electrical Code. e. All remaining areas except where other conduit is specially permitted in the following paragraphs. f. Provide double locknuts and bushings on c onduits terminating at outlet boxes, cabinets, gutters, etc. 3. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) may be installed as follows: a. Concealed locations in furred walls or ceilings. b. Embedded in above-grade concre te walls and floor slabs. c. Exposed, when at least five feet (5’-0”) above floor. d. EMT fittings shall be steel compression gland type for EMT two inches (2”) and smaller. Setscrew steel fittings will be equivalent for larger sizes. All fittings shall be made up wrench tight. 4. Flexible metal conduit shall be provided in sufficient (minimum 2’-0”), maximum of 6’-0”) lengths for: a. Makeup of motor or equipment and racew ay connections where isolation of sound and vibration transmission is require d. For these equipment connections in locations exposed to weather or in interior locations subject to moisture, liquidtight flexible conduit shall be used. b. Connections to recessed lighting fixtures. c. In remodel areas where raceways must be fished in existing walls and ceilings as specified by the Engineer. d. All lengths of flexible metal conduit (including liquidtight) shall contain a separate grounding conductor as outlined under “Grounding”. 5. Surface Raceway: Surface wiring permitted in th e finish areas in the existing portion of the building shall be enclos ed in surface raceway as sp ecified by the Engineer. C. Below Grade Conduit Installation: 1. Below-Grade: Defined as the area below fi nished grade for a building exterior and below or within the bottom floor slab for a building interior and within exterior building walls that are below grade. Below-grade conduit terminated under main service equipment, padmounted transformers, etc., above floor slabs and equipment foundations shall project two inches (2") minimum above floor or foundation finish to prevent water entry. Install exterior underground conduits thirty inches (30") minimum below finished grade. a. Non-Encased Conduit: Unless specifically noted on the drawings for concrete encasement, provide rigid PVC conduit for installations in or below slabs-on-grade, in earth, or in gravel. Offsets and ninety-degree elbows shall be rigid, galvanized, steel conduit with a 0.030 inch minimum thickness, factory bonded, PVC jacket and pre-jacketed couplings to provide substantially watertight jacketing. b. For multiple runs of conduit, provide pl astic spacers on maximum ten foot (10’-0") centers to maintain horizontal and vertical spacing of the conduits. (1) Joints shall be solven t welded in accordance w ith the manufacturer’s recommendations. (2) Ducts, fittings, elbows and cement shall be produced by the same manufacturer. 3.03 OUTLETS February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Basic Materials and Methods 16100- 7 A. The exact location of outlets and equipment sh all be governed by stru ctural conditions and obstructions, or other equipment items. When necessary, relocate outlets so that when fixtures or other devices are installed, they will be symmetr ically located according to the room layout and will not interfere with other work or equipment. Verify final location of all outlets, panels, equipment, etc., with Owner’s Representative prior to rough-in. Locations may be adjusted by the Owner’s Representative up to ten feet (10’-0") fro m the locations shown without additional cost. Where fixtures are mounted on or in an accessibl e type ceiling, provide a junction box and extend flexible conduit to each fixture. Outlet boxes in finished ceilings or walls shall be fitted with appropriate covers, set flush with the finished surface. B. Where more than one switch or device is located at one point, use gang boxes and covers, unless otherwise indicated. Provide ba rrier partitions between adjacent switches located in the same box when voltage between switches exceeds 300 volts . Sectional switch boxes or utility boxes will not be permitted. C. Back-to-back outlets in a wall, or “Through-wall” type boxes are not permitted. Provide minimum twelve-inch (12”) long nipple to offset outlets shown on opposite sides of a common wall to minimize sound transmission. 3.04 CABINETS AND PANELBOARDS A. Cabinets shall be set rigidly in place with fronts st raight plumb. Center panelboard interiors in panelboard door opening and adjust dead fronts fully outward to meet the trim. 3.05 WIRE AND CABLE A. Provide a complete system of conductors in racew ay systems. Wiring sha ll be routed through an accepted raceway regardless of voltage application. Branch circuits whose length from panel to first outlet exceeds seventy-five (75’-0”) for 120 volt circuits shall be No. 10 AWG, or larger, as required to limit voltage drop to 3%. B. All wire shall be insulated for 600 volts. Wire sizing noted on drawings shall extend for the entire length of a circuit (e.g. taps and risers up lighting poles) unless noted. C. Install wire in raceways in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Use an accepted wire-pulling lubricant. Strip in sulation so as to avoid nicking wire. 3.06 WIRE AND CABLE CONNECTIONS A. General: Terminating fittings, c onnectors, etc., shall be a type suitable for the specific cable furnished. Fittings shall be made up tight. Make up all terminations in strict conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations using special washers, nuts, etc., as required. B. Connectors and Lugs: Splices and conn ections shall be made as follows: 1. Connect No. 6 AWG and larger wire to pa nels and apparatus with properly sized solderless or compression lugs or connectors. 2. Connect No. 8 AWG and smaller wire by twisting tight, then applying wire-nut or pressure connectors. 3. Flashover or insulation value of joints shall equal that of the conductor. Connectors shall be rated at 600 volts for general use a nd 1,000 volts for use within fixtures. 3.07 SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Basic Materials and Methods 16100- 8 A. Install safety and disconnect switches in ge neral area or on equipment and accessible to maintenance personnel. Secure switches firmly to supporting structure with acceptable fasteners. Verify size of switches for each installation. Wher e practicable, switches shall be mounted so that the top of the switch is six feet, three inches (6’-3”) above the finished floor or surface. 3.08 MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Install in accessible locations to serve respective motor, and wher e high ambient temperatures will not affect overload relay calibration. Controllers shall not be located on roof, regardless of plan notation. Provide controllers having ambient te mperature compensated overload relays for all controllers installed where the maxi mum ambient temperature will exceed 115 F, or as noted. 3.09 WIRING DEVICES A. Install wiring devices of the types indicated on th e drawings. All connections shall be made up tight and the devices set plumb. Use care in installing devices in order to prevent damage to the device and the wires in the outlet box. B. Device Plates: Provide a device pl ate for each outlet to suit the devi ce installed, and install blank plates or covers for junction boxes and empty outlets. 3.10 SUPPORT AND HANGERS A. Support and align all raceways, cabinets, equipmen t, transformers, boxes, fixtures, etc., in an accepted manner and as herein specified. Suppor t raceways on accepted types of wall brackets, specialty spring steel clips or hangers, ceiling trapeze hangers, or mallable iron straps. Plumbers perforated straps and twisted ir on wire not permitted. Do not suspend raceways or equipment from ductwork, or from steam, water, or other pi ping, but provide indepe ndent and secure support methods. Provide toggle bolts or expansion (spi der type) anchors in hollow masonry units; lead expansion shields in solid masonry or concrete (or preferably use preset bolts in concrete); machine screws, bolts, or welding on metal surf aces; and wood screws on wooden construction. Note: Nails, of proper type, may be used for anc horing in wooden construction, in lieu of screws, only where rigid support will be provi ded by their use. Use of pow er driven studs is prohibited without permission from the Owner’s Representative. B. Where suspended ceilings are twenty-four inches (24”) or more below the structure (bar joists, concrete, etc.), provide independent support from the structur e for all raceways. Where a space less than twenty-four inches (24”) to the suspended ceiling occurs, the suspending wires or hangers may be utilized to support conduits of thr ee-fourths (3/4”), or less, trade size. Mount conduits above any accessible type ceiling at a hei ght sufficient to permit relocation of recessed fixtures to any location. Racking of conduits will not be permitted from ceiling suspension wires. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Service and Distribution 16400 - 1 SECTION 16400 SERVICE & DISTRIBUTION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. The services will be 208Y/120 volts, three-phase, f our-wire, will be available at the secondary terminals of padmounted transformer. 1.02 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards shall be designed, te sted and assembled in accordance with the applicable standards of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), the National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) and the Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL). B. Submit complete shop drawings with outline dime nsions, descriptive literature and complete description of the frame size, trip setting, class, and interrupting rating of all breakers. Available spaces shall be identified. 1.03 METERING FACILITIES A. Metering equipment shall be a separate part of the main service equipment. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, or Squa re D. Panelboards, main switchboard and/or motor control centers shall all be of the same manufacture. 2.02 METERING FACILITIES A. Meters, meter bases, current and potential transformers are to be furnished by the utility company. 2.03 GROUNDING A. Waterpipe ground clamps shall be T & B Series 3900. B. Ground rods shall be copper clad metal, three-quarter inch by ten feet (3/4” x 10'-0”) long. C. Ground bus bars shall be a minimum of 12 inches long by 3 inches high c onstructed of a drilled copper bus on stand off insulators. 2.04 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards shall be of the ratings and configur ations shown on the Drawings. Panelboards and overcurrent protection devices shall have a minimu m short circuit rating as specified herein or greater where indicated on the Drawings. 1. 208Y/120 volt branch panelboards: 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Service and Distribution 16400 - 2 B. Enclosures shall be corrosion resist ant galvanized (zinc finished) sh eet steel. Fronts shall be cold rolled steel, finish coated with ANSI 61 grey enamel over a rust inhibitor. Panel locks shall be keyed alike. Recessed flush mounted panels shall have overlapping front. C. Doors for branch panelboards shall be one pi ece bolt on front with a lockable hinged door over the overcurrent protection devices. D. Space for future devices shall include a ll necessary bus, supports, and connections. E. Bus bars shall be sequence phased, rigidly s upported by high impact resistant, insulated supporting bus assemblies to prevent vibration a nd resulting damage when subjected to stress, vibration, or short circuits. Solderless terminati ons shall be suitable for either copper or aluminum wire or cable. F. Bus bars shall be of the ampere rating shown on th e Drawings. Bus bars shall be plated aluminum or copper sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum. G. Neutral bus shall be full size. Neutral bus sha ll be 200% rated when supplied from an oversized neutral conductor. Neutral bus shall be capable of terminating one conductor per pole position minimum. H. Provide a copper equipment ground bus in each loadcen ter and/or panelboard. In addition to the equipment ground bus, provide a copper isolated ground bus when supplied from a feeder that includes an isolated grounding conductor. Each gr ound bus shall be capable of terminating one conductor per pole position minimum. I. Provide sub-feed or feed through lugs for loadcen ters and /or panelboards that feed a additional panel without an overcurrent protection device. J. Branch Circuit Panelboards: Maximum allowable physical dimensions: 24 inches wide by 6 inches deep per section. K. All panelboards shall use mo lded case circuit breakers: 1. Completely sealed enclosure. Toggle type operating handle. Trip ampere rating and ON/OFF indication clearly visible. 2. Thermal-magnetic trip-free, trip-indicating, quick-make, quick-break, with inverse time characteristic. Single-handle and common tripping on multi-pole breakers. 3. External handle shall be suitable for locking in the OFF position. 4. Silver alloy contacts with auxiliary arc-quenching devices. 5. Breakers for lighting circuits shall be SWD rated. 6. Provide main breakers in panelboards served from transformers. 7. Shunt trip breakers shall be supplied with 120V AC coils. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 METERING FACILITIES A. Current and potential transformers and watt-hour me ters shall be provided by the utility company. 3.02 GROUNDING A. Service equipment, conduit systems, supports, cabinets, equipment, transformers, fixtures, the grounded circuit conductor, etc., sh all be properly grounded in accordan ce with the latest issue of the National Electrical Code. Provide all bondi ng jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps, February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Service and Distribution 16400 - 3 etc., as required for complete grounding. Rout e ground conductors to provide the shortest and most direct path to the grounding electrode system. Ground connections shall have clean contact surfaces, tined and sweated while bolting. Install all ground conductors in conduit. Make readily accessible connections to a continuous, metallic, underground cold water pi ping system at the point where it enters the building. It this is not practicable, connect to a cold water pipe and provide a meter jumper. Make connections to the water pipe that grounds the conduit enclosing the conductor as well as the conductor. Bond the service equipment to a separate grounding electrode per Code requirements. B. Provide a separate grounding c onductor, securely grounded on each side of all raceways containing sections of plastic or flexible raceways. Size in accordance with the National Electrical Code and r oute inside raceway. C. Provide a green grounding jumper from the ground screw to a box grounding screw or clip for all grounding type devices. Use insulated wire. D. Provide grounding type bushings for all secondary feeder conduits that originate from the secondary section of the main distribution panel and individually bond this raceway to the ground bus in the secondary section of the distribution panel. E. Provide a separate grounding c onductor for all feeders, bran ch circuits, and multi-outlet assemblies. 3.03 PANELBOARDS A. Install panelboards with the top of the trim six-feet, three-inches (6'-3") from the finished floor. B. Field check all panelboard loading and reconnect circuits as required to provide balanced phase and line loads. C. Cables installed in wire gutters of panelboard s shall be neatly bundled, routed, and supported. Minimum bending radii as recommended by the wire and cable manufacturer shall not be reduced. D. Where panelboards are mounted recessed flush in wall, maintain fire integrity of wall. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Exterior Lighting 16521- 1 SECTION 16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the C ontract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. 3. Poles and accessories. A. DEFINITIONS B. CRI: Color-rendering index. C. HID: High-intensity discharge. D. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. E. Pole: Luminaire support structure, includi ng tower used for large area illumination. F. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and suppor t component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, fi nishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters. 2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on la boratory tests of each lumina ire type, complete with indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories. 6. Photoelectric relays. 7. Ballasts, including ener gy-efficiency data. 8. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data. 9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for components involved. 11. Anchor bolts for poles. B. Samples for Verification: For products designated for sample submission in Exterior Lighting Device Schedule. Each sample shall include lamps and ballasts. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaries and to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. D. Warranty: Special warranty sp ecified in this Section. February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Exterior Lighting 16521- 2 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing i ndicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7. B. Electrical Components, Devices, a nd Accessories: Listed and labe led as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic tion, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with IEEE C2, "Nationa l Electrical Safety Code."\ D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package aluminum poles for sh ipping according to ASTM B 660. B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treat ed skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation. C. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanshi p; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS B. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rati ng installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Cove rs, and Other Optical Parts: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnis h at least one of each type. 3. Ballasts: 10 for every 100 of each type and rati ng installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 4. Globes and Guards: 10 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Exterior Lighting 16521- 3 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 3. Basis of Design Product: The design of each ite m of exterior luminaire and its support is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.02 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be liste d and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to aut horities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of la teral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other com ponents from falling accident ally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and ot her changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflect ance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and agi ng-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Owner’s Representativeural and Metal Pr oducts" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Exterior Lighting 16521- 4 1. Surface Preparation: Clean su rfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contamin ants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying w ith SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard fi nish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel. a. Color: Match Owner’s Representative's sample of custom color. 2.03 EXTERIOR LIGHTING A. Low-Temperature Ballast Capability: Rated by its manufacturer for reliable starting and operation of indicated lamp(s) at temperatures minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C) and higher. B. Ballast Characteristics: 1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 2. Sound Rating: A. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor, Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection. 5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum. 6. Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 Category A or better. C. Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast provided at temperatures 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) and higher. D. Fluorescent Lamps: Low-mercury type. Comply with the EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. 2.04 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the follo wing features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotran sformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. 2.05 HID LAMPS A. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 3000 K. B. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 3000 K. C. Ceramic, pulse-start, metal-halide lamps in paragr aph below are available in ratings from about 40 to 250 W. In addition to advant ages inherent in pulse-start technology, these lamps have an improved CRI, between 80 and 94, with higher initial and maintained lumen output. D. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 3000 K. 2.06 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4. February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Exterior Lighting 16521- 5 1. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis. B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated. C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components. 1. Materials: Shall not cause galv anic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, unless stainle ss-steel items are indicated. 3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel. D. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with an chor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork ar e specified in Division 3 Sec tion "Cast-in-Place Concrete." E. Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories. F. Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisd iction, according to AASHTO LTS-4. 2.07 POLE ACCESSORIES A. Duplex Receptacle: 120 V, 20 A in a weatherproof assembly co mplying with Di vision 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for ground-fault circuit-interrupter type. 1. Nonmetallic polycarbonate plastic or reinfor ced fiberglass cover, color to match pole, that when mounted results in rated weather proof, in-use cover. 2. With cord opening. 3. With lockable hasp and latch that complies with OSHA lockout and tag-out requirements. 2.08 EXECUTION 2.09 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming 2.10 POLE INSTALLATION A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum dir ectional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole. B. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts acco rding to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cas t-in-Place Concrete." February 15, 2012 East Mall Plaza and Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape BGCE Exterior Lighting 16521- 6 C. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended by pole manufacturer. 1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. 2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space. 3. Install base covers, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole. D. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable). 2.11 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTING LUMINAIRES A. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location. Cast conduit into base, and finish by trowe ling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing ar e specified in Division 3 Sec tion "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2.12 CORROSION PREVENTION A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment. B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 16 S ection "Raceways and Boxe s." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch - thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap. 2.13 GROUNDING A. Ground metal poles and support structures acco rding to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless othe rwise indicated. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the ba se for connecting luminaire to grounding system. 2.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtur es and components. B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operati on of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Tree Protection and Reten tion 32 0190-1 SECTION 32 0190 TREE PROTECTION AND RETENTION PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work of this section consists of retaining and protection of existing trees and landscape material during the construction of the project. 1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. There should be daily supervision of field cr ews by the Owner's Repr esentative or Project Consulting Arborist during the critical phases of the project: for example, demolition of existing concrete; root pruning; construction of retaining wa lls and construction of new curb or sidewalk in tree protection areas. Owner shall be responsibl e for retaining Project Consulting Arborist for duration of project. B. If it appears that the completion of the construction may cause damage to the branches of any tree, the Contractor shall contact the Owner's Represen tative. The Owner’s Representative will make a determination as to whether such damage is eminent. C. To prevent or minimize soil compaction, designated routes for equipment and foot traffic by work crews shall be determined prior to commencing co nstruction activities, and shall be indicated in the tree protection plan to be submitted by Contract or. These routes shall be marked at the site, prior to commencement of construction, with tree protection fencing and signage as specified in Part 3.1, E of this section. D. Motorized equipment and trailers, including tractor s, bobcats, bulldozers, trackhoes, trucks, cars, and carts shall not be allowed access within tr ee protection areas. Should access be necessary within designated tree protection areas, the existing grade shall be covered with six (6) to eight (8) inches of wood mulch to help distribute the weight of equipment and to minimize soil compaction and rutting. Plywood and/or mulch is not acceptabl e bridging material for driving over exposed tree roots. Exposed tree roots shall not be driven over. The Owner's Representative or Project Consulting Arborist shall be notified and shall ap prove of the access and dr iving surface prior to its use. E. Materials and supplies shall not be stockpiled or stored within the tree protection area. Should temporary storage be necessary w ithin designated tree protection areas, the existing grade shall be covered with double, overlapping sheets of ¾ inch thick plywood, or six (6) to eight (8) inches of wood mulch to help distribute the weight of materials or supplies and to minimize soil compaction. F. Under no circumstances shall any objects or materi als be leaned against or supported by a tree's trunk, branches, or exposed roots. The attachment or installation to trees of any sign, cable, wire, nail, swing, or any other material that is not needed to help support the natural structure of the tree is prohibited. Standard arboricultural techniques such as bracing or cabling that are performed by professional arborists are acceptable upon approval by the Owner's Representative or Project Consulting Arborist. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. TREE PROTECTION AREA: Generally, a tree prot ection area should consist of the ground encompassing from 1.5 (minimum) to 2.0 times the distance between the trunk and dripline, or February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Tree Protection and Reten tion 32 0190-2 one linear foot away from the trunk base for every inch diameter of the trunk, whichever is greater, unless otherwise directed by Owner’s Re presenative. (See section below). Areas of ground covered by pavement, buildings, or other permanent structures where the presence of roots is minimal or negligible, are exclud ed. The area under or within the trees's dripline is also referred to as the "Critical Root Zone" (see below). 1. With groups of trees or where an array effect is present, there may be discontinuous (non-overlapping) perimeters of tree protection areas which result in difficult to maintain or ineffective tree protection fencing. in these cases, even though tree protection areas do not overlap, they should be treated as though they do if the distance between the perimeters of such areas is less than thirty (3 0) feet. In effect, this will artificially enlarge the area of tree protection, but will result in a more clearly defined, manageable area. B. DRIPLINE: The outermost edge of the tree's can opy or branch spread. The area within a tree's dripline is all the ground under the total branch spread. C. CRITICAL ROOT ZONE: Generally, all of the ground area included in the dripline. D. DIAMETER (CALIPER): The size (in inches ) of a tree's trunk is measured at: 1. six (6) inches above grade fo r trunk diameters up to and including four (4) inches; 2. twelve (12) inches above grade for trunk di ameters from four (4 ) inches up to and including eight (8) inches; and 3. four and a half (4½) feet above grade for trunk diameters greater than eight (8) inches; in accordance with guidelines esta blished in the "Guide fo r Plant Appraisal". All measurements should be ro unded to the nearest inch. E. HIGH-VALUE SHRUB: Any specimen shrub with an appraised value of $100.00 or more. F. PROJECT CONSULTING ARBORIST: An independ ent consultant with a degree in a field related to arboriculture, and at least five year s field experience in tree preservation or on-site monitoring of public works or construction projects involving tree retention and protection. The Consultant should be an active member in th e American Society of Consulting Arborists and International Society of Arboriculture. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND GUIDELINES: A. Contractor shall comply with applicable requir ements and recommendations of the most current versions of the following standards and guidelin es. Where these conflic t with other specified requirements, the more restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. ANSI Z133.1-1988 - American National Standard for Tree Care Operations 2. ANSI A300-1994 - Standard Practices for Trees, Shrubs and Other Woody Plant Maintenance 3. NATIONAL ARBORIST ASSOCIATION STANDARDS - Pruning, Cabling and Bracing, Fertilization 4. GUIDE FOR PLANT APPRAISAL-8TH EDITION, Authored by the Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers; published by the International Society of Arboriculture. 5. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Tree Protection and Reten tion 32 0190-3 A. This section provides standards and guidelines for the retention and protection of trees and high-value shrubs for any proposed public works or construction project. 3.02 DEMOLITION OF EXISTING CONCRETE A. Caution should be used during removal of existing street, curb, gutter, sidewalk, drain inlets, and other concrete and asphalt demolition, to minimize injury to tree root systems. The following procedures should be used when removing existing concrete. 1. Breaking of the existing concrete and asphal t for removal should be done in a manner that will minimize ground disturbance and vibration. 2. Curbs and sidewalks within designated tree protection areas and critical root zones shall be removed by hand. When removing existing sidewalks and curbs, care should be taken to avoid injury to roots located under, over, or adjacent to paved surfaces. 3. Roots and root-trunk flares growing over curbs should not be injured during breaking of curbs and removal of debris. Wood and bark tissues shall not be injured by striking tissues with equipment. 4. During the removal of concrete, all root systems and soil areas exposed shall not be disturbed. 5. Motorized equipment and trailers, including tractors, Bobcats, bulldozers, trackhoes, trucks, cars, and carts are to be limited to access on the existing paved street only. Access is not allowed behind the curb within tree protection areas. 6. Should access be necessary within designated tree protection areas, the existing grade shall be covered with double, overlapping sheets of ¾ inch thick plywood, or six (6) to eight (8) inches of wood mulch to help distribute the weight of equipment and to minimize soil compaction and rutting. Plywood and/or mulch is not acceptable bridging material for driving over exposed tree roots. Exposed tree roots shall not be driven over. The Owner's Representative or Project Consulting Arborist shall be notified and shall approve of the access and drivi ng surface prior to its use. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION OF SIDEWALKS, CURBS, CONCRETE, ASPHALT PAVING AND DRAINAGE INLETS A. The following procedures shall be used when constructing sidewalks, curbs, concrete, asphalt paving, and drainage inlets. 1. Keep all materials and equipment within the street bounded by existing curbs. 2. Protect exposed roots from contamination by stabilization materials and concrete. 3. Locate concrete washout areas away from roots and tree protection areas. 4. When excavating for the construction of inlets, excavated soil shall be deposited in trucks and hauled off or deposited temporarily on ¾ inch thick plywood outside the critical root zone. Excavated and fill soil shall not be deposited, even temporarily, on unprotected natural grade. 5. After proper pruning, as needed, cover exposed roots within thirty (30) minutes to minimize desiccation. Roots may be covered with soil, mulch, or moistened burlap (7 ounce or equivalent), and shall be kept moist during the period until the final grade is established. 6. Where possible, sidewalks should be raised, narrowed, curbed, or relocated to prevent cutting and removing major roots (e.g. roots greater than three inches in diameter). 7. Place a sheet of six (6) mil or thicker plastic over the grade within affected portions of tree protection areas prior to pouring concre te sidewalks, curbs, inlets, ramps, and driveway approaches. The plastic will assist in providing a non-leaching barrier between the concrete, soil and roots. 8. Construct new sidewalks on, or above, the existing grade instead of excavating into root zones. The new grade shall not interfere with sheet-flow drainage. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Tree Protection and Reten tion 32 0190-4 9. Limit grading to a maximum of two (2) inches of fill over natural grade within critical root zones. Fill should consist of sandy loam tops oil. Clay soils shall not be used as fill. When using fill soil, the existing surface to receive fill should be scarified prior to filling. Any filling operation should not occur during water saturated soil conditions. 10. Existing soil may be used as a form for back of curb and gutter, with or without the use of a thin masonite-type form, although amasonite form is preferred. This will minimize excavation in the critical root zone and prevent undue injury to the roots. This method is unnecessary in areas outside the critical root zone. Place a layer of Typar BioBarrier between the curb and tree roots to help inhibit root growth that may exploit small cracks in the curb. Were appropriate, use curbs with discontinuous footings to maintain natural grade near the base of trees adjacent to the curbing, and to minimize injury to roots and root flares. 11. Provide for easy concrete removal and replacement where an obvious raised root may cause sidewalk cracking in the future. This can be accomplished by installing an expansion joint on either side of the root or by etching the concrete on either side of the root to allow that particular section to be broken out and replaced. Compaction rating for the replacement walkway shou ld not exceed 80% Procto r density. Tree roots will continue to slowly add girth every year; theref ore, the base material needs to be malleable (e.g. suitable subgrade aggregates, crushed granite, or compacted sand) to prevent a fulcrum or pressure point which can crack or heave the walkway. 12. Where appropriate, and under the direction of the Owner's Repres entative or Project Consulting Arborist, root restricting barriers can be inst alled with a minimal amount of disturbance. There are several promising landscape related materials used as barriers to root growth, especially away from sidewalks, cu rbs and streets. Three such materials are: a. A stiff nylon woven fabric (Q899 nylon fabric with extra firm finish from Jason Mills, Westwood, NJ); b. 14-mesh or smaller copper wire screen; c. Typar BioBarrier (REEMAY, Inc., Old Hickory, TN). The nylon fabric has holes approximately 1/26th-inch square separated by strands approximately 1/26th-inch thick, with strands fused together. Copper screen has been shown to be effective in controlling seedling ro ot growth. Typar BioBarrier is a commercial product developed specifically to control roots of trees, and consists of a felt-like spun-bounded polypropylene fabric to which polyethylene pellets are attached at one and a half (1½) by on e and a half (1½) inch spacing. The pellets are impregnated with the herbicide Trifluralin and release it slowly over time (many years). After a two (2) foot deep, narrow trench is dug adjacent to the curb, sidewalk, or other structure i nvolved, and after any affected roots are properly pruned, the material of choice should be placed against the side of the wall closest to the roots that were severed (side of the wall farthest from the structure being protected). Note: This procedure should not be used if large, existing roots (four (4) inches or larger in diameter) will be severed. The nylon fabric and copper screen will constrict roots to the size of the openings in the material; beyond the constrictions, roots will be greatly stunted except for knobs that form against the barriers. The barrier should be installed at least eighteen (18) to twenty-four (24) inches deep (in a vertical plane). 13. In areas where roots have to be removed for construction of drain inlets,roots shall be severed prior to excavation to eliminate unnecessary tearing of roots by equipment. a. Excavate soil by hand at the construction cut limit to a depth of thirty (30) inches or to the depth of the required root cut, whichever is less. b. Prune roots as specified in Part 3, 3.1, D of this section. c. Protect exposed roots as specified in Part 3, 3.1, B.5 of this section. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Tree Protection and Reten tion 32 0190-5 14. Concrete or chemicals spilled within tree protec tion areas should be completely removed. Contamination soil shall be completely removed at the time of the spill and removed by hand without disturbance to root systems. Appropriate soil should be added as necessary to restore the grade. 3.04 IRRIGATION OR UTILITY INSTALLATION A. Protection of Trees and High Value Shrubs: 1. Contractor shall protect all trees and high-value shrubs from injury due to irrigation related work. All injuries to trees and high-value shrubs shall be mitigated to the satisfaction of the Owner, and, if appropriate in accordance with guidelines established in the "Guide for Plant Appraisal". All costs of such mitigating shall be charged to and paid by the Contractor. 2. All irrigation lines shall be indicated on construction plans and pre-approved by the Owner's Representative or Project Consulting Arborist. Unless abso lutely necessary, no irrigation lines shall be located within 10 feet of any existing tree trunk. (See item 2 below). B. Existing Trees: 1. The Owner's Representative or Project Consulting Arborist shall be notified prior to any trenching or excavation known or suspected to involve cutting of more than: a. two roots, three inches or more in diameter; and/or b. four roots between two (2) and three (3 ) inches in diameter. The Owner's Representative or Project Consulting Arborist shall be notified immediately in the event that roots in excess of that de scribed above are cut, torn, ripped, or otherwise injured. 2. All trenching or other work under the dripline of any tree shall be done by hand or by other methods which will prevent breakage or other injury to br anches and roots. 3. Where it is necessary to excavate within the cr itical root zone of existing trees, contractor shall use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation, in areas where two (2) inch diameter and larger roots occur, shall be done by hand with approved hand tools. Where possible, tree roots two (2 ) inches or larger in diameter shall be tunneled or bored under and shall be covered with moistened burlap to prevent excessive drying. 4. Wherever a trenching machine exposes roots smaller than two (2) inches in diameter, such roots extending through the trench wall shall be hand pruned (see Part 3, 3.1, D of this section. All trenches within critical r oot zones shall be closed within twelve (12) hours-if this is not possible, the trench wa lls shall be covered with burlap and kept moistened. Prior to backfilling, Contractor shall contact the Owner's Representative or Project Consulting Arborist to inspect the condition and treatment of roots larger than two (2) inches in diameter injured by trenching. 5. Horizontal directional boring (auger tunneling), rather than open trenching, should be used for irrigation line or other utility installation within one half (½) foot linear distance from the trunk base for every inch of trun k diameter, if root disruption or utility installation occurs on no more than one side of the tree. If trenching or utility installation will occur on two or more sides of a tree tr unk (e.g. N,S,E, or W), then horizontal directional boring should be used if line insta llation is within one (1) foot linear distance from the trunk base for every inch of trunk diameter. C. Root Pruning: 1. Tree roots shall not be pruned or cut unless their removal is unavoidable or absolutely necessary. The Owner's Representative or Pr oject Consulting Arborist shall be notified prior to any operation known or suspected to involve cutting of more than: February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Tree Protection and Reten tion 32 0190-6 a. two roots, three (3) inches or more in diameter; and/or b. four (4) roots between two (2) and three (3) inches in diameter. The Owner's Representative or Project Consulting Arborist shall be notified immediately in the event that roots in excess of that de scribed above are cut, torn, ripped, or otherwise injured. 2. Upon approval by the Owner's Representativ e, prior to any excavation, removal of sidewalk, or other activity that will result in removal of soil and tree roots, all tree roots within a designated area will be pruned to a de pth of fourteen (14) inches. Pruning shall occur with a Dosko Root Pruner, or equivale nt, in accessible areas, and by hand in areas inaccessible to the root pruning machine. All other root prun ing shall be done by hand with approved tools. 3. Removal of roots greater than one (1) inch diameter or parts of roots that are injured or diseased should be performed as follows: a. Preserve the root bark ridge (similar in structure and function to a branch bark ridge). Directional root pruning is the recommendation technique and should be used during hand excavation around tree roots. Roots are similar to branches in their response to pruning practices. With directional root pruning, objectionable and severely injured roots are properly cut to a lateral root, if possible, that is growing downward or in a favorable direction. b. All roots needing to be pruned or removed shall be cut cleanly with sharp hand tools, with oversight by the Owner's Representative or Project Consulting Arborist. No wound dressings shall be used. c. Recommended root pruning tools: 1.) Scissor-type lopper. 2.) Scissor-type pruner. 3.) Large and small hand saws. 4.) Wound scriber. 5.) Trowel or small shovel. 6.) Garden Fork. 7.) Hand broom. 4. Root Pruning Near Sidewalks: a. Root pruning should be done carefully, by hand, to achieve the objective of reducing future sidewalk problems as we ll as preserving the trees. Removing anchoring roots or causing injuries in anchoring roots and root flares can cause future decay and windthrow hazards. In discriminate cutting of vigorous roots results in their resprouting so that several more new roots may grow from the cut end, back under the sidewalk, thereby reducing the time between sidewalk repairs. Roots can be managed in the ground without significant harm to trees, if care is taken to avoid injuries that lead to root and trunk decay. b. Directional root pruning is recommended because it considers the tree's response to root pruning and decay. With directional root pruning , roots are cut to a large lateral, if possible, that is growing down ward or in a more favorable direction. The pruned root ends will be less likely to resprout, since a large lateral can assume the new terminal role of the root. c. Proper removal of selected roots or parts of roots can direct roots away from sidewalks in he future. Procedures for root pruning directly next to sidewalks are as follows: d. Hand dig a trench six (6) to eight (8) inches in depth at the edge of the planting strip and sidewalk. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Tree Protection and Reten tion 32 0190-7 e. Remove all roots less than two (2) inches diameter in this trench back to a desirable lateral root, preserving the root bark ridge. If careful excavation does not reveal a desirable lateral root within twelve (12) inches of the exposed root in question, then the exposed root shall be pruned properly so that a minimal amount of root is removed. f. Small root bundles, the source of future sidewalk problems, should also be removed at this time. 5. All roots between two (2) and four (4) inches in diameter should be examined by the Owner's Representative or Project Consulting Arbo rist in terms of their role in anchoring the tree. a. All roots that contribute significantly to anchorage should be preserved. Remove all other roots in this size range to sound, downward growing lateral roots that are at least one half (½) the size of the root being removed. b. All roots larger than four (4) inches in diameter are to be preserved unless their removal is absolutely necessary. Pres ervation of large roots may require: 1.) reducing the sidewalk width n ear the root flare; and/or 2.) ramping or bridging the sidewalk over the roots to allow for root growth. 6. Tree guying subsequent to root pruning: Upon review of on-site root pruning and constructing grading limits, the Owner’s Repr esentative or Project Consulting Arborist shall determine if existing trees subject to root pruning should be guyed or otherwise stabilized. Contractor shall retain a qualif ied tree service company to complete tree guying and stabilization in accordance with National Arborist Association standards as referenced in Section 5.00. Tree service company shall be certified by the International Society of Consulting Arborists, ISCA. 3.05 TREE PROTECTION FENCING A. Tree protection fencing should be installed as designated on construction documents and at all locations within or adjacent to the project limits where existing trees and landscape material shall remain. Tree protection areas are designated on construction documents, and fencing locations should be staked for approval by the Owner's Representative or Project Consulting Arborist. B. Tree protection fences should be: 1. Galvanized chain-link - six (6) feet in height. Posts should be installed on ten (10) foot centers (maximum). Installation of post shall not result in injury to surface roots or root flares of trees. 2. Fencing should be installed to completely su rround the limits of tree protection areas, and should extend at least ten (10) feet beyond the designated construction limits. 3. Tree protection fencing shall be installed prior to any site activity and shall remain until its removal is authorized by the Owner's Re presentative or Project Consulting Arborist. C. Tree Protection Signage: 1. A sign shall be mounted on tree protection fencing at fifty (50) foot intervals warning constructing personnel and the public to keep out of the tree protection areas. 3.06 PROJECT SITE MONITORING A. As determined by the Owner's Representative for projects of sufficient size to warrant such, a Project Consulting Arborist should be retained to enforce and monitor the Tree Retention and Protection objectives. The project site should be monitored a minimum of two (2) times weekly-more frequently at the start of the project until all procedures and specifications are understood February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Tree Protection and Reten tion 32 0190-8 and properly executed by all parties. Specific monitoring schedules should be developed at preconstruction meetings and modified as de emed necessary by the appropriate parties. 3.07 INJURIES TO EXISTING PL ANTS - DAMAGE PENALTIES A. Tree and High Value Shrub Appraisal: 1. All trees and high-value shrubs will ev aluated and appraised by the Owner's Representative or Project Consu lting Arborist, and a list of a ll tree values for the project will be on file in the Construction Manager's office. Any tree or other plant requiring retention or protection that is not on the list shall be appraised by the Owner's Representative or Project Cons ulting Arborist as necessary to comply with this damage penalty. 2. Documentation for appraisals will consist of: a. measurement of plant size; b. identification by common and botanical names; c. current condition (overall health, injuri es, overt hazard status, etc.) and d. location factors as described in the "Guide for Plant Appraisal".Photographs may be taken of certain trees and shrubs to document debilitating condition factors. 3. The threshold level for plants to be appraised shall be $100.00; only those trees and shrubs estimated to have a monetary value greater than $100.00 shall be appraised. 4. Trees and other plants designated as requirin g retention or protection shall be identified and located on construction plans. Loss of, or partial injury to, any of these plants due to Contractor neglect or improper construction activities will result in liquidated damages for the assessed value of the tree as determin ed by the Owner's Repr esentative or Project Consulting Arborist. 5. Trees determined as requiring “general protection” or “special protection” in the construction areas and in other key locations should be clearly identified by the Owner's Representative or Project Consu lting Arborist. Loss or partial injury to any of these trees due to Contractor neglect or improper construction activities will result in liquidated damages for the assessed value of the trees as determined by the Owner's Representative or Project Consulting Arborist. Injury to a portion of these trees will be assessed by the Owner's Representative or Project Consulting Arborist and a corresponding portion of the liquidated damages will be assessed to the Contractor. 6. A fine of one-thousand dollars ($1,000.00) w ill be levied against the Contractor for each incident of construction damage (including construction traffic) within designated tree protection areas. Any fine shall be independent of any applicable liquidated damages for the assessed value of the tree or tree part. 7. Trees or roots visibly and unnecessarily inju red will cause the Owner to withhold from the Contractor an assessed amount conforming to the requirements s tipulated above, for a period of one full year. After that period the impact of the injury to any tree will be assessed by the Owner's Representative or the Project Consulting Arborist. 8. If any trees or shrubs designated to be reta ined or protected are injured and replacement is justified, a number and equivalent diameter inches of trees or shrubs of same or similar species shall be furnished and planted by the Contractor. The total inch diameter of the replacement plant(s) shall equal the diameter of the plant(s) to be replaced, in accordance with the "Guide for Plant Appraisal". 3.08 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed methods and schedule for effectuating tr ee and other plant protection shall be submitted for approval. Contractor shall submit construction schedule which includes a time frame for work February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Tree Protection and Reten tion 32 0190-9 near existing plants. Approval of such shall be obtained from the Owner's Representative prior to commencement of construction near tree protection areas. B. Proposed methods, materials, and schedule for root pruning, branch pruning, and other tree maintenance shall be submitted for approval. The Owner's Representativ e or Project Consulting Arborist shall mark the location of root pruning lines in the field prior to the operation. If possible, root pruning should occur between autumnal leaf fall and spring foliation. Root pruning during the growing season shall require appr oval of the Owner's Repr esentative or Project Consulting Arborist. 3.09 TREE AND OTHER PLANT MAINTENANCE DURING AND AFTER COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION. A. Proper maintenance should include, but without limitation to: structural and remedial pruning; watering; mulching; remediating soil compaction; fertilization; insect and disease control; soil and tissue analysis; aeration; and wound treatment. Cont ractor shall maintain existing trees during and after completion of construction as dir ected by the Owner’s Representative. B. The timing duration and frequency of necessary ma intenance practices should be determined by the Owner's Representative or Proj ect Consulting Arborist, based on factors associated with the site and affected plants. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC INTEG RALLY COLORED ARCHITECTURA L CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 1316-1 SECTION 32-1316 INTEGRALLY COLORED ARCHITECTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Integrally colored cast-in-place concrete. B. Related Sections: 1. Section: Concrete Paving: Coordination of sample submittal and color selection. 2. Section: Joint Sealers: Colored sealants for joints. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 303 - Cast-In-Place Ar chitectural Concrete Practice 2. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting. 3. ACI 306 - Cold Weather Concreting. B. American Society fo r Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 2. ASTM C979 - Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and manufacturer's instructions for: 1. Color additives. 2. Curing compounds. 3. Form facing materials. 4. Form release agents. 5. Proprietary cleaning agents. 6. Surface retarders. B. Samples: 1. Samples for Color Verification: a. Submit sample chip of specified color indicating color additive number and required dosage rate. Samples indicate general color a nd may vary from concrete finished in field according to Specifications. b. Submit samples of sand, and selected aggregate. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301, Section 6 - Arch itectural Concrete. B. Conform to ACI 305 during hot weather. C. Conform to ACI 306 during cold weather. D. Obtain each material from same source and ma intain high degree of consistency in workmanship throughout Project. E. Installer Qualifications: Concrete work shall be by firm with five years experience with work of similar scope and quality. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC INTEG RALLY COLORED ARCHITECTURA L CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 1316-2 F. Colored Concrete Mock-Up: 1. Plan for construction of three full-scale sample color mock-ups under provisions of Concrete Section. Construct at least one month before star t of other concrete work to allow concrete to cure before observation, and allow for adjustments. 2. At location on Project selected by TOV and General Contractor, demonstrate methods of obtaining consistent visual a ppearance, including each forming and finishing c ondition required on Project using materials, workmanship, joint treatment, form ties, curing method, and patching techniques to be used throughout Project. 3. Retain samples of cements, sands, aggregates, and color additives used in mock-up for comparison with materials used in remaining Work. 4. Accepted mock-up provides visual standard for work of Section. 5. Remove mockups when no longer required for comparison with finished work. G. Preconstruction Conference: 1. A pre-mockup conference is to be scheduled with landscape architect and Owner. 2. Review procedures required to produce specified results. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Color Additives: Comply with manufacturer's instruc tions. Deliver color additives to job site or batch plant in original, unopened packag ing. Store in dry conditions. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Schedule delivery of concrete to provide consistent mix times from batching until discharge. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Colored Additives for Integrally Colored Concrete: 1. Manufacturer: a. Davis Colors manufactured by Davis Colors; phone 800-356-4848, internet www.daviscolors.com, or e-mail info@daviscolors.com. b. Substitutions: Written approval for substitution request. 2. Materials: a. Colored additives shall contain pure, concentrated mineral pigments specially processed for mixing into concrete and complying with ASTM C979. b. Color additives contai ning carbon black are not acceptable. 3. Packaging: If color additives are to be added to mix at site, furnish color additives in premeasured Mix-Ready® disintegrating bags to minimize job site waste. B. Selected Aggregate: Subject to approva l by landscape architect, engineer and Owner. C. Admixtures: Do not use calcium chloride admixtures. 2.02 FORMS A. Form Facing Material: 1. Provide non-porous surface such as steel, plastic, or high-density overlaid plywood with watertight joint seals to prevent leakage. B. Form Ties: Fiberglass rods tinted to match concrete. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC INTEG RALLY COLORED ARCHITECTURA L CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 1316-3 C. Form Release: by contractor 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Curing Compound for Colored Concrete: Curing compound shall comply with ASTM C309 and be approved by color additive manufacturer for use with colored concrete. Provide W-1000 Clear Cure & Seal manufactured by Davis Colors . B. Sealants: Joint sealers shall be type specified in Section 07900.Provide in color to match colored concrete. C. Supports for Reinforcing Bars: Use corrosion-resistant types at locations in contact with exposed surfaces. D. Cleaning Agents: Use products known to be compatible with colored concrete. 2.04 MIXES A. Color Additives: Mix in accord ance with manufacturer's instructions. Mix un til color additives are uniformly dispersed throughout mixture and disint egrating bags, if used, have disintegrated. B. Do not retemper mix by adding water in field. 2.05 CONCRETE COLORS A. Concrete Color: Kailua from color additive manufacturer's premium color line. Allow for up to two alternative color choices on Project. B. Dosage rate of color additive shall not exceed 10 percent of weight of cementitious materials in mix. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FINISHES ON FORMED SURFACES A. Provide the following finish es in accordance with ACI 301: 1. As-cast, smooth form finish, smooth rubbed. B. Stripping: Leave forms in place as long as prac tical. Remove forms when concrete has reached a consistent age to maintain uniformity of curing conditions throughout Project. 3.02 FLOOR FINISHES A. Broomed: Pull broom across freshly floated concrete to produce medium texture in straight lines perpendicular to main line of traffic. Do not dampen brooms. B. Trowel: Use steel trowel to produce smooth dense surface. Do not over-trowel or start troweling late. 3.03 PATCHING A. Fill holes and defects in concrete surface within 48 hours of form removal. B. Use the same patching materials and techniques that were approved on mock-up. C. Make patches with a stiff mortar made with materials from the same sources as the concrete. Adjust mortar mix proportions so dry patch matches dry adj acent concrete. Add white cement to mortar mix if necessary to lighten it. 3.04 CURING February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC INTEG RALLY COLORED ARCHITECTURA L CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 1316-4 A. Maintain concrete between 65° and 85°F (18° to 29°C) during curing. B. Colored Concrete: Apply curing compound in acco rdance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply curing compound at consistent time for each pour to maintain close color consistency. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Minor variations in appearance of colored concrete, wh ich are similar to natural variations in color and appearance of uncolored concrete, are acceptable. 3.06 CLEANING A. Efflorescence: Remove efflorescence as soon as practical after it appears. B. Use least aggressive cleaning techniques possible C. Wear protective eye wear, gloves, and clothing suitable to work and as required by cleaner manufacturer. D. If proprietary cleaning agents are used, pre-wet wall, test cleaning agent on a small, inconspicuous area, and check effects prior to proceeding. Begin cl eaning at the top and work down. Thoroughly rinse wall afterwards with clean water. Fo llow cleaner manufacturer's instructions. E. Do not use muriatic (hydrochloric) acid on colored concrete. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Paver Edge 32 1414-1 SECTION 32 1414 PAVER EDGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WARRANTY A. 15-year limited material warranty for asphalt/concrete paver restraint edging from manufacturing defects in workmanship or material. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ASPHALT /CONCRETE PAVE R RESTRAINT EDGING A. Product: Permaloc Asphalt Edge, with 0.210 inch (5.33 mm) thick exposed top lip x 4" (102 mm) high x 8 feet (2.44 meters) long, extruded aluminum, alloy 6005, T-5 hardness as manufactured by Permaloc Corporation, Holland MI 49424, telephone (800) 356-9660 or (616) 399-9600, or approved equal. Horizontal base to have upward facing angl e profile designed to integrate restraint and asphalt surfaces for straight-line an d curvilinear applications. Section sha ll have holes in base spaced 4 inches (102 mm) apart along its le ngth to receive anchors. B. Connection Method: Section ends shall splice together with long aluminum sliding connector recommended by manufacturer for use with 4” height edging. C. Anchors: 3/8 inch x 10 inches (9.5 mm x 254 mm) bright spiral steel spike, 3/16 inch x 1-1/2 inches (4.8 mm x 38 mm) or longer Ardox concrete nail, or drive pin fastener equal to Hilti DX 40 powder actuated pin or Ramset Trakfast Automatic Fastening System pin. D. Finish: Black DuraFlex Painted, AAMA 2603, electrostatically baked on paint. PART 3 EXECUTION Asphalt Base Pavement Installation: Sh all be as specified by project engineer. 3.01 INSTALLATION OF RESTRAINT EDGING A. Base Installation: 1. Extend base at least 6 inches (152 mm) beyond edge of restraint edging. 2. Level base beneath restraint edging. B. Edging Installation: 1. Install edging leaving 3/8" (9.5 mm) between sections for expansion. 2. Drive spikes through edging holes in base of asphalt restraint edging (or drive nails through aluminum base when using po wder actuated fastening syst em) at spaces for following applications: a. Anchor each section end with anchor. b. Aggregate Base: Spiral steel spikes at 4 inch es (102 mm) to 12 inches (305 mm) on center. c. Softer or Thinner Asphalt Base: 3/8 inch x 10 inches (9.5 mm x 254 mm) spiral steel spikes at 4 inches (102 mm) to 12 inch es (305 mm) on center spacing. d. Older, Harder, or Thicker Asphalt Base: H ilti DX A41 Fully Automatic Powder Actuated Tool is desirable where sufficient hold can be obtained. Provide 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) to 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) nail at 4 inches (102 mm) to 12 inches (305 mm) on center spacing with applicable charge recommended. e. Concrete Base: Hilti DX A41 Fully Automatic Powder Actuated Tool is desirable where Mary Hart Design LLC Paver Edge 32 1414-2 sufficient hold can be obtained. Provide 3/4 inches (19 mm) to 1 inches (25 mm) nail at 4 inches (102 mm) to 12 inches (305 mm) on center spacing with applicable charge recommended. Anchor into outer 1 inch (25 mm) of base of restraint edging and not less than 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) from edge of concrete. 3. Securely connect sections in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide additional anchors at closer spacing as necessary to firm ly secure edging for permanent intended use. C. Pavement Installation: 1. Install concrete pavers adjacent to and approximately ½ inch (12.7 mm) over top of restraint edging, depending on expected compaction results. Then, compact first pass with desired equipment within 6 inches (152 mm) of restraint edging. Subsequent passes may be directly against or over top of edging to ensure complete compaction of pavers. 2. Finish pavement shall be compacted and level with , but not to exceed 1/4 in ch (6.4 mm) above top of restraint edging. D. Backfill side of edging on turf side and compact backfill material along edging to provide top of edging at ½ inch (13 mm) above finish grade on turf side. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Site Stone 32-3200 - 1 SECTION 32-3200 SITE STONE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work in this section consists of furnishing and installation of stone cobble, boulder walls, and giant boulders over aggregate base course. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200 – Earthwork B. Section 02232 – Aggregate Base Course 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: Stone shall come from a single source. B. Construct a sample mock up of approved materials, 8-feet long by 2-feet 6-inches high. Show color, range of stone sizes and projection, proportion, texture, bond, reinforcement, color and tooling of mortar joints, and craftwork. Owner’s representative must approve sample location prior to construction. Do not begin any other stone work until the sample panel is approved. Approved panel shall become the standard of comparison for all stone work. Do not alter, move or destroy panel until the contract is complete. Contractor shall be responsible for removal and disposal of sample wall panel, unless mock up is located to remain part of work. C. The firm that is employed to construct the boulder walls and stone water features shall be customarily employed in the landscape or stone masonry industry. Prior to beginning construction of the walls, the Contractor must demonstrate to the Owner’s Representative that the firm has at least three years of previous experience construc ting stone walls and has completed at least five generally similar projects. The firm shall employ skilled labor with a working knowledge of stone masonry techniques. Journeyman or lead mason must have a minimum experience of 3 years. D. The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to reject the Contractor’s landscape/masonry personnel or stonework subcontractor based on these experiences and skill requirements. If rejected, the Contractor shall obtain personnel and/or a subcontractor having qualifications acceptable to the Owner’s Representative. E. No adjustments in prices or completion time will be allowed due to changes in personnel or delays in obtaining satisfactory personnel or subcontractor. F. Contractor shall guarantee their re spective work against defective ma terials or faulty workmanship for a period of 5 years. G. Contractor shall obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each ag gregate for the entire project. H. Contractor shall comply with the following standa rds, except where more stringent requirements are stated on the drawings or herein: 1. American National Standards Institute, ANSI/NSB 211 (A41.1), “Building Code Requirements for Masonry” 2. American Society for Testing Materials, ASTM. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Site Stone 32-3200 - 2 3. National Concrete Masonry Association, NCMA, “A Manual of Facts on Concrete Masonry.” 4. Uniform Building Code, UBC, Chapter 24 – Masonry. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submittals shall be made in accordance with the Speci al Conditions of the Contract. The following shall be submitted for the Work in this Section: A. Samples: Samples shall be submitted for the following: a. Provide a set of, at least, five stones to define the range and variability of color and show texture, dimensions, marking, chipping, and cracking. b. Samples shall not be less than 4-inches high x 12-inches wide x 4-inches deep and not larger than 8 - inches high x 18 – inches wide x 8 – in ches deep. Include in each set the full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in the finished work. c. Submit color samples of mortar and grout showing manufacturer’s full range of standard and optional colors, if applicable. Submit a cu red mortar sample using approved color. d. Submit a sample of each type of reinforcement, wall tie, flashing, and accessories. B. Materials Certificates: Submit copies of materials certificates for the following: 1. Stone: Test results for specific gravity, ab rasion, gradation and freeze/thaw. The source of the stone shall also be stated on test results. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store masonry materials on platforms or pallets. Store mortar materials under cover in a dry location. Protect steel materials from moisture and keep free of loose scale and rust. Handle masonry materials carefully to avoid chipping, breakage, contact with soil or other contaminating material. Deliver cementitious materials in the ma nufacturer’s unbroken, labeled containers. Care shall be taken in transportation and handling of stone, so as not to scratch or damage the stone, particularly the naturally weathered surfaces. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Site Stone 32-3200 - 3 A. Hot Weather Conditions Protect all masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun for 48 hours after installation when erected in an ambient air temperature of 99 o F (37 o C) in the shade with relative humidity less than 50%. B. Cold Weather Conditions Before erecting masonry during temperatures below 40 o F, submit a written statement and receive approval on methods proposed to heat masonry materials and protect masonry from freezing as required hereafter. Keep masonry completely cove red and free of frost, ice and snow at all times, maintain a minimum temperature of 40 o F (4 o C) when laid. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout between 70 o F (21 o C) and 100 o F (43 o C). Do not exceed 160 o F (71 o C) temperature of mixing water or of water and sand introduced to cement. Maintain air temperature on both side of masonry above 40 o F (4 o C) for at least 72 hours, 48 hours if high-early strength cement is used in the mortar in lieu of portland cement or masonry cement. Do not build upon frozen work. Do not place concrete footings on muddy or frozen surfaces. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Prior to the delivery of rock to the work site, an inspection of the quarry shall be arranged by the Contractor, and shall include the Contractor , Owner, Landscape Architect, and Quarry Representative. The quarry shall identify the rock source and procedures that will be used to stockpile and grade the sizes of stone specified. The Owner’s Re presentative and Architect may tag existing stone to be selected for the project. B. Upon delivering the stone to the site, Owner’s Representative will examine the stone and may reject any determined to be damaged or scratc hed on the desired exposed faces or unnaturally shaped. These stone shall be removed from the site at the Contractor’s expense. C. For boulders and boulder walls, stone features sh all incorporate a mix of generally rectangular shapes and sizes with bedding planes and proportions of stone in different sizes resembling the photos shown in the drawings. Natural bedding planes are to be laid horizontally; horizontal and vertical joints to be frequently interrupted. Stone shall appear naturally we athered; cut faces shall not be visible; and sharp edges shall not be exposed. D. For cobbles, stone features shall incorporate a mix of generally flat oval shapes and sizes ranging from 1”-3”. Colors to be brown, buff with sample to be approved by l.a. 2.02 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A. Geotextile fabric shall be Mirafi 140 N or approved equal. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Stone shall be placed individually in a manner to avoid displacing underlyi ng materials or placing undue impact force on the underlying materials. Stone shall not be dropped from a height of more than 2 inches. B. Stone shall be placed in position by the use of a multi-prong grapple device or suitable equipment for handling material. Dayline bu ckets and skips shall not be us ed for placement of stone. C. Stone shall be placed with weathered and most natural surface up , or as directed. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Site Stone 32-3200 - 4 D. Stone shall be placed in the presence of the Ow ner’s Representative, an d Owner’s Representative shall approve the placement before stone are back filled and/or mortared. The contractor should anticipate that rehandling of individual stone af ter initial placement will be required to achieve required elevations and placements. E. Backfill excavation around site boulder / stone as indicated on construction plans and in accordance with Sectio n 02200 and 02260. F. During all seasons, protect partially completed stonework against weather when work is not in progress. Cover top of wall with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane extending at least 2-feet down the stone face and anchor securely in place. G. Do not build on frozen work ; remove and replace stonework damaged by frost or freezing. H. Do not use stone units with chips, cracks, voids, stains or other defects which might be visible in the finished work unless otherwise accept able to the Owner’s Representative. I. Set stone in accordance with drawings an d adjust for proper setting of stone. 3.02 SITE BOULDER PLACEMENT OVER AGGREGATE BASE COURSE A. Excavate for placement of stone, such that to p of boulder will meet gr ade specified on grading plan and detail. Provide a fi rm, smooth, uniform surface. B. Contractor shall prepare and subgrad e according to Sections 2200 and 2260. E. Contractor shall place aggregate base course and site boulder in accordance with specifications and construction plans 3.03 ADJUSTMENT, PROTECTION, AND CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion of work, remove from the premises all surplus materials, tools, equipment, rubbish, debris, and rejected stone resulting from the work. B. Remove and replace stone units that are broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged. Where directed, remove and replace units that do not match adjoining stonework. Provide new matching units; install as specified and poi nt-up to eliminate evidence of replacement. Repoint defective and unsatisfactory joints as required to provide a neat, uniform appearance. B. Clean stonework not less than six days after co mpletion. Thoroughly clean and scrub completed wall with fiber brushes, using a mild alkaline abrasive cleaner that contains no caustic or harsh fillers. Do not use wire brushes or acid type cleaning agents. Begin at top and work down. Clean stone thoroughly, leaving no mortar stains or traces of cleaning compound. D. Protect the stonework from collapse, deterioration, discoloration or damage during subsequent construction and until acce ptance of the work. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC L andscape General Conditions 32 9000-1 SECTION 32 9000 LANDSCAPE GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 INSURANCE Upon entering into the Contract with Owner, the Landscape Contractor (“Contractor”) shall at his own expense procure and, at all times during the prosecution of the work and until final completion, maintain in full force and effect Workmen's Compensation Insurance and Public Liability Insurance. 1.02 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY During the performance of this Cont ract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, or national origin. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICE The Contractor may provide and maintain on the site for the duration of the work, a temporary office equipped with a telephone. 1.04 TEMPORARY TOILET FACILITIES The Contractor shall provide and maintain enclosed and weatherproof toilet facilities of the premises of sufficient size to accommodate all workmen on the job. 1.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES The Contractor shall provide or obtain, at his own expe nse, all temporary utility services such as water, gas, and electricity as necessary during construction of the work. This includes temporary lines, wiring, pipes, connections, disconnections and cost of electricity , gas or water used, lighting, electrical and other mechanical installations. 1.06 REFERENCES In addition to codes, laws, regulations, and the like mentioned elsewhere in the Contract Documents, Manufacturers' Specifications and other documents are referred to in certain sections of the Technical Specifications. These references, insofar as they apply, are a part of the Contract as if they were repeated in full therein. 1.07 GUARANTEE All work shall be guaranteed by the Contractor against defects resulting from inferior materials, equipment or workmanship for one year from the date of final completion of the Contract or from acceptance by the Owner, whichever is earlier. For items requi ring longer guaranty , see Specifications. 1.08 CONFLICTS In case of conflicts in the drawings, in the Specifi cations, and between the drawings and the Specifications, not otherwise resolved, the better grade of material , equipment, installation and application shall be considered the intent. In cases of conflict in dimens ions of equipment and material between the drawings and Specifications, the more costly size shall be consider ed the intent for establishing the Contract Price. 1.09 ALTERATION OF PLANS OR CHARACTER OF WORK February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC L andscape General Conditions 32 9000-2 A. The Owner reserves the right to make, at an y time during the progress of the work, such increases or decreases in quantities and such alterations in the details of construction, including alterations in the grade or alignment of the structure, as may be found to be necessary or desirable. Such increases or decreases and alterations shall not in validate the Contract, nor release the surety, and the Contractor agrees to perform th e work as altered, the Contractor agrees to perform the work as altered, the same as if it had been a part of the original Contract. B. Unless such alterations and increases or decr eases materially change the character of the work to be performed or the cost thereof, the altered work shall be paid for at the same unit prices as other parts of the work. No claim shall be made by th e Contractor for any loss of anticipated profits because of any such alteration, or by reason of any variation between the approximate quantities and the quantities of work as done. If, however, th e character of the work or the unit costs thereof are materially changed, an allowance shall be made on such basis as may have been agreed to in advance of the performance of the work, or in case no such basis has been previously agreed upon, then an allowance shall be made, either for or against the Contractor, in such amount as the Owner, Contractor and Landscape Architect may determine to be fair and equitable. C. Should the Contractor encounter or the Owner discover during the progre ss of the work subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing materially from those indicated in this Contract, or unknown physical conditions at the site of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract, the Owner shall be promptly notifie d in writing of such conditions before they are disturbed. The Owner will investigate the conditions and if he finds they do so materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost of, or the time required for performance of the Contract, an equitable adjustment will be made. 1.10 OWNER'S USE OF PROPERTY A. The Owner reserves the right to occupy or use any part or parts, or the entirety of the grounds, when safe for use or occupancy. B. The Contract will be deemed completed only when all the work contracted for is duly and properly performed and accepted by the Owner. C. In exercising the above right to occupy or us e incomplete facilities prior to the completion thereof, the Owner shall not make any use which will increase the cost to the Contractor, nor materially delay him in the execution of his contract without agreement and extension of time of completion. D. The Contractor shall not be responsible, beyond exercising reasonable precaution, for any damage to or theft of any equipment or facility not includ ed in this Contract placed upon the premises of this project by the Owner. 1.11 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND METHODS A. Brand or trade names and references to pr oducts of specific manufactur ers appearing in these Specifications are used to establish the sta ndard of quality, utility, appearance and methods required for a given item. Other materials, equipment, and methods may be used, provided approval is first obtained in writing from the Landscape Architect. B. Substitutions will be consider ed only when requested by the Contractor in writing, accompanied by complete data, including samples, in dupli cate, describing in detail the item offered for substitution. Such substitution w ill be accepted only when, in the judgment of the Landscape Architect, it is equal in every respect to the item specified. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC L andscape General Conditions 32 9000-3 C. Requests for substitutions must be submitted by the Contractor within thirty-five (35) calendar days following the award of the Contract. Moreover, it is suggested that requests for substitutions be submitted at least ten (10) days before the bid opening date in order to expedite their review. D. The installation of an appr oved substituted item shall constitute acceptance by the Contractor of all responsibility for any changes in space requiremen ts, construction details or methods, connections and alterations in related work made necessary by such substitutions. 1.12 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FURNISHED BY THE OWNER Up to seven (7) sets of Landscape Plans and Specifica tions will be supplied to the Contractor by the Owner without charge. 1.13 STANDARDS A. Any material specified by reference to the nu mber, symbol, or title or a specified standard such as a Commercial Standard, a Federal Specification, a trade association standard, or other similar standard, shall comply with the requirements in th e latest revision thereo f and any amendments of supplement thereto, in effect on the date of Inv itation for Bids, except as limited to type, class or grade, or modified in such reference. B. The standard referred to, except as modified in the Specifications, shall have full force and effect as though printed in these Specifications. These standards are not furnished to bidders for the reason that the manufacturers and trades involved are assumed to be familiar with their requirements. The Landscape Architect will furnish upon request information as to how copies of the standards referred to may be obtained. 1.14 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS Where it is required in the Specifications that materi als, products, processes, equipment, or the like to be installed or applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, directions, or specifications, or words to this effect, it shall be construed to mean that said ap plication or installation shall be in strict accordance with printed instructions furnished by the manufacturer of the material concerned for use under conditions similar to those at the job site. 1.15 PROTECTION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT Existing improvements and equipment shall be protected by the Contractor from damage, debris and exposure to weather resulting from the work. 1.16 PAYMENT FOR PLANT MATERIAL ON HAND A. No partial payment will be made on living or perishable plant materials until planted. 1.17 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE A. The Owner, his Engineers and Landscape Arch itects, the Town Council, the Town Manager, and the Town Engineer or his authorized assistants, or other Town employees shall not be answerable or accountable in any manner for any loss or damage that may happen to the work or any part thereof, or to any material or equipment used in performing the work, or for injury or damage to any person or persons, either workmen or the public, or for damage to adjoining property from any cause whatsoever during the pr ogress of the work or at an y time before final acceptance. B. Contractor's Responsibility for Work February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC L andscape General Conditions 32 9000-4 Except as provided above, until the formal acceptance of the work by the Town, the Contractor shall have the charge and care thereof and shall bear the risk of injury or damage to any part thereof by the section of the elements or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution or from the non-execution of the work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and make good all injuries or damages to any portion of the work occasioned by any of the above causes before final acceptance and shall bear the expense thereof. C. No personal Liability Neither the Owner, his Engineer, the Town Council, Town Manager, Town Engineer, nor any other officer or authorized assistant or agent shall be personally responsible for any liability arising under the Contract. D. Responsibility of City The Town, the Council, the Town Manager and the Town Engineer shall not be held responsible for the care or protection of any material or parts of the work prior to final acceptance. 1.18 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY A. The Contractor shall so conduct operations as to cause the least possible obstruction and inconvenience to the public. The Contractor sh all furnish, erect and maintain such fences, barriers, lights, and signs as are necessary to give adequate warning to the public at all times that the work is in progress and of any dangerous conditions to be encountered as a result of the work or of the presence of equipment or machinery. B. Dust control if necessary shall be the responsi bility of the Contractor. This shall be accomplished by the Contractor whenever so directed by the Landscape Architect. The method of dust control utilized shall be approved by the Town of Vail in advance of use. 1.19 INSPECTIONS A. Authority of the Landscape Architect The Landscape Architect or Town of Vail representative shall decide all questions which may arise as to the quality or acceptability of material s furnished and work perf ormed, and as to the manner of performance and rate of progress of th e work; all questions which arise as to the interpretation of the Plan s and Specifications; all questions as to the acceptable fulfillment of the Contract on the part of the Contractor; and all questions as to claims and compensation. B. Plans All authorized alterations affecting the requirements and information given on the approved Plans shall be in writing. No changes shall be made of any plan or drawing after the same has been approved by the Landscape Architect, except by direction of the Landscape Architect. Working drawings or plans for any structure not included in the plans furnished by the Owner shall be approved by the Landscape Architect be fore any work involvin g these plans may be performed, unless approval be waived in writi ng by the Landscape Architect. It is mutually agreed, however, that approval by the Landscape Ar chitect of the Contractor's working plans does not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for accuracy of dimensions and details and that the Contractor shall be responsible for agreement and conformity of his working plans with the approved plans and specifications. C. Interpretations of Plans and Specifications February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC L andscape General Conditions 32 9000-5 Should it appear that the work to be done, or any matter relative thereto, is not sufficiently detailed or explained in these Specificati ons, Plans and Details, the Contractor shall contact the Landscape Architect for such further explanations as may be necessary, and shall conform to such explanation or interpretation, so far as ma y be consistent with the original intent. In the event of any discrepancy between any drawing and the figures written thereon, the figures shall be taken as correct. D. Superintendent 1. Before initial work is begun, the Contractor and his Superintendent or Foreman shall file with the Landscape Architect addresses an d telephone numbers where they can be reached during hours when the work is not in progress. 2. The Contractor or representative Superintendent or Foreman shall be on the work site during job progress who is competent to receive and carry out any instructions that may be given him by the Landscape Architect in English. 3. Whenever the Contractor is not present on any part of the work where it may be desired to give direction, orders will be given by the Landscape Architect in writing and shall be received and obeyed by the Supe rintendent or Foreman in char ge of the particular work in reference to which orders are given. E. Lines and Grades The Contractor shall notify the Owner's Engineer of his requirements for stakes or marks a reasonable length of time in adva nce of his need therefore. Stak es and marks set by the Owner's Engineer shall be carefully preserved by the C ontractor. In case such stakes and marks are destroyed or damaged by reason of the Contractor's operations, the cost of replacing or restoring them may be deducted from any moneys due or to become due the Contractor. All distances and measurements are given and will be made in a horizontal plane. All elevations shown on the Plans represent vertical distances in feet. Conformance to all dimensions and elevations shown on the plans will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Three consecutive points shown on the same rate of slope must be used in common in order to detect any variation from straight grade; and, should such discrepancy exist, it must be reported to the Engineer, or the Contractor shall be responsibl e for any error in the finished work. All grades are to be established with an accurate level. F. Inspections 1. The Landscape Architect, Town of Vail repres entatives, or authorized assistants shall at all times have access to the work during construction, and sh all be furnished with every reasonable facility for ascertaining full knowledge respecting the progress, workmanship, and character of materials used and employed in the work. The inspection of the work shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations to fulfill the Contract as prescribed. Defectiv e work shall be made good, and unsuitable materials may be rejected, notwithstanding the fact that such defective work and unsuitable materials have been previously overlooked by the inspector. 2. Inspection shall include laboratory tests of materials and all appurtenant work for the adequate control of the improvement. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC L andscape General Conditions 32 9000-6 3. The Contractor shall acquaint himself with the inspection procedures and requirements of the Town of Vail relating to final acceptance of the work. 4. Authority and Duties of Inspector Inspectors, employed by the Owner, shall be authorized to inspect all work done and all material furnished. Such inspection may extend to all or any part of the work and to the preparation, fabrication, or manufacture of the ma terials to be used. He is authorized to call the attention of the Contractor to any failure of the work or materials to conform to the Specifications and Contract. He shall ha ve the authority to reject materials or suspend the work until any questions at issue can be referred to and decided by the Landscape Architect. The inspector shall in no case act as forema n or perform other duties for the Contractor, nor interfere with the management of the work by the latter. Any advice which the inspector may give the Contractor shall not be construed as binding to the Landscape Architect in any way, or releasing the Contractor from fulfilling all of the terms of the Contract. If the Contractor refuses to suspend operations on verbal order, the inspector shall issue a written order giving the reason for shutting down the work. After placing the order in the hands of the man in charge, the inspector sh all immediately leave the job. Work done during the absence of the in spector will not be accepted. H. Removal of Defective Work All work which is defective in its construction or deficient in any of the requirements of these Specifications shall be remedied, or removed an d replaced by the Contractor in an acceptable manner. Upon failure on the part of the Contractor to comply forthwith with any order of the Landscape Architect made under the provisions of this article, the Landscape Architect shall have authority to suspend all work until defective work is reme died, or removed and replaced, and unauthorized work is removed. I. Conformity with Plans and Allowable Deviation Finished surfaces in all cases shall conform with the lines, grades, cross sections, and dimensions shown on the approved plans. Deviations from the approved plans, as may be required by the exigencies of construction, will be determined in all cases by the Landscape Architect and authorized in writing. J. Coordination of Plans, Details and Specifications These Specifications, the Plan and Details, and a ll supplementary documents are essential parts of the Contract or Agreement and a re quirement occurring in one is a binding as though occurring in all. They are intended to be cooperative, to describe, and to provide for a complete work. Specifications shall govern over Plans and Details and Technical Specifications shall govern over General Conditions and Plans. K. Assistance by Contractor The Contractor shall furnish the Landscape Archit ect and/or his assistants with any labor required and necessary for the thorough inspection or culling over or the removing of defective materials, or for thorough examination into any of the work, or for any other purpose required in the discharge of their respective duties. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC L andscape General Conditions 32 9000-7 L. Cooperation of the Contractor The Contractor shall have available on the wo rk site at all times, one copy of the Plans and Specifications. The Contractor shall give to the work the constant attention necessary to facilitate the progress thereof and he shall cooperate with the Landscape Architect and his Inspectors and with other Contractors in every way possible. The Landscap e Architect shall allocate the work and designate the sequence of construction in case of controversy between Contractors. The Contractor shall have a competent English-speaking superintendent on the work site at all times who is fully authorized as his agent, thorou ghly understanding the Plans and Specifications and shall receive and fulfill instructions from the Landscape Architect, or his authorized representative. M. Final Inspection Whenever the work provided an d contemplated by the Contractor shall have been satisfactorily completed and the final cleaning up is performed, upon written application by the Contractor, the Landscape Architect or Town of Vail repr esentative will make the final inspection. 1.20 PUBLIC UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall notify in writing, all public utility companies of the approximate time that the work set forth on these Specifications will start. Un less previously given, such notifications shall be made at the time of ex ecution of the Agreement. B. In order to avoid the removal or disturbance of the proposed improvements, the Contractor shall cooperate with the utility companies and allow su ch companies sufficient time to construct, reconstruct or extend their facilities before subgrades or surfaces are constructed. C. Existing Water Service The work shall proceed so that minimum damage will be done to water services and in the event that such services are broken or damaged, the Cont ractor shall, immediately, at his expense, repair such damage in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer in order that the water supply will not be interrupted for a period greater than one-half hour. If such interruption is sustained, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify the occupant s of the premises to which said services are connected so that no damage w ill accrue on said premises. When ever damage is done to water meters or to services between Upper Eagle River Water and Sanitation District mains and said meters, the needed repairs and the cost thereof be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall notify Eagle River Water and Sanitation District at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of such time when its services will be required. D. Gas, Electric and Telephone Services Caution shall be exercised in the prosecution of the work so that gas, electric and telephone services will not be damaged. The Contractor shall notify the Holy Cross Electric Company, and the Telephone Company at least twen ty-four (24) hours in advance of such time that excavation or other work is to be done along any section of the work, in order that said companies may do such work as is required to maintain uninterrupted service to all premises. PART 2 REFERENCE STANDARDS February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC L andscape General Conditions 32 9000-8 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: For products or workmanship specified by association, trade or federal standards, comply with requirements of standards, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. 1. No provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether of not specifically incorporated by re ference in the Contract Documents) shall be effective to change duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Landscape Architect or any of their consultants, agents or employees from those set forth in Contract Documents, or shall it be effective to assign to Landscap e Architect or any cons ultants, agents or employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct furnishing or performance of work or any duty or authority to undertake res ponsibilities contrary to provisions of General and Supplementary Conditions. B. Effective Date: Date of standard is that in eff ect as of documents date except when specific date is specified or when standard is part of a pplicable code which included edition date. C. Copies: When required by individual section, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy at job site during work. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hal l Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Planting Preparation 32 9100-1 SECTION 32 9100 PLANTING PREPARATION PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK Landscape Contractor (“Contractor”) is to furnish all labor, equipment, transportation and materials to complete the landscape planting as shown on the L drawings and herein specified. 1.02 RELATED WORK NOT IN CLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Landscape General Conditions B. Topsoil, Mulch, and Seed Specifications C. Irrigation 1.03 GRADING The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining finished grades in all planting areas, and for executing and fine grading necessary for surface drainage and uniformity, or incidental to all planting operations, per Section 1.05 below. Positive drainage shall be maintained away from all structures. 1.04 MATERIALS A. Fertilizer: Commercial Fertilizer shall be Osmicote, or equal in pelleted form, and shall be complete, of which part of the elements are derived from organic sources containing in available form by weight: Nitrogen, Phosphoric Acid, and Potash. If commercial fertilizer having this analysis is not obtainable, other commercial fe rtilizer may be used providing it meets with the approval of the Landscape Architect. B. Staking: All trees shall be staked with 2 to 3 green metal stakes per tree in accordance with the planting details. Stakes are green, 6' metal t-stake posts. Trees ar e to be guyed with #12 wire and fastened to the tree with green nylon tree straps. Aspen clumps are to have the main stem guyed. See Planting Detail Sheet. C. Plants: Plants shall be the variety, quantity and size indicated on the Plant Schedule, unless a substitution is otherwise approved by landscape architect. 1. Quality and size shall conform to standard s set forth in American Standard for Nursery Stock (ANSI 260.1) and or the ALCC Specifications Handbook. . Nursery-grown stock only shall be used, unless noted, and which are free from insect pests and diseases. Approved collected material is called out in the Plant Schedule. 2. All plants shall comply with Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant diseases and infestations. Inspection certif icates required by law shall accompany each shipment of plants, and certificates shall be delivered to the Landscape Architect. The Contractor shall obtain clearance from th e County Agricultural Commissioner, as required by law, before planting plants delivered from the outside the County in which they are to be planted. 3. All plants shall be true to type or name indicated, and shall be tagged in accordance with the standard practice recommended by the American Association of Nurserymen; February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hal l Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Planting Preparation 32 9100-2 however, determination of plant species or variety will be made by the Landscape Architect, and the decisi on shall be final. 4. Plants shall be healthy, shapely, and we ll rooted; and roots shall show no evidence of having been rootbound, restricted or deformed. Root condition of plants in containers will be determined by removal of soil from the roots of not less than two (2) plants, nor more than 2% of the total number of plants of each species or variety, except when container-grown plants are from a several sources, the roots of not less than two (2) plants of each species or variety from each source will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. In case the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject the entire lot (s) of plants represented by the defective samples. All plants rendered unsuitable for planting because of this inspection shall be immediately disposed of off the site. 5. Each plant shall be handled and packed in the approved manner for that species or variety, and all necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that the plants will arrive at the site of the work in proper condition for successful growth. Trucks used for transporting plants shall be equipped with covers to protect plants from windburn. 6. Substitutions will not be permitted, except as follows: a. If proof is submitted to the Landscap e Architect that any pl ant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of nearest equivalent size or variety with an equitable adju stment of Contract Price. b. Such proof shall be substantiated and submitted in writing by the Contractor within thirty-five (35) days after th e effective date of Notice to Proceed. 7. Trees shall have straight trunks with the leader intact, undamaged and uncut, with branching beginning at a height taller than 6’. All old abrasions and cuts shall be completely calloused over. 8. All trees and shrubs shall be measured wh en their branches are in normal position. Height and spread dimensions indicated refer to the main body of the plant, and not from branch or root tip to tip. Indicated sizes shall be before pruning. 9. Plants shall not be pruned prior to delivery, except upon approval of the Landscape Architect. 10. Contractor is to provide the name and location of the tree supplier for the Landscape Architects / Owners review and approval of trees prior to delivery to the project site. The Owner reserves the right to termina te the contract if the trees are not acceptable to the Landscape Architect and the Contractor is not able to produce acceptable trees. Plant materials shall also be subject to inspection and approval by the Landscape Architect upon delivery to the site. 11. Aspen trees called out as clump form means that at least one of the individual tree stems in the clump needs to be the size called out for on the Landscape Schedule. The other stems in the clump may be smaller than the dominant stem. 12. Spruce or other specified evergreen trees are to be Specimen Grade-A quality trees full in appearance with layered branches (not shear ed to a solid Christmas Tree form), cone shape, with leader intact without bare spots. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hal l Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Planting Preparation 32 9100-3 D. Mulch: Locally available Shredded Pine Mulch is available at the Town of Vail for use at shrub beds, conifer beds and tree and shrub basins. Shredded Pine shall be well composted with a minimum of sticks or debris. E. Wildflower Carpet: Perennial Wildflower Sod available from Stevens Home Care, Inc. F. Backfill: Planting backfill mix to consists of 80% native topsoil and 20% Canadian sphagnum peatmoss with fertilizer . Acceptable substitute for th e sphagnum peatmoss is compost from Eagle Valley Sewage in Edwards. 1.05 FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION A. Prior to any planting bed preparation or plan ting, finish grade all planting areas. Fill or cut as needed to remove surplus soil, and rake areas to a smooth, uniform grade as indicated on the Plans. Slope all planting areas to drain. Fini shed grades shall be a pproved by the Landscape Architect before any planting is done. B. All planting areas shall be thoroughly wet down and sprinkler coverage and operation confirmed. Allow soil to dry so as to be workable and cultivate if necessary to dry out. C. Spread 10 lbs. of iron sulf ate evenly per 1,000 square feet of planting areas if soil tests indicate iron deficiency. Incorporate iron sulfate into top 6 inches of so il in shrub areas immediately after approval of the Landscape Archit ect. Iron sulfate may be incorp orated into soil with soil amendment. Do not allow iron sulfate to stain pavement, wood or other surfaces on structures. D. Soil Amendment and Fertilizers: Spread evenly over all planting areas, including shrub and ground cover beds at the following rates: 1. Soil amendment: For shrub and ground cover planting beds add 2” of sphagnum peatmoss and 2” of compost to be integrated with topsoil as specified in Section 32-9113 with a rototiller. 2. Fertilizer: 25 lbs. per 1,000 square feet. Incorporate into top 8 inches of soil. E. Scarify all planting areas that become comp acted prior to planting to a minimum depth of 12”. F. Rake all areas to remove rocks 1 inch or larger in size, sticks and debris. Drag to a smooth, even surface. Grade to form all swales , pitch to catch basins, street cu rbs, etc., to insure proper surface drainage. G. Secure Landscape Architect 's approval before planting. 1.06 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING A. Mark tree and any B&B shrub locations using 12” wo od stakes with colored flagging and size of plant material indicated with bl ack waterproof marker. Locations shall be approved and / or adjusted by the Landscape Arch itect or Owners Representative before plant holes are dug. Container shrub, perennials and gr oundcovers to be placed according to the plan. Contractor shall include in the base bid the assumption that the Landscape Architect or Ow ners Representative will review and adjust plant pl acement prior to planting. B. Dig pits circular in outline with vertical sides as follows: 1. One-gallon containers: 18-inch diameter. 2. Shrub containers: Two times the diameter of the container February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hal l Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Planting Preparation 32 9100-4 3. Larger size materials: Two to three time s the diameter of the container/ball per details C. After pits are dug, break sides to open wall of pit for root penetration. D. Backfill plant holes with backfill mix as specif ied, free from rocks, clods, or lumpy material. Backfill about 1/3 of the hole with mix; place plant and water be fore adding remainder of backfill. E. Set plants in backfill to such depth that the top of the plant ball will be 3 inches above finished grade. Remove all twine, rope and burlap from top and sides of rootball and top 2/3 of wire basket from root ball. Backfill rest of hole and soak thoroughly. F. Water backfill until saturated to the full depth of the hole. Hole shall drain completely within 1/2 hour. G. Build 3-4” tall watering basins around trees and shrubs and water to drain through root ball. H. Fertilize each tree and shrub imme diately after planting, as follows: 1. One-gallon-can plant: 1/4 pint. 2. Five-gallon-can plant: 1/2 pint. 3. Fifteen-gallon-can and larger: 1/2 pint. Spread fertilizer evenly over surface of pl ant basin, and till into ground surface. Water immediately. I. Permeable weed barrier fabric is NOT to be installed under mulch within tree and shrub beds in non-planted (groundcover or perennials) areas. J. Spread minimum 3" of mulch around tree and shrub basins and in shrub beds, such that all ground is concealed. 1.07 PLANTING GROUND COVERS AND PERENNIALS – N/A Town of Vail to supply and install After soil preparation has been done (as indicated in Section 1.05 above): A. Apply general fertilizer per manufacturer's inst ructions to insure good plant growth. Amount and type to be approved by the Landscape Architect. B. Plant ground cover and perennial plants in evenly spaced rows with staggered spacing at equal intervals (see planting details). Water immediately after planting and in sufficient quantity to wet the soil around the plants to a depth of 8 inches. C. Add 2” minimum depth of “Soil Pep” mulch to the perennial and ground cover beds, with no weed barrier fabric. D. After the plants have been thoroughly watered, allow the soil to adequately dry to provide a workable surface. Rake the area to provide a unifor m even surface. 1.08 WATERING All plant materials shall be watered immediately after planting. After the first watering, water shall be applied to all plants as often and in sufficient amount as conditions may require to keep the plants in a healthy and vigorous growing condition until completion of the Contract and Acceptance. 1.09 MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hal l Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Planting Preparation 32 9100-5 A. From the time plants are planted until final a cceptance of landscape insta llation, plants and lawns shall be watered, fertilized, and trash and debris sh all be kept removed; weeds shall be controlled, and replacements shall be made; all as specified and full compensation for such work will be considered as included in the Contract Price. B. All plant materials must be healthy and full in appearance or be subject to rejection by the Landscape Architect and / or the Owner. Rejec tion of plant materials not in acceptable condition or appearance can occur at any time up to Final Acceptance. Plant materials rejected are to be immediately removed from the site and replaced with the same plant material specified on the plans. 1.10 CLEAN-UP A. Remove all trash, rubbish, construction and pl anting materials, scraps, etc., from the site. Leave area in a neat, sightly condition. B. During construction, and on a daily basis remove any rocks and debris and remove all empty plant containers. 1.11 PRE-MAINTENANCE PERIOD INSPECTION AND APPROVAL OF PLANTING Prior to commencement of the Plan ting Maintenance Period, the Contract or shall receive approval of the installed planting. The Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect a minimum of seven (7) days prior to the requested inspection. Before the inspection, the following conditions shall exist: A. All construction work shall be completed. B. All planted areas shall be neat and clean. C. All plants shall be installed and must be healthy. D. Trees and tree stakes shall be straight. E. Water basins are built and are intact. F. All flagging and plant tags removed from plant materials. G. All plant materials must be full and healthy in appearance. H. Preliminary and Final Inspection of the Irri gation System which includes providing the as-built reproducible Irrigation Plan prior to final review of the irrigati on system. See Irrigation Section. 1.12 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT A. Guarantee all plant materials for two (2) years from the date of Final Acceptance stated on the Certificate of Final Completion. B. Replace all dead plants no t in a vigorous condition immediatel y as directed by the Landscape Architect. Plants used for replacement must be of the same kind and size as indicated on the drawings, and planted as outlined above. All repl acement of plants shall be at the expense of the Contractor. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Co ncert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Topsoil 32 9113-1 SECTION 32 9113 TOPSOIL PART 1 GENERAL 1) SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and spread topsoil on prepared areas. B. Strip topsoil from on-site locations and place in stockpile. C. Spread stockpiled topsoil on prepared areas. 2) RELATED WORK A. Section 32 9200: Turf Sod B. Section 32 9201: Seeding C. Section 32 9100: Planting Preparation 3) REFERENCES A. AASHTO T 88: Particle Size Analysis of Soils. B. AASHTO T 194: Determination of Organic Matter in Soils by Wet Combustion. 4) SUBMITTALS A. For Contractor-furnished topsoil: A minimum of 20 working days before delivery of soil, submit to the Landscape Architect the labora tory test results from each topsoil source to be used. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1) CONTRACTOR FURNISHED TOPSOIL A. Meet the following: i) PH : 6.0 to 8.0 ii) EC : (Electrical Conductivity): less than 0.4 ds/cm iii) SAR : (Sodium Adsorption Ratio): less than 10. B. Organic matter: 1. 3% minimum 2. Determined by the release upon combustion, Walkley-Black or modified Walkley-Black testing method. AASHTO T 194. C. Textural classification: 1. Topsoil to be a sandy loam, loam, silt loam not exceeding the following percentiles. Soil component Percentile Range Sand 20 to 50 Silt 20 to 50 Clay 5 to 30 February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Co ncert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Topsoil 32 9113-2 2. Determine particle size analysis by the hydrometer testing method. D. Topsoil to be free of: 1. Subsoils (no B or C horizon soils) 2. Coarse sand and gravel or rock larg er than 3 inches in any dimension 3. Sticks, roots 4. Stiff clay, hard clods or hard pan soils 5. Trash, litter or refuse 6. Weeds and weed seeds. E. Topsoil may contain a maximum of 5 percent rock smaller than 3 inches. F. Amendments: Based on the soil test and ph, fertilizer, lime or iron sulfate may need to be applied to balance soil based on soil test recommendations. Soil amendments and compost is to be added at a rate of 3-5 yards per 1000 s.f. A balance of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash and sulfur is recommended to establish a healthy root system. 2) SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL - CONTRACTOR FURNISHED MATERIAL A. Obtaining Soil Samples: 1. Obtain samples from a thin slice of soil cut from the side of a freshly dug hole or by using a soil auger or sampling tube. 2. Mix the several small samples taken from variou s places around the source together to produce a composite sample. 3. More than one composite sample may be required if the topsoil horizon changes significantly across the source. 4. Store samples in a clean container at room temperature and out of direct sunlight. 5. Label the location and date on each sample container. 6. Provide additional soil samples for verification at request of Landscape Architect. B. Soil Testing: Submits soil samples to an approved independent soil testing laboratory capable of performing the tests listed in this Section, article, “Contractor Furnished Topsoil.” A partial list of acceptable testing laboratories includes: CSU Extension Soil, Water & Plant Testing Lab Campus Delivery 1120 NESB Room A319 Fort Collins CO 80523-1120 Phone: (970) 491-5061 Brigham Young University Soil and Plant Analysis Laboratory 255 WIDB Provo, UT 84602 (801) 378-2760 PART 3 EXECUTION 1) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Complete final grading, trench settling and surface prepar ation before placing topsoil. B. On steep cut slopes steeper than 1:2 and higher th an 15 feet that require the placement of topsoil, place and spread topsoil as the slope is being cons tructed. Finish according to this Section 3.3 “Spread Stockpiled and Contractor-Furnished Topsoil”. C. On the remaining topsoiled areas not covered unde r this article, line B, Contractor is responsible for providing a suitable topsoil surface just be fore seeding. Suitable topsoil surface is: 1. Non-compacted surface finished according to this Section, article, “Spread Stockpiled and Contractor-Furnished Topsoil,” paragraphs C and D. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Co ncert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Topsoil 32 9113-3 2. Weed free. 3. Finish grade provides a uniform surface with smooth transitions between grade changes and disturbed areas. D. Do not strip or handle wet topsoil. E. Establish finish grade at 1 inch below the top of all walks, curbs, mow strips and other hard surfaces for areas receiving grass seed or turf sod. F Sod Areas: Scarify compacted subgrade to a 6-in ch depth to bond topsoil to subsoil. Place topsoil to a minimum depth of 4-inches after settle ment. Topsoil shall be free from weeds, sod, clods and stones larger than 1-inch, toxic substa nces, litter or other deleterious material. Spread evenly and grade to elevations and slopes show n. Hand rake areas inaccessible to machine grading. G. Trees, and Shrubs Beds: Scarify compacted subgrade to a 12-inch depth to bond topsoil to subsoil. Fully amend subgrade with 4” topsoil and 1/3rd well rotted manure fertilizer. Topsoil shall be free from weeds, sod, clods and stones la rger than 1-inch, toxic substances, litter or other deleterious material. Spread evenly and grade to elevations and slopes shown. Hand rake areas inaccessible to machine grading. U tilize salvaged topsoil as the top la yer to the extent available. H. Town of Vail to provide topsoil in perennial and annual beds – leave finished grade 12” low. 3.2 STRIP AND STOCKPILE TOPSOIL A. Strip the topsoil 1. Only from areas identified on th e plans or approved by the L.A.2. To a depth identified on the plans or approved by the L.A. B. Remove and dispose of any roots larger than 2 inches in diameter or 12 inches in length. C. Stockpile stripped topsoil: 1. At locations acceptable to the Landscape Architect. 2. So that placement or activity around the stockpile does not damage or impact any existing trees, shrubs or environmentally sensitive areas. 3. Grade to minimize erosion on and around the stockpiles. Provide soil erosion control measures if topsoil will be unused for greater than 4 weeks. 3.3 SPREAD STOCKPILED AND/OR CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED TOPSOIL A. Once grading is completed, loosen all compacted soil by rototilling to a depth of 4” incorporating 3-5 yards per 1000 s.f. compost or soil amendments, mixing thoroughly into the soil. B. Clear area to receive topsoil of all trash, debris, we eds, and rock 3 inches or larger, and dispose of objectionable material in an approved manner. Place and spread the stockpiled topsoil to be minimum of 4” depth after settlement. Hand ra ke areas inaccessible to machine grading. C. On slopes 1:3 and flatter, place and evenly spread topsoil along the contour, or cat-track the slopes to create continuous cleat tracks that run parallel with the contours. D. On slopes steeper than 1:3, cat-track the slopes to create continuous cleat tracks that run parallel with the contours. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Sod Turf 32 9200-1 SECTION 32 9200 SOD TURF PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK Landscape Contractor (“Contractor”) is to furnish all labor, equipment, transportation and materials to complete installation of the work described herein in strict accordance with the drawings and specifications. 1.02 RELATED WORK NOT IN CLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Topsoil B. Planting Preparation C. Irrigation D. Planting Maintenance 1.03 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Topsoil as defined in the Topsoil Specification shall installed within all sod turf areas to a minimum depth of 4”. Soil tests shall be made to determine requirements for both lime and fertilizer. See Topsoil Specification for official soil testing laboratories in Colorado. B. Soil Amendments: 1. Fertilizer: All fertilizers sh all be uniform in composition and free- flowing. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the job site fully labeled accordi ng to applicable state fertilizer laws. Fertilizer application rates shall be determined by soil tests. Fertilizer shall be distributed uniformly over the area to be sodded with turfgrass. 2. Lime: Lime material shall be ground limestone and shall comply with existing state and federal regulations. 3. Phosphorus: If a soil test indicates phosphoru s is needed, apply to the area and work into the soil to a depth of 3 to 4 inches. 4. Iron sulfate C. Sod: Turfgrass sod species shall be the vari ety indicated on the Plan t Schedule noted on the plans. Sand based turf growing medium is preferred. 1.04 FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION A. Grades on the turfgrass areas to be top soile d which have been previously established in conformance with the drawings and/or other applicable specifications shall be maintained. B. After the areas to be top soiled have been brough t to grade, and immediately prior to dumping and spreading the topsoil, the sub-grade shall be loosened by disking or rototilling to a depth of at least 3 to 4 inches to permit bonding of the topsoil to the subsoil. C. All sod areas shall have irrigation system installed before finished grading. D. Soil Amendment and Fertilizers: Spread evenly ov er all turf areas at the following rates: 1. Acidic Soil: When a chemical and mechanical analysis shows that the subsoil is either highly acid or composed of h eavy clays, ground limestone shall be spread at the rate recommended by the testing service. Liming material shall contain at least 50% total February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Sod Turf 32 9200-2 oxides (Calcium oxide plus magnesium oxide) and 50% of material must pass through a 100-mesh sieve with 98% passing through a 20-mesh sieve. Lime shall be distributed uniformly over designated areas and worked into the soil in conjunction with the tillage operation described below. 2. Iron deficiency: If soil tests indicate an iron mineral deficiency in the soil, spread 10 lbs. of iron sulfate evenly per 1,000 square feet of planting areas. Iron sulfate may be incorporated into soil with soil amendment. Do not allow iron sulfate to stain pavement, wood or other surf aces on structures. 3. Fertilizer: Broadcast on all sod areas co mmercial fertilizer 6-20-20 at 25 lbs. per 1,000 square feet (or as fertilizer ma nufacturer directs) prior to so d installation. Incorporate into top 4 inches of soil. E. Topsoil: Shape and finish grade with uniformly distributed topsoil, leaving finished grade approximately 1 inch lower than curbs, sidewalk, concrete paving blocks to accommodate sod thickness. Lightly roll surface and reshape to level humps and hollows, soil shall be a minimum depth of 4” inches after firming. Any irregular ities in the surface shall be corrected in order to prevent the formation of depressions or crowns. To psoil shall not be placed while in a frozen or muddy condition or when the sub-grade is excessively wet, or in a condition that may otherwise be detrimental to proper grading or proposed turfgr ass sod installation. Secure Landscape Architect's approval before placing sod. F. Rake all areas to remove rocks 1 inch or larger in size, sticks and debris, and to create a smooth, even surface. Grade to form all swales, pitch to cat ch basins, street curbs, etc., to insure proper surface drainage. 1.05 PLANTING SODDED LAWN A. Sod shall be defined as living, growing grass, consisting of blades, crowns, rhizomes, roots, and attached soil. Density of sod shall be such that the sod slabs may be handled, lifted, and moved without substantial breaking or tearing. Sod shall be healthy and free of weeds and injurious insects when delivered. Sod shall be cut from mature turf fields with a sod cutter in even sized slabs which may be rolled or folded for transpor t; and the slabs shall be reasonably uniform in thickness; and the turf evenly mowed prior to harves t. Average thickness of sod shall be 3/4 to 1 inch. B. After all grading has been completed, the soil shall be irrigated within 12 to 24 hours prior to laying the turfgrass sod so as not to lay the turfgrass on soil that is dry and powdery. C. Sod slabs shall be laid promptly after delivery to job site, within 36 hours of harvest and tranport. In hot, dry or windy weather, the staked sod at job site shall be lightly sprinkled with water to prevent slab edges from excessive drying. Sod slab ends and sides must be butted together for a close fit without overlapping; stagger the ends. Sodded areas will be lightly rolled after a light initial watering, then irrigate heavily to assure water penetration in the soil to a depth of 8 inches. D. Sod should stop short at an appropriate di stance from any existing tr ees. The area immediately around the crown should not be disturbed except for clean-up work. The exact line around trees shall be set by the Landscape Architect. E. Protect sod areas by erecting such fences, barriers, signs, etc. as necessary to prevent trespass until establishment. F. Revised selection of turfgrass variety may be suggested by the Contractor on the basis of turf use, soil area, shade, maintenance and similar specific choices and revised with the approval of the Landscape Architect. February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Sod Turf 32 9200-3 G. Installation dates: Sod may be installed prior to green-up [dormant] in the spring until no later than 4 weeks prior to the first expe cted hard freeze in the fall. 1.06 WATERING A. Turfgrass sod shall be watered immediately after planting. After the first watering, water shall be applied to all areas as often and in sufficient amount as conditions may require to keep the sod in a healthy and vigorous growing conditio n until completion of the Contract. B. Newly sodded areas will be kept moist at all ti mes for ten (10) days following installation. Particular care is to be taken to assure even irrigation distribution on all areas of the sodded surfaces during hot, dry or windy weather. Excessive drying of th e sod slab before it has rooted into the soil may result in turf damage. The turf should not be allowed to wilt. If finish grade has settled during this period, or if the surface is une ven, an additional light rolling shall be carried out. C. Second and Subsequent Weeks: The landscape contractor shall water the turfgrass sod as required to maintain adequate moisture in the upper 4 inches of soil. Avoid application of too much water. Turfgrass sod should not be continually saturated. Depending on the sprinkler, as little as 20 to 30 minutes of water application may be sufficien t; other sprinklers may requires longer water application times. 1.07 MAINTENANCE OF LAWN A. From the time sod is installed until final acceptance of landscape installation, the lawn shall be watered, fertilized, and trash and debris shall be kept removed; weeds shall be controlled, and replacements shall be made; all as specified and full compensation fo r such work will be considered as included in the Contract Price. Af ter (7) to (10) days, the sodded area will be mowed at normally recommended heights. B. MOWING: For bluegrass or bluegrass I fescue turfgrass sod, turfgrass height shall be maintained between 11/2 and 21/2 inches unless otherwise specified. Not more than 1/3 of the grass leaf shall be removed by the initial cutting or subsequent cuttings. C. Thirty days after installation, apply a slow release nitrogen fertilizer at the rate to provide ½ lb. of nitrogen per 1000 sq ft. early in the growing season and another ½ lb. of nitrogen per 1000 sq. ft. mid-season. Water immedi ately to activate. 1.08 CLEAN-UP A. Remove all trash, rubbish, construction and pl anting materials, scraps, etc., from the site. Leave area in a neat, sightly condition. B. After the topsoil has been sp read and the final grades approved, the area shall be cleared of all grade stakes, surface trash and other objects that w ould hinder installation of turfgrass sod. Paved areas over which hauling operations are conducte d shall be cleaned as soon as the job is completed. 1.09 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT A. Guarantee the sod lawn installation for one year from the date of Final Acceptance. B. Replace all dead sod not in a vigorous co ndition immediately as directed by the Landscape Architect, of the same kind, at the expense of the Contractor. END OF SECTION February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Landscape Edging 32 9413-1 SECTION 32 9413 LANDSCAPE EDGING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Steel landscape edging. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 32 9000 - General Installation and requirements for sitework. B. Section 32 9100 - Planting: Installation and requirements for plant materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Product characteristics, in cluding materials and finishes. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods. 5. Maintenance methods. B. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two 4 inch (101 mm) long samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors. C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two 4 inch (101 mm) long samples representing actual product and color. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in accordance w ith manufacturer's requirements. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packagin g with labels intact until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufactur er: Sureloc Steel Edging, whic h is located at: 494 E. 64th St. ; Holland, MI 49423; Toll Free Tel: 800-787-3562; Tel: 61 6-392-3209; Fax: 616-392-5134; Email: info@surelocedging.com ; Web: www.surelocedging.com B. Substitutions: With approval of Landscape Architect. C. Requests for substitutions will be consider ed in accordance with Section 32 9000. 2.2 STEEL LANDSCAPE EDGING A. Landscape Edging: Steel alloy, interlocking system with sections to lock together without offset or overlap and stake punch-outs. Stakes not less than 12 inches (304 mm) long, with two stakes at every joint, by Sure-loc Steel Landscape Edging, as manufactured by Sure-loc Edging Corporation, Holland, MI, or approved equal. 1. Height and Length: 4 inches by 16 feet (101 mm by 4877 mm). 2. Thickness: Approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm); average: 0.182 - 0.188 inch (4.62 - 4.78 mm). February 15, 2012 E LH Circle/Concert Hall Plaza Streetscape Mary Hart Design LLC Landscape Edging 32 9413-2 3. Finish: Powder coating; color: Black. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify location of underground lines, irrigation hoses and other cables. 3.2 EDGING INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including staking requirements. B. Edge all landscape beds not otherwise bordered by hardscape, or where indicated on Landscape Plan. Define the area to be edged using string, garden hose or pain t. With a spade or mechani cal trencher, cut a trench along area to be defined to depth so that top of edging will not exceed ½” above finished grade/top of mulch. C. Steel Edging: Install edging with stake pockets on inside of planting bed. D. Back fill both sides of edging. Compact back fill so that top of edging is not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) above finish grade. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Repair or replace damaged products before Acceptance. END OF SECTION